Home

IP Office 7.0 - Beatrice Companies, Inc.

1. Fo er eee DC 1 P376 DS 376 DTE 144 EXPANSION 379 rh EXPANSION DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones 43 If connected to an out of building extension 39 the connection must be made via additional ROB barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground 194 if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead Must be connected if any out of building extensions 3 are connected to this module All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system 1P400 Digital Station 16 Ports 700184807 30 Ports 700184880 1EC60320 C7 Power Cord CEE7 16 Europe 7002
2. i 4 IP500v2 Installation 4 1 Tools and Equipment Required 42 DOCUMENTATION gest 20s oes ashore iaia 43 UNPACKING ec esatta 4 4 SD Card Preparation iii 4 4 1 Upgrade the Card Firmware IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Contents 4 4 2 Adding a Pre Built Configuration File 74 4 4 3 Creating a Configuration File 76 4 4 4 Adding a License File nnee 77 4 4 5 Adding a 9600 Series Screen Saver File 77 4 4 6 Adding Music on Hold FileS 77 4 5 IP500 CardInstallation 78 4 5 1 IP500 Daughter Card Preparation 79 4 5 2 IP500 Legacy Card Preparation 80 4 5 3 IP500 Card Insertion 81 46 VV ANVIOUIINING sesa ih Gales Saco aan nee eee 82 4 6 1 Wall Mounting Kit V2 83 4 6 2 Wall Mounting Kit V1 85 4 7 Rack Monting esea a 86 4 8 Connecting External Expansion Modules 88 4 9GIOUNAING sarti enti 90 4 10 Network Connection 91 4 11 Starting the SySstem ii 92 4 11 1 Checking the LEDS i 93 4 12 Changing the System to Standard Mode 95 4 13 Connecting PRONES 96 5 Initial Configuration 5 1 Setting the Sy
3. Indefinite hh mmi Timed 00 10 cancel 3 Select the type of shutdown required If Indefinite is used the system can only be restarted by having its power switched off and then on again If a Timed shutdown is selected the IP Office will reboot after the set time has elapsed System Shutdown Using the System Status Application 1 Start System Status 67 gt and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel select System 3 At the bottom of the screen select Shutdown System 4 Select the time duration for the shutdown or indefinite IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 169 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Shutdown Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 9500 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone Unlike Manager a system phone user cannot select an indefinite shutdown They can set a timed shut down of between 5 minutes and 24 hours 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select System Shutdown 4 Select a time period for the shutdown It must be in between 5 minutes and 24 hours 5 Press Done and then Confirm to begin the shutdown System Shutdown Using the 1P500v2 AUX Button W
4. 250 9 93 Digital SAO sanai i 252 OA PIM OMO V2 ocean a a 254 99 5 PONG leider 256 99 69 8 ere een nee ARTE eee ee ee eee eee 258 9 10 MOUNTING Kisses 260 9 10 1 IP500 Wall Mounting KitS 260 9 10 2 IP500 Rack Mounting Kit 261 9 10 3 IP400 Rack Mounting Kit 261 9 10 4 Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit 261 Sdi ENONG Sasser ait Grads a tax cedenseeseeceeseteen 262 SETSTTO1T0 1040o lai 264 9 11 21120 1140 1220 1230 n 265 Si 91600 266 TLA TAE o a 267 TLS TAIG reep T 268 Fs A ES 9 el 0 man Mer eed PM nN ce ee nee are tae oe 269 FITTO 271 OTE TOT Orern 273 Ooh B O EAEE E E A E E EE E EE 275 TITO ZAO n a labii 276 S E a E E e a E E EE A T 277 VA V2 DOO aa esc sale oe ae tet 278 Oe PAS O20 PRES RA EA 279 9 11 14 3020 eee re ee ee eer eee ia 280 Oo TAO BOA rateali 281 OW VO 304 excdacaccs coc archa con acri 282 ITINO O enel ccc 283 OS By E IONE TEA 284 e P lie Pi Ee EE T20 PET E RAE EEE ia 285 OE 209 2 e ai 286 911 21 9740 cr a adi 287 LI 2074 9 laine 288 SI E EET e NO PAA iaia 289 e f E ES e EO PE Ee eee E E E A 290 Ea 290 9 11 2044063 sori lia RI ee ee eee 291 Page 4 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Contents STI 274412 allea 292 9 13 Ancilliary SYStemS 349 204424 illa 293 9 13 1 Digitial Mobility SOIUtioN 349 Ot 29 A4600 LL LL LL ene 294 9 l3 2DECTRA LIL A DALL ALL 350
5. Rx A Rx B Tx A Tx B a Meterz 9 64 Feet White Orange Orange White White Green Blue White White Blue Green White White Brown Brown White e Supply PRI trunks cards are not supplied with these cables e SAP Code 700213440 e Standard Length 3m 9 10 Cable Color Red IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 System Components Physical Ports Network Termination Point Fida Network Termination HTB Page 383 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 17 TCM Port RJ21 These ports are used for TCM extension ports in an 1P500v2 system They are found on P500 Digital Station A 231 external expansion modules These are supported by 1P500v2 systems running IP Office Release 7 0 and higher They are used for supported M Series and T Series digital stations They are also used for 4100 and 7400 Series phone support by connection to a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system Cable lengths up to 305 m 1000 ft using 0 5mm 24AWG wires do not require a power booster Lengths up to 790 m 2600 ft are supported if an auxiliary power supply booster is used Ist RJ 21 Connector Port 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Not Used Pin Blue White Orange White Tip 28 White Green 2 3 Green White 2 Wire 6 7 8 3 Ring 4 Brown White White Slate Slate White i Red Blue Ring 6 Blue Red Ti Red Orange Orange R
6. LE aaa saa fo Be IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 331 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 68 T7316E Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module e Additional buttons can be supported on a T7316E phone through the addition of T7316E KEM 347 button modules I IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 332 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 69 T7406 T7406e Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module These cordless phones use a base station that can support multiple sets The T7406E base station supports up to 4 T7406E handsets The T7406 base station supports up to 3 T7406 handsets Each supported handset requires a connection from the base station to a TCM port on the IP Office system Each phone is dedicated to its base station and cannot roam even if multiple base stations are installed The T7406E is available in North America Mexico and Caribbean countries excluding Jamaica and Trinidad The T7406E replaces the discontinued T7406 cordless telephone IP Office Standard Vers
7. 1 The following wires must be kept apart that is not routed in the same bundle e Earth leads from the barrier box to the Phone modules e Internal wires for example extension leads going directly to the Phone modules e Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes IP Office Barrier Boxes SAP Code 1P400 Phone Barrier Box 81V 700293897 Use with Phone V1 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable anda functional earth lead 1P400 Phone Barrier Box V2 101V 700385495 Use with Phone V2 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable anda functional earth lead Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit 700293905 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 133 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 7 3 Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes Where more than 3 Phone Barrier Boxes are used they must be rack mounted The Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP Code 700293905 supports up to 8 Phone Barrier Boxes 1 Unscrew the two screws arranged diagonally at the front of each barrier box and use these same screws to reattach the barrier box to the rack mounting strip 2 Each barrier box is supplied with a solid green ground wire connected to its functional ground screw Remove and discard this wire Connect a green yellow ground wire to the protective earth screw in the center of the Point on the back of the Barrier Box RJ45 R11 3 The rack mounting strip has threaded M4 earthing pillars Connect the other end of the barrie
8. 166 7 6 REMOVING SD Gard as rese 167 76 1 Card SAUIGOWN x cractne eke hcl n 167 726 2 Card Stamp noaee i Rik RT 168 7 6 3 System ShUtdOWN 169 8 IP500 Basic Installation 8 1 IP500 Tools REQUIFred i 172 8 2 IP500 Read the Documentation 173 8 IP500 Unpackingise ene 174 8 4 IP500 Card Installation 175 8 4 1 IP500 Daughter Card Preparation 176 8 4 2 IP500 Legacy Card Preparation 177 3 4 3 IP500 Gard Insertioni n 178 8 5 Inserting the Feature KEY i 179 8 6 Applying POWEr 180 8 7 Check the CPU LED i 182 8 8 Upgrading the Core Software 183 8 9 Receiving the Configuration 184 8 10 Adding LICEnNCESs iii 185 8 11 Adding External Expansion Modules 186 8 12 Rack MOUNUNG acct casio 188 8 13 Wall MOUNTINg 190 8 13 1 Wall Mounting Kit V2 191 8 13 2 Wall Mounting Kit V1 i 193 Ot GrouinnGlinG iu ALL 194 9 System Components 9 1 IP500v2 Control Unit eee cccceeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 199 92 IP500 Control Uniesse 202 9 3 IP500 Base Carasso 205 9 3 1 4 Port Expansion Card 208 9 3 2 AnalogiPhones assalire 209 9 3 3 ATM Combination Card 210 9 3 4 BRI Combination Card
9. Cards LA 1P500 4 Port Expansion Card 1P500 BRI Combination Card IP500 ATM Combination Card 1 IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards e Trunk Cardst5 Number of Modules 3 Digital Station 16 30 Digital Station 16A 30A External Expansion Modules Telephone Types DECT DMS TCM ports Voicemail Embedded Voicemail Voicemail Pro 1 Not supported by 1P500 control units Support by 1P500v2 Control units only me UJ N P UJ m NIN AIAaAIU e UJ NIN AIAIUWU 2 Only 2 combinations cards are supported in a control unit regardless of type 3 External expansion modules can be added so long as the overall limit for extensions and trunks is not exceeded On non IP Office Standard Version mode systems only a maximum of one Analog Trunk 16 module is supported 4 A mix of BRI and PRI trunks is not supported by IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version 5 IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version only support a single port PRI card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 12 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview IP Office Modes 1 1 2 Feature Support Summary IP Office IP Office IP Office IP Office Essential Essential Essential Standard Edition Edition Edition Version PARTNER Norstar Quick Version Version Version Admi
10. IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 69 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 IP500v2 Installation This installation process is a simple outline as installation requirements and processes will vary e In this process all the IP Office hardware components are installed and connected without being switched on until the end of the process The control unit will then upgrade all the connected components including phones to the appropriate level of firmware e Also when switched on the system is not connected to the customers data network This ensures that the control unit will default to known default IP address settings unless you have pre loaded the System SD card with a configuration file with different settings e Tools and Parts Required 71 Check that you have the tools and additional parts required e Documentation 7 Ensure that you have obtained and read all the relevant documentation e Unpacking 73 Check that all the required equipment has been delivered and that there is no damage e SD Card Preparation 74 Upgrade and pre load the System SD card with a configuration and other files in order to speed up installation e Install the Base Cards 78 Attach any trunk daughter cards and IP400 legacy cards to the IP500 base cards Insert the cards into the control unit e Wall Mounting 8 If wall mounting attach the brackets and fit the unit to the wall e Rack Mounting 86 If rack mounting attach
11. PRI E1 E1R2 PRI T1 ATM4 wf uf A Xx nl IP500 wf wf i x A ui e E1R2 trunks are only supported in CALA and Korea IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 401 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 10 4 Further Information and Product Updates Further information including Product and Reference Manual updates can be obtained from Avaya Dealers and Distributors or from Avaya s web site http www avaya com This guide is also available from the Avaya s support web site http support avaya com Support Telephone Numbers For initial help and support contact your distributor supplier The following contact points are for Avaya authorized partners e In the USA only Avaya provides a toll tree Customer Helpline 24 hours a day e Name Avaya Technical Support Organization TSO e Customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 e Address 8744 Lucent Blvd Highlands Ranch Colorado 80129 USA e URL http support avaya com If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system call the Helpline or your Avaya representative Consultation charges may apply e Outside the USA If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your Avaya representative e URL http support avaya com 10 5 Port Safety Classification The Avaya IP Office systems have the following ports which are classified as follows Port Description Port Classification PRI port PRI ISDN con
12. System Components Phones 9 11 4 1408 This phone is supported with IP Office Release 6 and higher Connects via DS port IP Office Release 6 0 Programmable Buttons w 8 Headset Socket n Handsfree Speaker Microphone f Message Waiting Lamp n Display 3 x 24 backlit Supported Add Ons None Upgradeable Firmware Ti Fixed Function Keys A SPEAKER 3 HEADSET 7 MUTE nd dm VOLUME UP ff CONTACTS J E MESSAGE F HOLD A C E TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN zE CALL LOG Z CH prop HJ REDIAL CCE CONFERENCE f 2A MENU 1408 Telephone Black 700469851 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 267 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 5 1416 This phone is supported with IP Office Release 6 and higher Connects via DS port I P Office Release 6 0 Programmable Buttons ui 16 Headset Socket nd Handsfree Speaker f f Microphone Message Waiting Lamp nf Display 4 x 24 Backlit Supported Add Ons DBM32 34 x 3 Upgradeable Firmware nl Fixed Function Keys A SPEAKER 3 HEADSET MUTE nd dm VOLUME UP nf CONTACTS wf E MESSAGE BF HOLD Z C E TRANSFER J W VOLUME DOWN zE CALL LOG Z CH prop HLJ REDIAL ECC CONFERENCE A MENU 1416 Telephone Black 700469869 DBM32 Button Module Black 700469968 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 268 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 6 1603 This phone is supported with IP Office 4 2 and higher
13. e For full details of embedded voicemail setup and configuration refer to the Embedded Voicemail Installation manual e The memory card can also be used for storage of files normally obtained via TFTP transfer For example the music on hold wav file and supported 4600 Series 5600 Series software files This will however reduce storage space for prompt and message files if embedded voicemail is being used Non Avaya memory cards can be used for this function e The memory card is specially formatted by Avaya for embedded voicemail operation Reformatting the card will stop embedded voicemail support and require the card to be replaced IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 244 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Internal Cards 9 8 2 Voice Compression Modules IP400 VCMs are optional cards that can be installed inside the IP Office control unit Each VCM provides a number of voice compression channels 46 indicated by a number suffix For example a VCM 8 has 8 voice compression channels e For the IP500 control unit to use an IP400 Voice Compression Card an 1P500 Carrier Card 214 is also required for each 1P400 VCM For IP500 control units voice compression channels can also be added using up to 2 1P500 VCM base cards with VCM licenses 216 VCM Cards SAP Code aaa 25ms echo I P400 VCM5 700185119 cancellation IP400 VCM10 700185127 IP400 VCM20 700185135 I P400 VCM30
14. the connection must be made via additional IROB barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground DTE 144 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION 379 RJ 45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing 38 Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections 39 All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system 1P400 Digital Station V2 16 Ports 700359839 30 Ports 700359847 1EC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit All 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 251 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 3 Digital Station The IP400 Digital Station module also know
15. 211 99 5Diglial Statioi sis uses lie 212 936 EGC al rele ea 213 9 3 7 Legacy Card Carrier a 214 9 3 8 TCM8 Digital Station 215 9 39 VOM eire 216 9 4 IP500 Trunk Daughter CardS 218 9 4 1 Analog Trunk Card 220 9 4 2 BRI Trunk GardS nun nia np nina 221 9 4 3 PRI Trunk Cards sila 222 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 9 5 IP500 Expansion MOdUles ee 223 9 5 1 Analog Trunk 16 ccccscsseeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeees 225 935 2 BRESOG Lilla IA 227 9 5 3 Digital Station si iaia 229 9 5 4 Digirial station A olio 231 95 9 PRONG lai 234 DG CALITO ROY S rcon E aa 236 9 6 1 IP500v2 System SD CardS 236 9 6 2 IP500 Sman Cardi eena O 238 9 7 IP400 Trunk CardS in 239 9 7 1 Analog Trunk Card Uni ATM4U 240 9 7 2 Analog Trunk Cards ATMA 241 9 73 BRI TRUNK Cards naar 241 9 7 4 T1 PRI Trunk Gardini 242 9 7 5 ET PRI TUNK Cards 242 9 7 6 E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards cccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 243 9 8 IP400 Internal CardS 244 9 8 1 Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards 244 9 8 2 Voice Compression Modules 245 9 9 IP400 Expansion Modules n 246 9 9 1 Analog IrunKEtT6o a lieslar alla 248 9 9 2 Digital Station V2
16. AVAYA IP Office 7 0 IP Office Standard Version Installation 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 2011 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notices While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya assumes no liability for any errors Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes Documentation disclaimer Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by End User Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation s provided by Avaya Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time a
17. Alternatively the IP Office Administrator Applications suite can be downloaded from Avaya s support website http support avaya com e D Windows PC Requirements This should meet the requirements of the administrator applications being installed The specification below are the minimum requirements for IP Office Manager If other applications are to be installed on the PC then their individual requirements should also be meet Session Mmmm Mmmm Processor 600MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD 800MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP RAM 128MB 256MB HD Space 1GB 800MB for NET2 200MB for Manager 1 4GB 800MB for NET2 600MB for the full IP Office Admin suite Display 800 x 600 256 Colors 1024 x 768 16 bit High Color Operating Supported on Windows XP Pro Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 2003 and Windows System 2008 e 32 bit and 64 bit versions are supported e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Vindows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 63 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Installing the IP Office Admin Applications 1 Using the Add or Remove Programs option in the Windows Control Panel check that the PC does not already have a version of the IP Office Admin suite installed e If yes and the suite is a pre IP Office 3 2 version remove the e
18. Connection via DECT base stations 3720 285 3725 286 3740 287 3749 288 Connection via DECT R4 base stations 2000 Series 4601 29 4602 295 4602SW 295 4610 296 4610SW 298 4620 297 4620SW 297 4621SW 298 4625 299 e 5600 Series 5601305 560230 56025W 304 5610 305 5620 306 5621 307 e 9600 Bence 9608 310 9620L 31t 9620C 31t 9621G 313 9630G 31 9640 316 9640G 316 9641G 318 9650 319 9650C 31 e T3 IP Series T3 IP Compact 336 T3 IP Classic 334 T3 IP Comfort 335 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 43 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SIP e 1000 Series 1010 264 1040 264 e 1100 Series 1120E 265 1140E 265 e 1200 Series 1220 265 1230 265 e Softphone Avaya IP Office SIP Softphone application Analog Telephones Analog phones and devices connect to PHONE 382 ports with the IP Office system However due to the variety of analog phones and device available no guarantee of operation is given It is the responsibility of the IP Office installer and maintainer to test and verify the operation of proposed analog equipment e 6200 Series 6211 6219 6221 North America e Interquartz Gemini 9330 AV 9335 AV 9281 AV Europe Middle East Africa Asia Pacific IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 44 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview IP Office Phones 1 11 VoIP IP Office is a converged telephony system that is it combines
19. Edit Services Base TCP Port Services Base TCP Pork 20904 3 Enable Time Server Enable BootP and TFTP Servers Enable Port For Serial Communication Enter Port Number To Be Used For Serial Communication Auto Connect on start up Set Simplified View as default Convert default Quick mode to Standard mode 3 With this option enabled when a configuration for a new or defaulted system running in IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode is received by Manager it will automatically be converted to a IP Office Standard Version mode configuration This setting does not affect existing systems with non default configurations 4 Important IP Address Settings Default to Server The conversion will set the DHCP mode to Server and the LAN addresses to their defaults of 192 168 42 1 and 192 168 43 1 Using Manager to change these settings to the required values 5 This is a suitable time to begin initial configuration 100 before sending the configuration back to the IP Office system to restart in IP Office Standard Version mode 6 Sending the configuration back to the system will restart the system in IP Office Standard Version mode IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 95 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 13 Connecting Phones During initial power up the IP Office automatically creates extension and user entries for all analog and digital extension ports DS and TCM in the system This allows those devices to
20. IPO Monitor IPO Voice Networking IPO PCPartner IPO TAPI UDP IPO BLF IPO License Dongle EConf Discovery Service Access Protocol UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP Dynamically allocated ports used during VolP calls for RTP and RTOP traffic The port range can be adjusted through the System Gatekeeper tab To voicemail server address From IP Office TAPI PC with Wave drive user support From the IP Office Monitor application Small Community Network signalling AVRIP and BLF updates Each system does a broadcast every 30 seconds BLF updates are sent required up a maximum of every 0 5 seconds From an IP Office application for example Phone Manager or SoftConsole Used to initiate a session between the IP Office and the application From an IP Office TAPI user PC BT Fusion variant No longer used Broadcast to the IP Office LAN and the first 10 IP addresses registered from other subnets To the License Server IP Address set in the IP Office configuration Conferencing Center Service to IP Office IP Office discovery from Manager IP Office configuration settings access TLS Secure IP Office system status access IP Office security settings access TLS Secure e CDR SMDR from the IP Office is sent to the port number and IP address defined during configuration and using either TCP or UDP as selected IP Office Sta
21. or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license IP Network Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp PoE Class Typical Idle Power Consumption Display Supported Add Ons Upgradeable Firmware 3 0 wf 2 Xx AI nl 3 5W Class 2 None None i PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority X X Standard DCP Phone Keys x I SPEAKER x HEADSET J Ea Messages f amp HOLD amp DROP 2 43 REDIAL 56011P 5601 ROHS compliant Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 MUTE sf sla VOLUME UP G6 TRANSFER ff F VOLUME DOWN ECC CONFERENCE Multi Grey Multi Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey With CAT5 cable With CAT5 cable USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina 700345366 700381908 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Page 303 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 39 5602 The 5602IP
22. 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Page 344 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phone Add Ons 9 12 8 SMB24 The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 This button module is supported with 9630G 9640 9640g 9650 and 9650C telephones Up to 3 SMB24 modules can be attached to any one phone For additional limitations see Phone Add Ons 337 e The Class requirement of PoE powered phones may be increased if the phone is used with additional equipment such as a button module VELEI SAP Code SMB24 Button Module Charcoal Grey 700462518 SMB24 without faceplate 700462526 SMB24 Replacement Stand 700416571 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 345 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 12 9 T3 DSS The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 The T3 DSS provides an additional 36 programmable keys for phones in the supported T3 series The T3 DSS is moulded and designed to be attached to the associated phone Signalling is achieved by cable connection to the Link port on the T3 phone A further two T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS For additional limitations s
23. 22 May 2011 9 17 4 User Licenses The features available to a basic IP Office Worker can be enhanced by the addition of User Profile licenses Once these licenses are present in the system configuration the profiles can be applied to selected users through the User User Profile setting in the IP Office configuration os e eo iL Basic User Office Teleworker Mobile Power User Worker Worker 7 TTS for Email Reading IP Office SIP SoftPhone 1 These features are supported for users on systems with the appropriate pre 1P Office Release 6 legacy licenses o e Toe ides Te e Teleworker Profile License These licenses set the number of users who can have their profile set as Teleworker For user with this optional additional settings are enabled in the IP Office configuration for the following services one X Portal for IP Office with Telecommuter option UMS Web Services and IP Office SIP SoftPhone e IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 1 229430 e IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 5 229431 e IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 20 229432 e IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 5 TRIAL 229433 e Mobile Worker Profile License These licenses set the number of users who can have their profile set as Mobile Worker For user with this optional additional settings are enabled in the IP Office configuration for the following services Mobility Features and TTS for Email Reading e IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 1 229434 e IPO LIC R6 MOBI
24. 373 BRI 370 BRI So 374 BRI Trunk 375 DC I P 370 DCII P 376 Door 135 DS 370 376 Expansion 370 379 EXT O P 135 370 379 IP Office 366 LAN 370 380 PF 370 381 Phone POT 370 382 PRI 370 383 RS232 DTE 370 RS323 DTE 144 377 Safety Classification 402 USB 370 Used 366 WAN 370 Power Supplies 1151C1 33 1151C2 33 Cords 34 Type 40w PSU 33 Type 45W Earthed PSU 33 Type 60W Earthed PSU 33 Uninterrupted Power Supply 35 PRI Port 370 PRI Port 383 Programmable Buttons 339 342 343 346 348 Protocols 366 Q Quad BRI Trunk Card 24 239 R Rack Mounting Control Units 40 Recorder Interface 338 Region Availability Analog Phone 43 262 DECT Phone 43 262 DS Phone 43 262 H323 Phone 43 262 Remove SD Card 120 152 167 Requirements Cable Access 55 Cable Clearance 55 Enviromental 54 Space 55 Wall Mounting 54 Restore IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 SD Card 160 RoHS 9 RS232 DTE Port 370 S Safety Statement 400 SAP Codes 201B Recorder 338 2402D Phone 275 2410D Phone 276 2420D Phone 277 3616 Phone 278 3620 Phone 279 3626 Phone 280 3641 Phone 283 3711 Phone 284 3810 Phone 289 4406D Phone 291 4412D Phone 292 4424D Phone 293 4450 Programmable Buttons 339 4601 Phone 294 4602IP Phone 295 4602SW Phone 295 4610SW Phone 296 4620IP Phone 297 4620SW Phone 297 4621SW Phone 298 4625SW Phone 299 5402D Phone 300 5410 Phone 301 5420D Phone 302 5601 Phone 303 5602IP Phone 304 5602SW Phone
25. 6 6 Upgrading the IP Office Software The installed IP Office Manager includes IP Office software files for control units external expansion modules and phones appropriate to the IP Office software level e New I P500v2 Systems For the first 90 days a new IP500v2 control unit will run any supported IP Office Release without requiring an upgrade license The highest level run is written into the system s memory not the SD card and that becomes a permanent entitlement for the control unit However after 90 days the 1P500v2 will require an upgrade license if upgraded to a software release higher than any that it has run in the initial 90 day period fh Warning Systems upgraded without the appropriate license will display No license available and will not allow any telephony functions The IP Office system can be upgraded in two ways e Using the IP Office Manager Upgrade Wizard 126 The upgrade wizard is part of IP Office Manager and can be used to upgrade all types of IP Office system e Upgrading the System SD Card 128 For 1P500v2 control units the software on the System SD card can be upgraded by a range of methods i e directly upgrading the SD card or using the upgrade wizard When the system is rebooted it will use the new software Ry WARNINGS e Check IP Office Technical Bulletins Check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletin for the IP Office software release before proceeding any further It may contain information r
26. Black Slate 08 slate Violet ___ Not Used Page 233 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 5 5 Phone I1P500 Phone modules can be used to add additional PHONE ports to an IP Office system The module is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the 1P500 Phone 16 and IP500 Phone 30 respectively Supported on IP500 and IP500v2 Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 2 1 36 minimum Bin file dvpots bin I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional P500 Rack Mounting Kit It can be wall mounted using the 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Boxed 4 4Kg 9 7lbs Based on Phone 30 V2 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 234 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Expansion Modules I PO 500 Phone Connections A IP Office 500 o CE
27. MESSAGES i amp F HOLD J GO TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN prop fa REDIAL CC CONFERENCE 2402D Multi Grey 700381973 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 275 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 10 2410 Connects via DS port IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons w 12 6 buttons x 2 pages Headset Socket ff Handsfree Speaker af lf Microphone Message Waiting Lamp wf Display 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware ul Standard DCP Phone Keys 4 A SPEAKER HEADSET 4 MUTE f alla VOLUME UP J E MESSAGES i amp F HOLD Z C C TRANSFER FF VOLUME DOWN prop HLJ REDIAL ECC CONFERENCE 2410 Multi Grey 700381999 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 276 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 11 2420 Connects via DS port I P Office Release 1 4 Programmable Buttons w 24 8 buttons x 3 pages Headset Socket ff Handsfree Speaker of lf Microphone Message Waiting Lamp nf Display 29 characters x 7 lines
28. Not used Not used Not used Except on some older equipment these ports do not include a ringing capacitor Therefore for connection to 4 wire analog phones where this is a requirement typically the United Kingdom and New Zealand connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors On some older 1P403 control units and 1P400 Phone V1 modules pins 2 and 6 are internally connected via ringing capacitors Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ45 to RJ 11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ 45 port to a DS phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions _o R45 Sc E a Rds da 1 3 e SAP Code T700047871 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 4 Meters 3 2 Feet Not used Not used Not used Signal 1 Signal 2 Not used Not used Not used L or m l 4 Page 382 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 16 PRI Port These ports are used for connection to PRI trunk services including El T1 and E1 R2 PRI Trunk Cable This cable is used to connect from IP Office PRI trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment If that equipment does not use RJ 45 sockets the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternate cable used The appropriate signal pin outs and wire colours are detailed below IF Office PRIUBRI Port Fida Rds oO N OO WU BB WIN RF
29. P500 trunk daughter cards to support the connection of trunks to the base card Each daughter card is supplied with the stand off pillars required for installation and a label to identify the daughter cards presence on the front of the base card after installation e 1P500 Combination cards are pre fitted with a trunk daughter card which cannot be removed or changed for another type of trunk daughter card IP500 Analog Trunk Daughter Card 220 a This card allows the base card to support 4 analog loop start trunks e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an IP500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 e Maximum 4 per control unit IP500 PRI U Trunk Daughter Card 222 This card allows the base card to support up to 2 PRI trunk connections The card is available in single and dual port variants The card can be configured for El PRI T1 robbed bit T1 PRI or ElR2 PRI trunks e Maximum 4 per control unit e The IP Office system supports 8 unlicensed B channels on each 1P500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected require I1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 388 licenses added to the configuration These additional channels consume the licenses based on which a
30. SD Card Management The 1P500v2 control unit has two SD card slots labeled System SD and Optional SD respectively These are used as follows e System SD Card An Avaya System SD card must be present in this slot at all times This card holds copies of the IP Office firmware and configuration and is used as the IP500v2 control units non volatile memory e Each Avaya System SD card has a unique Feature Key serial number which is used for generating and validating licenses entered into the IP Office configuration e The card stores the prompts for embedded voicemail operation and acts as the message store for embedded voicemail messages e Prior to any planned shutdown or restart of the IP Office system the current configuration running in the IP Office system s RAM memory is copied to the primary folder on the System SD card and to the systems non volatile memory e Following a restart the software in the primary folder is loaded by the 1P500v2 control unit If the required software is not present or valid a sequence of fallback options is used see Booting from the SD Cards 155 for full details e Following a restart if present the configuration file in the primary folder is loaded by the P500v2 control unit If no file is present the system will check for a file in its internal non volatile memory If no copy is found it will generate a default configuration file See Booting from the SD Cards 155 for full details e Once each
31. Support for the 1603SW model was added in IP Office 5 0 Support for the variants was added in IP Office Release 6 0 and in 5 0 maintenance releases e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 4 2 Q4 2008 5 0 Programmable Buttons 3 Headset Socket A Handsfree Speaker f f Microphone Message Waiting Lamp PoE Class Typical Idle Class 2 Class 2 Power Consumption 4 3W 4 3W Display 2 x 16 backlit Supported Add Ons None Upgradeable Firmware w PC Pass Through Port X X af lf with Voice Priority Fixed Telephony Function Keys J SPEAKER x D HEADSET A MUTE sf a VOLUME UP x Il CONTACTS xX E MESSAGE nl HOLD sl 7 VOLUME DOWN x CALL LOG Code Phones Ethernet cord sold separately Local power sold separately PoE adapter sold separately A O40 TRANSFER A DROP Jf HE REDIAL GCC CONFERENCE AA MENU Material Description 700415540 700458508 700476849 700458524 700415615 CAT5 Ethernet Cable 14 ft 700383326 CAT5 Ethernet Cable 1 ft 700436710 Power Adapters 1603 PoE adapter Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V US 700415607 700451230 Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V UK Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V EU Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V ARGENTINA IP Office S
32. Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing 90 Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections 39 All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system IPO 500 Digital Station 16 Ports 700449499 30 Ports 700426216 TECSO2 ZO C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 All 700500923 I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 230 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Expansion Modules 9 5 4 Digital Station A IP Office 500 Digital Station A modules can be used to add additional TCM 384 ports to an IP Office system They provides extension ports for supported M Series and T Series digital stations They can also be u
33. a Provides a system view of all anager E active calls For use with earlier System Status Application versions of IP Office Call Status This feature requires 36KB on vour hard drive Install to 8 Ensure that at minimum System Monitor and Manager are selected Click Next gt 9 Click Install 10 Installation of Windows Net2 components may be required If dialogs for this appear follow the prompts to install Net 11 If requested reboot the PC IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 64 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP Office Administration Software Installing the Admin Applications 3 2 Installer PC Connection During installation it is recommended that the IP Office control unit is started without it being connected to any network That ensure that the IP Office defaults to a known set of IP address settings If the IP Office is started connected to a network with a DHCP server The programming PC will need to be connected to the same network as either a DHCP client or with an IP address valid for that network This section covers connecting your installation PC directly to the IP Office control unit Requirements e DIP Office Administration PC A Windows PC with the IP Office Administrator Application suite installed 63 e D LAN Cable Direct Connection to a Defaulted IP Office Control Unit 1 The default address for an IP Office control unit LAN port is 192 168 42 1 255
34. a single control unit or expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module and bolts for securing the module in the rack Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit 7 e Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700293905 Barrier boxes must be used for out of building analog phone extensions 39 This bracket allows up to 8 IP Office barrier boxes to be rack mounted and simplifies the number of connections to the protective ground point in the rack This kit must be used when more than 3 barrier boxes are in use and supports a maximum of 16 barrier boxes for a single external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 59 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Rack Module Positioning The integral expansion ports on a control unit are located on the rear of the unit For 1P500 and IP500v2 control units an additional 4 expansion ports can be added to the front of the control unit by installing an 1P500 4 Port Expansion card e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnect cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card I gt e n i e P _ e P Jr I ds
35. f HED REDIAL Z CCC CONFERENCE lu MENU Material Description Code Phones Ethernet cord sold separately Local power sold separately PoE adapter sold separately Accessories 1608 Wall Mount Kit Includes 1 ft Ethernet cable and screws 700415623 Power Adapters 700451230 700451248 700451255 700451263 700451271 700451289 700451297 Labels IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 271 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Material Description Code 1608 Paper DESI Labels Pack of 50 Labels 8 5 x 11 700415649 Headsets SupraElite Monaural Two Ear Voice Tube HIS cable required IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 272 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 8 1616 This phone is supported with IP Office 4 2 and higher Support for the variant was added in IP Office Release 6 0 and in 5 0 maintenance releases e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 4 2 Q4 2008 Programmable Buttons w 16 Headset Socket wf Handsfree Speaker of lf Microphone Message Waiting Lamp f PoE Class Typical I dle Class 2 Power Consumption Display 4 x 24 Backlit Supported Add Ons BM32 340 x 3 Upgradeable Firmware Ti PC Pass Through Port with Voice Prio
36. ile li E ju JP ll dl Ji O dd j _ i IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 60 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 3 IP Office Administration Software IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 61 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 3 IP Office Administration Software In order to install an IP Office system you must be familiar with using the following IP Office applications They must be available on your installation PC ga T Manager IP Office Manager is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration Different levels of access can be defined to control which parts of the configuration Manager user can view and alter Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system e System Status The IP Office System Status application SSA is a reporting tool that provides a wide range of information about the current status of an IP Office system Its can report the available resources and components within the system and details of calls in progress Details of the number of alarms are recorded and the time date of the most recent alarms When required for diagnostics escalation SSA is able to take a snap shot image of the IP Office system s status including a copy of its current configuration Use of SSA requires an IP Office service user name and password that has been configured for System Status access in the IP Office s s
37. wf VCM 24 w VCM 30 iB Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards Parts and Equipment Required 1 0 1P500 Carrier Card 2 0 1P400 Card The table opposite lists supported cards Any card not listed is not supported Cards are supplied with 2 plastic stand off pillars Trunk cards are also supplied with a replacement blanking plate which is not required Tools Required 1 0 5mm Flat blade screwdriver 2 0 Anti static wrist strap and ground point Procedure Installing a Carrier Card 1 Check that correct cards have been supplied 2 Ensure that you are wearing an anti static wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point 3 On the carrier card identify the position of the jumper block and stand off pillar holes for the P400 card The peg holes are labeled as VCM or TRUNK 4 f fitting an 1P400 trunk card identify which of the plastic snap off panels on the front of the carrier card need to be removed to allow the trunk cable connections Carefully remove those panels Single PRI Dual PRI ATMA Quad BRI 5 Fit the stand off pillars to the IP500 carrier card 6 Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the IP400 card onto its jumper and the stand off pillars IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 80 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation IP500 Card Installation 4 5 3 IP500 Card I
38. 0 CCR run in Windows users 2003 on a virtual server e Voicemail Pro includes UMS VB Scripting and 3rd party database operation It also includes the installation of ContactStore if required e Both ContactStore and one X Portal for IP Office use Tomcat servers as part of the application For scenarios with both installed the redirect port setting of the ContactStore s Tomcat server should be configured to a port other than 8080 e The supported virtual servers are e VMWare Server e Microsoft Virtual Server 2005 R2 e Microsoft Server Hyper V e When used in a virtual server configuration Customer Call Reporter and one X Portal each require a 2GB RAM virtual machine Voicemail Pro and ContactStore each require a 1GB RAM virtual machine IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 365 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 13 IP Office Ports Most PC firewalls will request the user to allow various exceptions when a newly installed application is first run However this may not always be the case especially if the firewall is located elsewhere than the user s PC Adding Firewall Exceptions The file avayafw bat can be used to open up the necessary firewall exceptions for IP Office applications The file can be downloaded from http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase tools firewall It only works for e The default Windows XP Windows 2003 firewall e The application must be installed for the exception to be
39. 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Card Maintenance Actions Using IP Office Manager IP Office System Status Application or a phone configured as a System Phone a number of actions can be performed on the SD cards System Minutes Phone System Status Action Description Manager 4 4 4 Memory cards should always be shutdown 167 before being removed when the system is running Though the card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard Shutting down the card will disable embedded voicemail if being used If the System SD card is removed features licensed by the card s Feature Key serial number will continue operating for up to 2 hours Backup 15 Copy the files in the primary folder on the System SD card to the backup folder on the card Shutdown Restart 167 Restore 160 Copy the files in the backup folder on the System SD card to the primary folder on the card and restart the IP Office system Copy li6t Copy all the files on the System SD card to the Optional SD card Upgrade Copy software files in the primary folder on the Binaries 164 Optional SD card to the primary folder on the System SD card and then restart the IP Office system Upgrade Copy the configuration file in the primary folder on 5 seconds Configuration 164 the Optional SD card to the primary f
40. 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e 1P400 So8 Module 258 Provides 8 ETS BRI So 874 ports for the connection of ISDN devices This unit is not intended to support BRI trunks IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 32 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview External Expansion Modules 1 7 Power Supplies and Cables All IP Office control units and external expansion modules either have an internal power supply unit or are supplied with an external power supply unit 1 7 1 Power Supplies The 1P500 and IP500v2 control units have an internal power supply unit and so only require a suitable locale specific power cord 34 and a power outlet that includes a switch Note that if the power cord includes an earth lead the power outlet must be connected to a protective earth External expansion modules are all supplied with an external power supply unit PSU These PSUs include an integral 1 5 meter lead for connection to the control unit or expansion module A power cord 34 for connection from the PSU to the power outlet is not included as this varies by locale The appropriate power cord must be ordered separately or sourced locally Additional power supply units are required for 4450 EU24 XM24 and T3 DSS add on modules and may also be required for Avaya IP phones IP Office Control 40W PSU Analog Digital Station V1 Phone V1 1EC60320 C7 Units and External Expansion Modules 60W Earthed 1P400 Di
41. 16 6 DO IP POP setsieicc522cavesasstocsiavaievidetansiesieaadeins 376 9 11 52 Audio Conferencing UNit 321 9 16 7 DS Polinesia 376 OT 1 00 ETRO ETR ODore 322 9 TGO EFFRO onai eR A 377 9 11 54 ETR18 ETR 18D icciecescceccds ccc ccecaesertee oh ccts 323 9 16 9 RS232 DTE Port cern 377 TSE TR 34 Dl 324 9SI6 10 ETR Poissh lalla 378 0 11 56 MZ TOU iii Mar 325 9 16 11 EXPANSION Porti ia 379 OO WIT OO Nien ieri eat icone alee 325 9 16 12 EXT OP P Ol sest tects cee eee ee 379 9 11 58 M7208 e aidar d 326 9 16 19 LAN POH iii cal idlelela 380 Oa OO M720 8N easter hes doch a tate eee ais 326 Pad PO aan aaen ii aa 381 SOM 327 9 16 15 PHONE POT POM c 382 eq 6LMRION elle al 327 9 lb l6 RRI Polticss idee elia 383 S11602M 324 nti 328 9 16 17 TOM Port R421 384 9 TLCS PAS 72202 1S PE ee 328 9 16 18 TCM Port RI45 caiano 385 9047000 429 S 17Liceneesistsii balia lalla 386 9 65 PrO iii 329 9 17 1 System Edition Licenses 387 9 l 66 l7208 aaneaa ea 330 9 17 2 Trunk LICEnNSINg 388 OO 1 PSG sele 331 9 17 3 Telephone Endpoint Licenses 389 2 Fad at gt 6 9 sal 173160 teeta a 332 9 174 USEF LICCNSES atic hei eli 390 9 11 69 T7406 T74066 333 9 17 5 Voicemail Pro Licenses 392 oT TO GIASSIC an ite aes 334 9 17 6 Customer Call Reporter Licenses 394 IAR LIS cono
42. 1P500 Phone Module e P500 BRI So Module e 1P400 Digital Station V2 Modules e IP500 Digital Station Modules e 1P400 Phone V2 Modules e IP500 Digital Station Modules A IP500 Control Unit e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 1 Right hand slot 4 only e IP500 Trunk Card Support X e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnect cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card 1 34 56 68 910 1112 LEDs 1 to 8 are used for the expansion ports on the rear of the control unit LEDs 9 to 12 are used for the card s own expansion ports PT Breen fon TT expansion module present Red Fieshing initializing O O O ooo LUI Rea don dere IPO 1P500 EXP CARD 4 PORT Includes 4 yellow 2 metre interconnect 700472889 cables I PO EXP CABLE RJ 45 RJ 45 2M YELLOW Only for use with the 4 Port Expansion 700472871 card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 208 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Base Cards 9 3 2 Analog Phone This card is used to add analog phone ports to an 1P500 and IP500v2 control unit It is available in two variants pro
43. 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 10 TAPI IP Office TAPI is a client PC application that allows TAPI compliant applications to interact with the IP Office The IP Office TAPI software can be used in one of two modes depended on whether it is licensed or not The same software is installed in either case with the licenses if any being entered in the IP Office system configuration e lst Party TAPI In this unlicensed mode the TAPI software supports control of an individual user s associated extension allowing a TAPI compliant application to answer requires a phone that supports handsfree answer and make calls e 3rd Party TAPI In this licensed mode TAPI software can be used to control call function on multiple user extension This mode is used with CTI Developer applications DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 License X Optional Licenses are required for 3rd party TAPI mode operation See CTI Licenses 397 PC Requirements 1st Party TAPI Minimum PC Requirements 64MB Hard Disk Free Space 50MB Server OS 2003 Server Pentium __ Pill 800MHz 2008 Server Celeron 3 800Mhz Client OS AMD___ athlonB6s 0mHz XP Professional Vista Windows 7 Operating System Support e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Vindows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions PC Requirements 3rd Party TAPI Minimum PC Requirements 64
44. 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnect cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card Installation Requirements e O Installation space either on or under the existing IP Office control unit e O Switched power outlet socket e O Available EXPANSION port on the control unit e O Grounding Requirements e O Functional Grounding Connection of a functional earth 38 gt is e O Recommend for all modules e O Connection of a functional ground is mandatory for Analog Trunk modules e O Protective Grounding Connections of a protective ground via surge protection equipment 39 is e O Mandatory for Analog trunk modules in the Republic of South Africa e O Mandatory for Digital Station and Phone modules connected to out of building extensions e O Mandatory for Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 modules Tools Required e O Manager PC e O Tools for rack mounting 86 gt optional Parts and Equipment Required e O External Expansion Module Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a 1m blue interconnect cable 2m Yellow interconnect cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card and should only be used with that card e O Po
45. 30 DISTORTE h h feta Ze i h h h h A a i h h wets tals Ts 1 IT a4 e E EA eeen EEA eE EA EXPANSION 16 244 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE Y2 LEDs 1 to 16 or 1 to 30 indicate when a phone is connected They do not indicate phone activity The center LED indicate the module status Green Okay Red Error Flashing Loading firmware ic III canned DC 1 P376 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module TCM RJ 21 384 RJ 21 port Provides extension ports for supported M Series and T Series digital stations They can also be used for 4100 and 7400 Series phone support by connection to a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system DTE 144 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION 1379 RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing 90 Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections 39 A
46. 30 TCM 385 ports for supported Avaya TCM digital phones 43 Supported by IP500v2 only e IP500 Phone Module 23 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 PHONE 882 ports for analog phones e IP500 BRI So8 Module 22 gt Provides 8 ETSI BRI So ports 374 for the connection of ISDN devices This unit is not intended to support BRI trunks IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 29 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e IP500 Analog Trunk Module 225 Provides an additional 16 ANALOG 373 ports for connection of analog trunks Supports both loop start and ground start trunks e Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP Office control unit are grounded e In IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes only 1 Analog Trunk module is supported IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 30 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview External Expansion Modules 1 6 2 IP400 External Expansion Modules The following IP400 external expansion modules are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and can be used with an 1P500 and IP500v2 control units Each module uses an external power supply unit 33 gt supplied with the module A locale specific power cord 34 for the PSU must be ordered separately If being rack mounted these units use the 1P400 rack
47. 300 5410 301 5420 302 e T3 Upn Series T3 Compact 336 T3 Classic 334 T3 Comfort 335 Digital Station TCM Port These digital stations connect to the 1P500v2 IP Office system via TCM 385 ports The following are supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version and IP Office Standard Version modes e 4100 Series 4135 4136 4145 4145EX 4146 4146EX Connection to IP Office TCM ports via a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system e 7400 Series 7420 7430 7434 7439 7440 7444 7449 Connection to IP Office TCM ports via a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system e ACU Audio Conferencing Unit 32 e M Series MT7100 325 MT7100N 325 MT7208 326 MT7208N 326 M7310 327 M7310N 327 M7324 328 M7324N 328 e T Series T7000 32 T7100 329 T7208 33 T7316 33 T7316E 332 T7406 333 T7406E 335 IP Telephones IP Phones SIP and H323 connect to the IP Office system via the RJ 45 LAN or WAN These device require an Avaya IP Endpoint license and voice compression resources They are not supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode H323 e 1600 Series 1603IP SW 26 1608 271 1608 1 27t 1616 273 1616 1 275 e 3600 Series 3616 278 3620 279 3626 280 3641 28 3645 282 e 3700 Series 3701 283 3711 284
48. 304 5610SW Phone 305 5620 Phone 306 5621 Phone 307 EU24 Programmable Buttons 342 EU24BL Programmable Buttons 343 T3 Classic 334 T3 Comfort 335 T3 Compact 336 T3 DSS Programmable Buttons 346 XM24 Programmable Buttons 348 SD Card Backup 159 Copy 161 Removal 120 152 167 Restore 160 Security Settings Default 147 Serial Feature Key 42 Server Minimum Specifications 369 Single E1 PRI Trunk Card 24 239 Single E1R2 Trunk Card 24 239 Single PRI T1 Trunk Card 24 239 Small Office Edition Wireless Card 25 Smart card Feature Key 42 SNMP 139 Enabling 142 Page 414 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SNMP 139 Installation 140 Port 142 respond 142 Trap Sending 142 SNMP MIBs Application 48 S08 Example ISDN Terminal 136 Example Video Conference 137 SoftConsole Application 48 Components 360 License Requirements 360 PC Requirements 360 Software Erase Core Software 148 Space Requirements 55 Statement Homologation 400 Safety 400 Supported Language 47 Locales 47 System Status Application 48 System Status Application Components 361 License Requirements 361 PC Requirements 361 T TAPI Components 362 License Requirements 362 PC Requirements 362 WAV Driver Application 48 TAPILink Lite Application 48 TAPIlink Pro Application 48 Training Courses 51 Trunk Interface Modules 401 U USB Feature Key 42 Port 370 V Voice Compression Channels 46 Voicemail Lite Application 48 VoiceMail Pro Application 48 C
49. 43 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 DHCP Mode Server Server No of DHCP IP Addresses 200 200 If the IP address and DHCP mode settings are not suitable for the customers network they should changed Note that changing the IP Office s IP address settings requires it to restart e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot Changing IP Address Settings 1 Start Manager 66 and receive the configuration from the IP Office system 2 Click on w System 3 On the System tab in the Name field enter a distinctive name for the IP Office system Click OK 4 Click on the LAN1 tab 5 On the LAN Settings sub tab change the IP Address IP Mask and DHCP Mode settings to match the customer requirements These settings are used for the LAN port on the back of the IP Office control unit Click OK 6 Repeat the process for the LAN2 tab Those settings are used for the WAN port on the back of the IP Office control unit 7 Click on the ial Save icon and save the updated configuration back to the IP Office system IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 102 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Initial Configuration Changing the IP Address Settings 5 3 Changing the Default Passwords At a minimum you should change the password used for IP Office configuration access An IP Office system s security setting
50. 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 10 Mounting Kits The following mounting kits are available for use with IP Office systems 9 10 1 IP500 Wall Mounting Kits 1P500 1P500v2 control units and 1P500 external expansion modules can be wall mounted To do this a wall mounting kit is required in addition to suitable wall fixings In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit The following wall mounting kits exist e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP Code 700500923 This kit can be used for wall mounting an 1P500 or IP500 v2 control unit and IP500 external expansion modules This kit incorporates cable routing at the front and rear of the unit For control units it allows orientation of the control unit base card slots to the left or to the right e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit SAP Code 700430150 This old design of wall mounting kit can be used for wall mounting an I1P500 or 1P500v2 control units only It does not provide any cable routing and requires the control unit to be mounted with the base card slots to the right only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 260 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011
51. 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards 9 5 IP500 Expansion Modules The following IP500 external expansion modules are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 Each module uses an external power supply unit 33 supplied with the module A locale specific power cord 34 gt for the PSU must be ordered separately If being rack mounted these units use the 1P500 rack mounting kit They can be wall mounted using the new wall mounting kit V2 e Systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode support up to 8 external expansion modules so long as the system extensions limit is not exceeded e Systems running in IP Office Standard Version mode support 8 external expansion modules or 12 if the control unit is fitted with an IP500 4 Port Expansion Base Card e 1P500 Digital Station Module 229 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 DS 376 ports for supported Avaya DS digital phones 43 gt e IP500 Digital Station A Module 23t Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 TCM 385 ports for supported Avaya TCM digital phones 43 Supported by 1P500v2 only e 1P500 Phone Module 234 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 PHONE 882 ports for analog phones e IP500 BRI So8 Module 227 Provides 8 ETSI BRI So ports 374 for the connection of ISDN devices T
52. 700293939 i ri 64ms echo I P400 VCM4 700359854 ri ri cancellation I P400 VCM8 700359862 ri ri I P400 VCM16 700359870 ri ri I P400 VCM24 700359888 ri ri Number of I P400 VCM cards 2 2 Maximum number of channels 128 148 1 These modules are still supported on some systems but are no longer available from Avaya IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 245 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 IP400 Expansion Modules The following IP400 external expansion modules are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and can be used with an 1P500 and IP500v2 control units Each module uses an external power supply unit 33 gt supplied with the module A locale specific power cord 34 for the PSU must be ordered separately If being rack mounted these units use the 1P400 rack mounting kit If being rack mounted these units use the IP500 rack mounting kit They cannot be wall mounted e 1P400 Analog Trunk Module ATM16 248 Provides an additional 16 ANALOG 373 ports for connection of analog trunks Supports both loop start and ground start trunks e Available in a number of variants for different locales e Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP Office control unit are grounded e 1P400 Digital Station Module 252 Provides depending on the variant an additional 16 or 30 DS 376 ports for supported Avaya digital phones This module has been superseded by the Digital Station V2 e 1P400 Digit
53. 7325551099 You wish to assign 7325551000 19 to port 1 and 7325551020 20 to port 2 etc 2 Configure Incoming Call Route The is used here instead of n to avoid problems with Main The minus sign means the number is processed from the left and so will wait for the whole number e Line Group ID 701 e Incoming Number 100x e Destination 3 Repeat for Line Group ID 702 etc 4 Create Short codes for example e Short Code 100x e Telephone Number e Line Group ID 701 e Feature Dial SO calls dialed without the area code are handled locally without network charges Calls with area calls will go via the network IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 136 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes So8 BRI Module 6 9 2 Example 2 Video Conference In this example calls are routed to a Polycom Viewstation module connected to a SO port of the IP Office system The following settings were used on 4 incoming data channels of a PRI line e Line Number 5 e Incoming Line Group 95 e Channel Allocation 23 gt 1 e Outgoing Line Group 95 e Switch Type 5ESS e Direction Bothway e Line Sub Type PRI e Bearer Data e Provider AT amp T e Service Accunet this is a important e Channels 1 4 e Admin In Service To route an incoming video call on the PRI lines configured above to an SO8 module requires the following 1 Create a dial short code that has the SO port as its destination Lin
54. Attachments ACTA adopted technical criteria Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Paragraph 68 316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 408 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Safety Statements Regulatory Instructions for Use 10 7 7 Compliance with FCC Rules Transmit and Receive Gain Settings for PRI T1 and Analog Ports The Gain settings are password controlled for use by qualified installation personnel only and must not be made available to the end user The default gain settings of 0dB ensures compliance with FCC part 68 section 68 308 b 5 and TIA EIA 1S 968 Section 4 5 2 5 Through transmission amplification from ports for the connection of separately registered equipment or from other network connection ports Gain setting adjustment by unqualified personnel may result in violation of the FCC rules Qualified personnel may adjust gain settings above these levels only where 1 Measurement is made to ensure that the power levels sent to line at each network interface connected does not exceed the maximum levels specified in FCC part 68 section 68 308 b and TIA EIA 1S 968 Section 4 5 for that specific interface type 2 Where gain adjustment away from the default values are made precautions should be taken to ensure that the con
55. By default the IP Office will use internal music on hold by uploading a music file from the IP Office Manager PC For IP500v2 systems you can load a file onto the System SD card prior to installing it in the IP Office The file must be of the following format and must be called holdmusic wav Property Value Bit Rate 128kbps Audio sample size 16 bit Audio Format Length Up to 90 seconds 1 Rename the music file holdmusic wav 2 Using a card reader copy the file into the system primary folder on the System SD memory card 3 If the IP Office is or will be configured for additional hold music files up to 3 additional files copy those files to the same location The name of the additional files must match those specified in the IP Office system s configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 77 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 5 IP500 Card Installation The IP500 base cards and trunk daughter cards should be fitted before power is applied to the control unit Ensure that cards are inserted in the order that matches the planned or pre built configuration 1 Fitting 1P500 Trunk Daughter Cards to the Base Cards 79 2 Fitting 1P400 Legacy Cards to a Legacy Card Carrier 80 gt 3 Installing 1P500 Cards into the Control Unit 81 e Ri Warnings e Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards e Cards must never be added or removed from the con
56. Connects via IP network IP Office Release 3 1 Programmable Buttons K mem Headset Socket X T ig Handsfree Speaker Microphone af T vw Message Waiting Lamp nf vm Wanu Upgradable Firmware nf 3701 700346802 Belt Clip 700346885 Phone Charger 700346828 Power Adaptor for Charger European 700346836 UK 700346844 Australia 700378318 8 Phone Gang Charger 700346851 Power Adaptor for Rack Mount Charger Global 700346869 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 283 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 18 3711 The 3711 is an Avaya DECT handset supported on IP Office when using Avaya IP DECT base stations Connects via IP network IP Office Release 3 1 Programmable Buttons A Headset Socket if Handsfree Speaker Microphone af lf Message Waiting Lamp ff Upgradable Firmware ff 3711 700346810 Belt Clip 700346885 Phone Charger 700346828 Power Adaptor for Charger European 700346836 UK 700346844 Australia 700378318 8 Phone Gang Charger 700346851 Power Adapator for Rack Mount Global 700346869 Charger IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 284 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 19 3720 This DECT handset is supported with Avaya DECT R4 on IP Office Release 5 and higher e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP E
57. Dark Grey EU24 Multi Grey EU24BL Multi Grey 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord IP Office Standard Version Installation With CATS cable With CATS cable USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina 700345341 700381825 700381932 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Page 304 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 40 5610 This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints 389 license Feature eta __ Connects via IP network IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons w 24 6 buttons x 4 pages Headset Socket uf Handsfree Speaker Microphone A Message Waiting Lamp ff PoE Class Typical Idle Power 5W Class 2 Consumption Display 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware nf PC Pass Through Port with Voice n d Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys K SPEAKER 4 HEADSET MUTE sd ila VOLUME UP x Ext MESSAGES wf amp HOLD J GO TRANSFER sil WF V
58. E b Change the Base Extension number to match the user extension who should now be associated with that extension port by default a Select Extension Extn Base Extension 200 Caller Display Type Reset Volume Atter Calls C Device type Avana 5410 Module BD Port c Click OK Manager will probably give a validation error message due to a user being associated with two extensions This can be ignored until all the user moves have been completed 3 I1f changing several users repeat the processes as required 4 Click to revalidate the configuration and check that no conflicts between users and associated extensions 5 If the configuration changes are complete send the configuration back to the IP Office and select appropriate settings for the reboot IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 106 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Initial Configuration Extension Numbering 5 5 Entering Licenses For 1P500v2 control units license files can be pre loaded 77 gt onto the System SD card Those licenses 386 will then be merged with the configuration when the control unit is powered up Otherwise for all control units licenses can be entered into the configuration using IP Office Manager In addition to the methods below license can also be added by placing the addition licenses as a text file on the System SD card 77 gt You must ensure that the licenses being entered have been issue against the
59. Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina fm VOLUME UP sl 7 VOLUME DOWN 700381551 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 When used with an EU24 or EU24BL unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 299 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 35 5402 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2402D However the 5402 phone is only supported on IP Office In addition to the two physical programmable buttons the HEO FEATURE key plus 0 9 and can be used to access an addition 12 programmable slots Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Message Waiting Lamp Display Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware Handsfree Speaker Microphone DS port 3 0 af 2 Eii of X ul 24 characters x 2 lines None i Standard DCP Phone Keys sell lm VOLUME UP sal 7 VOLUME DOWN x BI SPEAKER x HEADSET MUTE J E MESSAGES HOLD A CHE TRANSFER prop s pepbiaL GEE CONFERENCE 5402 Multi Grey Replacement Handset Dark Grey Amplified Handset Dark Grey Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700345309 700203797 700229735 700229
60. Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor BRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use IPO 500 Extn Card Phone 2 IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 2 700431778 IPO 500 Extn Card Phone 8 IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 8 700417231 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 209 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 3 3 ATM Combination Card This card is used to add a combination of ports to an I1P500v2 control unit Not supported by IP500 control units e Supports e 10 voice compression channels supporting G 711 G729a and G 723 with 64ms echo cancellation e 6 Digital Station ports for digital stations 43 except 3800 4100 4400 7400 M and T Series e 2 Analog Extension ports e 4 Analog Trunk ports e 1P500 Control Unit e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 2 combination cards of any type per 1P500v2 control unit e IP500 Trunk Card Support 1 The trunk daughter card is pre installed and cannot be replaced with another card type Port Type Digit Station Provides DS 3876 ports for digital stations 4
61. Headset Socket IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware 5420D 5420D RoHS compliant Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset 201B Recorder Interface Module 20B Stand EU24 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 amp MUTE A CPC TRANSFER CCC CONFERENCE Multi Grey Multi Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Multi Grey With CAT5 cable With CAT5 cable USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina DS port 3 0 w 24 8 buttons x 3 pages ul af ul 29 characters x 7 lines EU24 201B Ti 700339823 700381627 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381635 700381650 700381817 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Page 302 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 38 5601 System Components Phones This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4601 However the 5601 phone is only supported on IP Office The 5601 is the ROHS compliant version that has replaced the previous 5601 IP model but is otherwise the same This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord
62. IP Office Manager Upgrade from This method uses an SD card loaded with the required Optional SD Card 166 version of IP Office software The card is inserted into the control unit s Option SD card slot and its contents copied to the System SD card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 164 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Upgrading Card Software 7 5 1 Upgrading Remotely Using Manager This process will copy all system files not present or of a different version compared to those already present on the System SD card That includes IP Office software files and embedded voicemail prompt files 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Backup System Files The contents of the primary folder on the System SD card will be copied to the backup folder This process takes approximately 6 minutes 5 Select File Upload System Files The system files that Manager has will be uploaded to the primary folder on the System SD card This includes IP Office software files and embedded voicemail prompt files Depending on the files that need to be updated this process can take up to 40 minutes 7 5 2 Upgrading the SD Card Locally The following process can be used if you have physical access to the 1P500v2 control unit This method be used wi
63. IP Office Release 7 0 1P400 Trunk Cards teso IP pow Analog Trunk Card ATM4 24 nl Ti Provides 4 RJ 45 loop start analog trunk ports The card is available in several locale specific variants This card has been superseded by the ATM4U card below Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can also be added using Analog Trunk 248 external expansion modules Analog Trunk Card ATM4U 240 i Ti Provides 4 RJ45 loop start analog trunk ports as per the ATM4 above but available in a single worldwide variant Also supports adjustable echo cancellation on IP Office 3 1 Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can also be added using Analog Trunk 248 external expansion modules Quad BRI Trunk Card 24 i i Provides support for 4 RJ 45 BRI 2B D trunk ports These can be configured to ETSI or AusTS013 operation The ports include 1000hm termination Single PRI T1 Trunk Cards 242 ff nf Supports PRI 23B D trunks and T1 Robbed Bit 24B trunks through a single RJ45 port The mode of operation is selected in the IP Office configuration Single El PRI Trunk Cards 242 uf nf Supports PRI 30B D trunks through a single RJ45 port The port can be configured for PRI or QSIG operation Single ELR2 Trunk Cards 243 Ti ri Supports PRI 30B D trunks using E1R2 signaling Available in coaxial or RJ45 connector variants Coaxial variants are not supported on an IP500 carrier card Dual PRI Trunk Cards 242 Ti Ti As the
64. Manager to match the address the system is using e l Do not perform any of the following processes unless absolutely necessary The IP Office software can normally be upgraded using IP Office Manager 125 e Ri This process erases the operational software Before attempting this process you must know the MAC and IP addresses of the system plus have a backup copy of its configuration and the correct bin file for the control unit type and level of software e l The presence of any firewall blocking TFTP and or BOOTP will cause this process to fail Erasing the Core Software via Debug 1 Run Manager e In the BOOTP entries check that there is an entry that matches the MAC Address IP Address and bin file used by the system An entry is normally automatically created when a configuration has been loaded from that IP Office e f an entry is not present create a new entry manually The first two details can be found in the Control Unit settings in the configuration file Then close and restart Manager e Under File Preferences ensure that Manager is set to 255 255 255 255 Also check that Enable BootP Server is checked e Select View TFTPLog e Check that the required bin file is present in Manager s working directory 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit a Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings 144 Within a Hy
65. Modules e 1P400 Phone V2 Modules e 1P500 Digital Station Modules A This card provides 6 digital station ports 1 6 2 analog extension ports 7 8 and 2 BRI trunk ports 9 10 4 channels The card also includes 10 voice compression channels e This card has a pre installed 1P500 BRI trunk daughter card 22 gt e Maximum 2 combination cards per 1P500v2 control unit regardless of type Not supported by IP500 control units e P Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems are limited to a maximum of 12 BRI channels using BRI Combination and or BRI trunk daughter cards This card provides 6 digital station ports 1 6 2 analog extension ports 7 8 and 4 analog trunk ports 9 12 The card also includes 10 voice compression channels e This card has a pre installed 1P500 analog trunk daughter card 22 gt e Maximum 2 combination cards per 1P500v2 control unit regardless of type Not supported by IP500 control units e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 206 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Base Cards IP500 ETR6 Base Card 213 Th
66. Multi Grey 700381916 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia and New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 295 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 31 4610 This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons w 24 6 buttons x 4pages Headset Socket w Handsfree Speaker Microphone nl lf Message Waiting Lamp i PoE Class Typical Idle Power 4 0W Class 2 Consumption Display 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware wf PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority f f Standard DCP Phone Keys Z E SPEAKER FER HEADSET MUTE f at VOLUME UP X E MESSAGES i amp F HOLD J GO TRANSFER FF VOLUME DOWN A CE p
67. Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Network Termination TTT TTT i Page 375 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 6 DC I P Port Found on all IP Office control units and expansion modules Used for connection from the external power supply unit 33 gt supplied with the control unit or module e No other type of power supply unit should be used with the module or module unless specifically indicated by Avaya e Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls ceilings floors and similar openings 9 16 7 DS Ports These ports are used for connection from an RJ 45 structured cabling system to digital station phones supported by the IP Office DS ports are provided by IP500 Digital Station Cards 212 1P500 ATM Combination Cards 210 1P500 BRI Combination Cards 21 and 1P500 Digital Station 229 external expansion modules Though the RJ 11 to RJ 11 cables supplied with some phones can be plugged directly into RJ 45 ports including those on IP Office modules this is not recommend as the connection lock is not positive and may become disconnected DS ports on Digital Station V1 V2 expansion modules can be connected to out of building extensions 39 If this is the case connection must be made via suitable protective devices at each end and via each building primary protection In addition the Digital Station module must be connected to a protective ground DS ports on IP Office contro
68. Office system supports 8 unlicensed B channels on each IP500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected require IP500 Universal PRI Additional Channels licenses added to the configuration These additional channels consume the licenses based on which additional channels are configured as in service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards D channels are not affected by licensing Maximum per Control Unit 4 per control unit in IP Office Standard Version mode 1 single port card only in other modes e Software Level 4 1 910 1112 Daughter Card Ports 9 12 The LEDs for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows e Green on Trunk present 3 iu e Off No trunk present e Green flashing Trunk in use e Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end e Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card e Red Slow Flash Initializing Okay IPO 500 TRNK PRI 1 UNI IPO 500 TRNK PRI 2 UNI IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 1 Universal 700417439 e RedFast Flash System shutdown IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 2 Universal 700417462 Page 222 15
69. Operation There are no power failure extension connections provided for the analog trunk card If this is a requirement the ATM16 expansion module should be used h WARNI NG In all IP Office installations any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth 38 gt e l WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 and to surge protection equipment 39 ATM4 Uni Loop Start All 700359938 e The card includes two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of 1P400 control units e For the IP500 and IP500v2 control units an 1P500 Carrier Card is required up to a maximum of 2 1P500 Carrier Cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 240 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Trunk Cards 9 7 2 Analog Trunk Cards ATM4 The Analog Trunk card is also referred to as the ATM4 It provides 4 RJ 45 sockets for analog trunk connections 375 The card only supports loop start trunks The card is available in a number of locale specific variants as detailed below e Power Failure Operation There are no power failure extension connections provided for the analog trunk card h WARNI NG In all IP Office installations any module or control unit using an
70. Overview IP500v2 System Components 1 4 IP500 Office System Components This page set to appear in standard mode only The following are the typical components of an IP Office system based on an IP500 control unit e IP Office I P500 Control Unit 14 The control unit holds the main configuration and performs the routing and switching for telephone calls and data traffic Each control unit includes 4 slots for optional base cards to support trunk and phone extension ports lt gt Feature Key Dongle 42 This uniquely numbered dongle is used to validate license keys entered into the system s configuration to enable features For 1P500 control units a dongle is mandatory for correct system operation even if no licensed features are being used IP500 control units use a Smart Card which is slotted into the rear of the control unit e IP500 Base Cards 1 The IP500 control unit has slots for up to 4 1P500 base cards These can be used to add ports for analog extensions digital extensions voice compression channels and other resources e 1P500 Digital Station Base Card 212 e 1P500 Analog Phone Base Card 209 e 1P500 VCM Base Card 216 e 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier 214 e 1P500 4 Port Expansion Base Card 20 e IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards 22 Many of the IP500 base cards can be fitted with an 1P500 daughter card in order to support various types of trunk connections e I1P500 Analog Trunk Card 220 e 1P500 BRI Trunk Card 22 e 1P5
71. PRI 24 Line Channels Line Number i Channel Allocation 24 gt ka I Prefix Network Hetwork Fallback Unsuitable Clock Quality CRC Checking CSU Operation Haul Lenath 0 115 ft Channel Unit b Foreign Exchange Line SubType TI w Framing ESF we ero Suppression BOE Line Signalling LPE i 4 Incoming Routing Digits 3 Ensure that only one trunk is set to Network This should preferably be a direct digital trunk to the central office exchange 4 One other trunk can be set a Fallback should the selected Network trunk connection be lost If possible this should be a trunk from a different provider since that reduces the chances of both sources failing at the same time 5 Ensure that all other digital trunks are set as Unsuitable IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 111 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 8 Setting the Trunk Prefixes Where a prefix has been implemented for outgoing calls that same prefix needs to be added to trunk settings The prefix is then used as follows e On incoming calls the prefix is added to any incoming ICLID received with the call That allows the ICLID to be used by IP Office phones and applications to make return calls e On outgoing calls the short codes used to route the call to a trunk must remove the dialing prefix 1 Within the IP Office configuration select i i Line 2 For each line enter the prefix The loc
72. Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips 7 l Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 86 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Rack Mounting FATA AAA a IPO 500 Rack Mounting Kit 00429202 P P lt m M 450mm 18 1 e l Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 87 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 8 Connecting External Expansion Modules Any external expansion modules should be connected to the control unit before power is applied to the control unit Ensure that modules are attached in the order that matches the planned or pre built configuration External expansion modules connect to the IP Office control unit using an expansion interconnect cable Each module is supplied with an expansion connect cable and a power supply unit 33 gt An appropriate locale specific power cord 34 for the power supply unit must be ordered separately e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3
73. Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp IP network 6 0 PoE Class Typical I dle Power Consumption Display Supported Add Ons Upgradeable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Z speaker 9 Heapset amp MUTE x ll TRANSFER x CCC CONFERENCE 2 E MESSAGE X HOLD x DROP x He REDIAL al sita VOLUME UP Class 2 1 3 VGA Greyscale SMB24 345 x 3 Pi VIF Fixed Function Keys 4 CONTACTS wf MENU 7 VOLUME DOWN 2 E CALL LOG if FORWARD Functions for fixed functions keys not present are accessible through display menu soft key functions 9640 Telephone 9640G Telephone 9640 without faceplate 9640G without faceplate SMB24 Button Module SMB24 without faceplate SMB24 Replacement Stand Replacement Stand Wedge Stand Wall Mounting Plate Gigabit Adapter IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Charcoal Grey 700383920 Charcoal Grey 700419195 7 700408610 Be 1700429095 Charcoal Grey 1700462518 so 700462526 Silver 700416571 Silver 700416563 Charcoal Grey 700383888 Charcoal Grey 700383383 p 700383771 Page 316 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Bluetooth Adapter Replacement Handset Amplified Speech Handset Replacement Handset Cord 9 feet Replacement Handset Cord 25 feet Replacement Line Cord IP Office Standard
74. Supported Add Ons EU24 201B Upgradable Firmware Ti Standard DCP Phone Keys 4 A SPEAKER 4 HEADSET MUTE f ada VOLUME UP J E MESSAGES i 2 HOLD J GO TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN prop HLJ REDIAL Z C0 CONFERENCE 2420 Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset 201B Recorder Interface Module 20B Stand EU24 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord IP Office Standard Version Installation Multi Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Multi Grey With CAT5 cable With CAT5 cable USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina 700381585 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381635 700381650 700381817 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 When used with an EU24 unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone Page 277 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 12 3616 This is an 802 11b WiFi phone It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 2 0 Programmable Buttons w 6 Headset Socket uf Message Waiting Lamp X Upg
75. System Components Mounting Kits e IP500 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700429202 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single I1P500v2 control unit 1P500 control unit or I1P500 external expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module bolts for securing the module in the rack and cable tidy brackets 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700210800 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single control unit or expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module and bolts for securing the module in the rack e Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700293905 Barrier boxes must be used for out of building analog phone extensions 39 gt This bracket allows up to 8 IP Office barrier boxes to be rack mounted and simplifies the number of connections to the protective ground point in the rack This kit must be used when more than 3 barrier boxes are in use and supports a maximum of 16 barrier boxes for a single external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 261 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 Phones IP Office Release 7 0 supports the following phones and phone add ons Availability may depend on location and may be subject to local restrictions Enhanced Tip and Ring ETR Port These phones are only supported on an ETRE card in a 1P500v2 systems They are only supported in IP Offic
76. This card is available in variants supporting either 32 or 64 voice compression channels for use with VolP calls e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 2 per control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 205 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Legacy Card Carrier Base Card 214 i This card allows various 1P400 trunk cards 24 gt and 1P400 VCM cards 25 gt to be used The front of the card includes panels that can be removed to match the trunk card fitted e This card does not accept any 1P500 trunk daughter card e Maximum 2 per control unit e 1P400 Cards Supported The following cards are supported w PRI T1 w PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 sl VCM 4 w Dual PRI T1 Dual PRI ElR2 RJ45 sal VCM 8 PRI 30 E1 1 4 w BRI 8 UNI sd VCM 16 Dual PRI El w ANLG 4 Uni US only sil VCM 24 sd VCM 30 1P500 4 Port Expansion Base Card 208 This card adds an additional 4 expansion ports for external expansion modules The card is supplied with four 2m yellow interconnect cables i le This card does not accept any IP500 trunk daughter card e Maximum 1 per control unit Right hand slot 4 only e Supported Expansion Modules The following external expansion modules are supported e 1P500 Analogue Trunk Module e 1P500 Phone Module e P500 BRI So Module e 1P400 Digital Station V2 Modules e IP500 Digital Station
77. Using IP Office Manager receive the configuration from the system 2 Select Extension 3 Selecting each extension in turn on the Extn tab check that the Device Type field is set to the correct phone model Default Type Possible Phone Models T7100 T7100 MT7100 MT7100N Audio Conferencing Unit T7208 T7208 MT7208 MT7208N M7310 T7406E T7406 M7310 M7310N M7310BLF T7316 M7310BLF M7324 M7324 M7324N 4 Save the configuration back to the IP Office system DS Digital Stations Connect any digital phones to their appropriate DS 376 ports These phones may need to upgrade their firmware to match that supported by the IP Office core software The appropriate firmware is supplied with the IP Office Manager software and copied onto the System SD card for 1P500v2 systems The phones will automatically load the firmware from the IP Office system if necessary e The upgrade process takes approximately 10 minutes during which time the phone will display a warning The phone should not be disconnected during this process e Due to memory requirement only 10 phones of the same type can be upgraded at a time Starting from the first port needing to be upgraded the IP Office will upgrade all connected phones of the same type needing upgrading in batches It will then upgrade the next connected type of phones needing to be upgraded e Once the phone connected to a port has been upgraded the IP Office will not check whether the phone on tha
78. Viewing the Card Contents 7 4 Backing Up the System SD Card There are two levels of backup that can be performed e Backup the System SD Card Primary Folder 159 The contents of the primary folder on the card can be copied to the backup folder They files can then be restored if necessary Both actions can be performed remotely e Backup the Whole System SD Card 16t The contents of the whole System SD card can be copied to the Optional SD card While this can be done remotely the contents can only be copied back manually using a card reader The backup restore and copy operations will not be performed if the destination card has insufficient space for the files being copied 7 4 1 Backing Up the Primary Folder This process copies the contents of the primary folder on the System SD card over the backup folder Any files with matching file names will be replaced This takes approximately 6 minutes Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Backup System Files e The contents of the primary folder on the System SD card will be copied to the backup folder This process takes approximately 6 minutes Using the System Status Application 1 Start System Status 67 and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel se
79. added for up to 30 supervisors wallboards e IPO LIC R6 CUSTMR SVC SPV 1 229442 e IPO LIC R6 CUSTMR SVC SPV 1 TRIAL 229443 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 394 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Licences Legacy CCR Licenses e CCR Sup These legacy licenses were used to enable support for the Customer Call Reporter application and CCR Supervisors e IPO CUSTMR CALL REPORTER 1 SPV LIC RFA 217655 e IPO CUSTMR CALL REPORTER 10 SPV LIC RFA 217656 e IPO CUSTMR CALL REPORTER 20 SPV LIC RFA 217657 e CCR CCC Upg This license allows legacy CCC application licenses to be used for Customer Call Reporter e IPO LIC CUSTMR CALL REPORTER UPG LIC RFA 217658 e CCC Server Enables 1 supervisor 1 wallboard and 5 agents e CCC Supervisors Enables the equivalent number of supervisors and wallboards e CCC Agents Enables the equivalent number of agents IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 395 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 17 7 Trial Licenses The following trial licenses can be requested A trial license is valid for 60 days from the date of issue and can only be issued once for a particular IP Office Feature Key serial number Apart from those restrictions the trial license works the same as a full license e Preferred Edition IPO LIC PREFERRD VM PRO TRIAL RFA LIC DS 189782 e Advanced Edition IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION T
80. affected by the amount of memory available Please take into account the memory requirements of the database being queried Ports The Voicemail Pro service uses the following ports Port Number Type Description Used to listen for SMTP connections Used to receive time requests RFC 868 Used to service IMAP4 requests Used to receive requests fromone X Portal for IP Office Used to receive connections from Voicemail Pro client Note that additional ports may be used for connection to services such as 3rd party database or Microsoft Exchange IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 364 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications 9 14 12 Single Server Support The following scenarios are supported for combining IP Office server applications onto a single server PC In all cases the individual requirements of each application as if installed on a separate server are still applicable Also depending on the application combination additional restrictions and requirements may be applied as detailed below Voicemail Pro Customer Call one X Portal for IP Minimum IP Minimum PC Reporter Office Office Release Specification 150 Agents Release 5 0 As per each application 50 Simultaneous Release 6 0 2GHz Dual Core 4GB users RAM Windows 2008 Server 32 or 64 bit 30 Agents 50 Simultaneous Release 6 0 2GHz Quad Core 6GB users RAM Windows 2008 64 bit 50 Agents 150 Simultaneous Release 6
81. an additional 32 twin LED programmable buttons for 1616 phones The units do not require their own power supply connection as they draw power from the phone to which they are connected e Up to 3 units can be connected in a chain from a single 1616 e For 1616 phones to support a BM32 the phone must be powered by an individual 1600 Series Power Adapter e Up to a maximum of 32 BM32 units on the system For additional limitations see Phone Add Ons 337 Item SAP Code BM32 BUTTON MODULE 700415573 Accessories 1600 SERIES BM32 CABLE REPLACEMENT 700415581 1600 SERIES BM32 BOND BRIDGE REPLACEMENT 700415599 1616 BM32 PLASTIC LABEL COVERS 20 REPLACEMENT 700415672 1600 SERIES BM32 FLIP STAND REPLACEMENT 700432800 Paper Labels 1616 BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS 8 5 x 11 700415656 1616 BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS A4 700434236 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 340 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phone Add Ons 9 12 4 DBM32 The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 The DBM32 add on provides an additional 32 twin LED programmable buttons for 1416 phones The units do not require their own power supply connection as they draw power from the phone to which they are connected e Up to 3 units can be connected in a chain from a single 1416 e Up to a maximum of 32 DBM32 units on the sys
82. and setting voice quality objectives e The assessment should leave you confident that the implemented network will have the capacity for the foreseen data and voice traffic and can support H 323 DHCP TFTP and jitter buffers in H 323 applications e An outline of the expected network assessment targets is Minimum Assessment Target Latency Less than 150ms Packet Loss Less than 3 Duration Monitor statistics once every minute for a full week IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 45 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 11 1 Voice Compression Channels Calls to and from IP devices can require conversion to the audio codec format being used by the IP device For IP Office systems this conversion is done by voice compression channels These support the common IP audio codecs G711 G723 and G729a For 1P400 control units channels can be added by fitting 1P400 Voice Compression Modules VCMs 245 For the IP500 control units channels can be added using 1P500 VCM cards 216 1P500 Combination Cards 210 and or 1P400 Voice Compression Modules 245 The voice compression channels are used as follows Call Type Voice Compression Channel Usage IP Device to Non IP These calls require a voice compression channel for the duration of the call If no channel is Device available busy indication is returned to the caller IP Device to IP Device Call progress tones for example dial tone secondary dial tone etc d
83. any IP500 base card except the 1P500 Legacy Carrier card and 1P500 4 Port Expansion card e Ports Channels 2 or 4 BRI trunk ports Connections via ports 9 to 12 of the host 1P500 base card e Each trunk port supports 2B D channels e ETSI or AusTS013 basic rate protocol set through the IP Office configuration e License No license required e Maximum per Control Unit 4 e P Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems are limited to a maximum of 12 BRI channels using BRI Combination and or BRI trunk daughter cards e IP Office Software Level 4 0 e S Bus Connection On IP Office 4 2 systems the card can be switched from To 375 trunk mode to So 374 mode This mode requires additional terminating resistors and an ISDN crossover cable connection see BRI Port So 1374 e This card is approved for use in the following countries Brazil New Zealand India South Africa Argentina United Arab Emirates UAE Australia European Union EU 410 1112 Daughter Card Ports 9 12 The LEDs for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows e Off No trunk present e Green on Trunk present e Green flashing Trunk in use e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status Lede Lye e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card e Red Slow Flash Initializing okay e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IPO 500 Trnk BRI 4 Un
84. availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license Connects via IP Office Release Headset Socket Consumption Display Supported Add Ons Programmable Buttons Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp PoE Class Typical Idle Power Upgradeable Firmware IP network IZ nd sh 5 9W Class 3 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels EU24 EU24BL PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority f f Standard DCP Phone Keys d HEADSET HOLD J K SPEAKER x E MESSAGES Ut prop 2543 REDIAL 5621SW 5621SW RoHS compliant Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset EU24 EU24BL 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord When used with an EU24 or EU24BL unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 MUTE A CHL TRANSFER f CCC CONFERENCE Multi Grey Multi Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Multi Grey Multi Grey With CAT5 cable With CAT5 cable USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina fm VOLUME UP sl VOLUME DOWN 700345982 700385982 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700434897 7004
85. components necessary for wall mounting onto a plywood surface The use of the cable covers is optional In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit e The installation must be done by a service person only e For control units the mesh flame screen must be installed in the bottom edge of the control unit before mounting e Ensure that the system has been shutdown and power has been removed from all the units Shutdown the system using a shutdown command and then remove power Do not simply remove the power e If mounting a control unit you must wait at least 15 minutes after removing the power cord before fitting the flame screen e A Suitable mounting surface of at least 19mm 0 75 inch plywood is required na Clearance S500mm 19 6 Cover Open 160mm b 3 2 x Srim U 120 Poet Foe Pe a ee es a a all Bracket 445mm a ps ee ce Lore ge ees Control elil Jbomm 14 4 vanicabolcanminn External Expansion Module 245mm SO0mm 19 E IP Office Standard Version I
86. correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment The ground point on IP Office control units and external expansion modules are marked with a rh or E symbol Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground e Additional protective equipment In addition to grounding additional protective equipment will be required in the following situations Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations 39 e On any Digital Station or Phones external expansion module connected to an extension located in another building e In the Republic of South Africa on all Analog Trunk external expansion modules ATM16 and on any control units containing an analog trunk cards ATM4 ATM4U IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 38 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Power Supplies and Cables 1 7 6 Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be connected to the IP Office system In these scenarios additional protection in the form of protective grounding and surge protectors must be fitted dB WARNING The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage It merely reduces the chances of damage Main Bui
87. created e The application must be installed in the default location Whilst avayafw bat only works subject to the conditions above for other firewalls study of this file will indicate the necessary application files and ports for which exceptions need to be created Ports Used The list below details many of the IP ports used by IP Office control units and IP Office applications Many of these are standard ports for different IP traffic protocols a Indicates a listening port on the IP Office control unit indicates a port to which the IP Office sends for example to a PC running an IP Office application Indicates that the port and or protocol can be changed or Poi n __r _ 25 b SMTP TCP Email system alarms from the IP Office to SMTP server For IP Office 4 2 also used for Voicemail Email on Embedded Voicemail 37 Time UDP Time requests from the IP Office to a Time Server RFC868 53 DNS UDP Domain Name Service responses 67 sI BOOTP DHCP UDP DHCP server operation 68 m BOOTP DHCP UDP DHCP client operation 69 si TFTP UDP File requests to the IP Office 69 TFTP UDP File requests by the IP Office 80 i HTTP TCP HTTP File requests 161 SNMP UDP From SNMP applications 162 SNMP Trap UDP To addresses set in the IP Office configuration 500 IKE UDP Key exchange for IPSec protocol 389 LDAP TCP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 443 HTTPS TCP HTTPS communication with IP Office provisioned DECT I
88. day approximately between 00 00 and 00 30 the IP Office will copy the current configuration running in its RAM memory to the primary folder on the card e Configuration changes made using IP Office Manager are first written to the copy of the configuration file on the card and then merged with the configuration running in the IP Office system s RAM memory e The write lock setting on cards in the System SD card slot is ignored e Optional SD Card A card does not have to be present in this slot for normal IP Office operation The slot can be used for various maintenance actions e Acard with an updated IP Office software or configuration can be inserted and those files then transferred to the System SD card in order to upgrade the IP Office system e The full contents of the System SD card can be copied to the Optional SD card while the IP Office system is running e The write lock setting on cards in the Optional SD card slot is honored RL Card Memory cards should always be shutdown 16 before being removed when the system is running Removal Though the card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard Shutting down the card will disable embedded voicemail if being used If the System SD card is removed features licensed by the card s Feature Key serial number will continue operating for up to 2 hours IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 152 IP Office 7
89. done separately for both the LAN port LAN1 in the configuration and the WAN port LAN2 in the configuration on the back of the IP Office control unit The IP Office makes a DHCP request for what IP address information it should use If a DHCP server responds within approximately 10 seconds the control unit defaults to being a DHCP client and uses the IP address information supplied by the DHCP server If no DHCP Server responds the control unit still defaults to being the DHCP client but assumes the following default addresses e LAN1 192 168 42 1 255 255 255 0 e LAN2 192 168 43 1 255 255 255 0 e Note that the IP Office does not check that these addresses are valid and or available on the network Systems running in IP Office Standard Version mode can also be configured as a DHCP server They can also be configured to only provide DHCP for Avaya IP phones and or for remote access dial in connections DHCP Server options are not supported for systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes Once an IP500v2 control unit has obtained IP address and DHCP mode settings it will retain those settings even if rebooted without a configuration file present on the System SD card To fully remove the existing IP address and DHCP mode setting the IP Office must be defaulted using IP Office Manager PC Connection Depending o
90. e O IP Office Administration PC A Windows PC with the IP Office Administrator Application suite installed 635 e O LAN Cable 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager 2 If the PC has firewall software installed you may be prompted as to whether you want to allow this program to access the network Select Yes or OK 3 Select File Open Configuration from the menu bar 4 The Select IP Office window appears After a few seconds it should list the IP Office control unit The default name used for a newly installed IP Office control unit is its MAC address Select IP Office LOI Mame IP Address Type Version Version 3 2 oe 00E00701905D 192 168 42 1 IP 406E DS 3 2015 TCP Discovery Progress Unit Ernadcast Address e f the system required was not found the address used for the search can be changed Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search 5 Click the check the box next to the system and then click OK 6 The name and password request is displayed The name and password must match one of those setup through the security settings For a IP Office Standard Version mode system the default name and password for full configuration settings access are Administrator and Administrator For a IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode
91. equipment the following items will be required e O 14AWG Solid copper wire for ground connection of control units and expansion modules e O Cable sleeve matching local regulator requirements for ground wires Typically green for a functional ground and green yellow for a protective ground e O If wall mounting additional fixtures and fittings suitable for the wall type and mounting kit being used e O Cable ties and labels for tidying and identifying cables e PC Requirements IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER VersionIP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version P Office Essential Edition Quick Version 1 O Windows PC with IP Office Admin suite installed 63 gt and RJ 45 Ethernet LAN port 2 0 SD Card reader IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 71 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 2 Documentation Ensure that you have read this manual in full before starting installation Also include the installation documentation for any other equipment and applications being installed as part of the IP Office system e dB IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com e l Upgrade Licen
92. for both the LAN port LANI1 in the configuration and the WAN port LAN2 in the configuration on the back of the IP Office control unit The IP Office makes a DHCP request for what IP address information it should use If a DHCP server responds within approximately 10 seconds the control unit defaults to being a DHCP client and uses the IP address information supplied by the DHCP server If no DHCP Server responds the control unit still defaults to being the DHCP client but assumes the following default addresses e LAN1 192 168 42 1 255 255 255 0 e LAN2 192 168 43 1 255 255 255 0 e Note that the IP Office does not check that these addresses are valid and or available on the network Systems running in IP Office Standard Version mode can also be configured as a DHCP server They can also be configured to only provide DHCP for Avaya IP phones and or for remote access dial in connections DHCP Server options are not supported for systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes Once an IP500v2 control unit has obtained IP address and DHCP mode settings it will retain those settings even if rebooted without a configuration file present on the System SD card To fully remove the existing IP address and DHCP mode setting the IP Office must be defaulted using IP Office Manager IP Office Standard Version Installation P
93. for use in a system s Optional SD card slot The card must be the following format For the System SD slot only Avaya SD cards with a Feature Key should be used e SDHC 4GB minimum Class 2 Single partition FAT32 format e Di WARNING Avaya supplied SD cards should not be formatted using any other method than the format commands within IP Office Manager and IP Office System Status Application Formatting the cards using any other method will remove the feature key used for IP Office licensing from the card Creating a Card on a Local PC These processes can be run on an SD card inserted in a card reader on the IP Office Manager PC That card can then be used in the System SD card slot of a new system or in the Optional SD card slot of an existing system to upgrade that system 128 Formatting an SD Card Avaya SD cards should only be formatted using the format options provided within IP Office applications This process is not normally necessary with Avaya SD cards unless you suspect that the card has been incorrectly formatted elsewhere h WARNI NG All File Will Be Erased Note that this action will erase any existing files and folders on the card Once a card has been formatted the folders and files required for IP Office operation can be loaded onto the card from the Manager PC using the Recreate IP Office SD Card command 1 Insert the SD card into a reader slot on the Manager computer 2 Using IP Office Manager select File Advan
94. identifying cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 172 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation IP500 Tools Required 8 2 IP500 Read the Documentation Ensure that you have read this manual in full before starting installation Also include the installation documentation for any other equipment and applications being installed as part lt gt of the IP Office system e dB IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com e l Upgrade Licenses Some upgrades may require entry of upgrade licenses e Partner Version Installation e Compact DECT Installation e one X Portal for IP Office Installation e IP DECT R4 Installation e 4600 5600 Series IP Phone Installation e 3600 Series Wireless IP Installation e Embedded Voicemail nstallation e Phone Manager Installation Manual e Voicemail Pro Installation e SoftConsole Installation Manual e Contact Store Installation e SIP Extension Configuration Information Web Sites IP Office documentation is available from the following web sites e Avaya Support http support avaya com Contains documentation and other supp
95. if the phone unregisters However it is possible to reserve a license for particular phones in order to ensure that those phones always obtain a license first if available This is done through the Reserve Avaya IP Endpoint Licence setting of each IP extension e dB Warning Avaya IP phones without a license will still be able to register but will be limited to making emergency calls only Dial Emergency short code calls The associated user will be treated as if logged off and the phone will display No license available and Emergency Calls Only If a license becomes available it will be assigned to any unlicensed DECT handsets first and then to any other unlicensed Avaya IP phone in the order that the phones registered e For existing IP500 systems being upgraded to IP Office Release 6 the existing VCM channels and IP500 VCM Channels license are treated as follows e For each IP400 VCM card installed in the system each VCM channel supported by the card allows support for 3 Avaya IP phones e For each IP500 VCM32 and IP500 VCM64 card installed in the system the 4 unlicensed VCM channels previously provided by each card are converted to allow unlicensed support of 12 Avaya IP phones e For each legacy IP500 VCM Channels license the license are converted Channel Migration licenses supporting 3 Avaya IP phones See the Channel Migration license below e The IP500 VCM 32 and IP500 VCM 64 cards will provide their full capacity of VCM channel
96. in the IP Office configuration A maximum of 4 receptionist are supported This license was previously called SoftConsole e For IP Office Release 6 0 and 6 1 an instance of this license is consumed by each user configured as a Receptionist If the user hot desks to another IP Office system in an SCN their license entitlement is retained ie the remote system does not require a Receptionist license e For IP Office Release 7 0 instances of this license are only consumed when the user is using the IP Office SoftConsole application If the user hot desks to another IP Office system in an SCN that system requires an available license in its configuration e Audix Voicemail IPO LIC ACM CENTRAL VM 177467 Enables IP Office to use a remote Intuity Audix or Modular Messaging system for voicemail rather than requiring a local voicemail server e IPSec Tunneling IPO LIC IPSEC VPN RFA 182301 Enables the IP Office to initiate and terminate IPSec and L2TP tunnels Phone Manager Licenses These licenses are used for the IP Office Phone Manager application In addition to entering Phone Manager licenses each user is individually configured for the expected Phone Manager type e Phone Manager Pro per seat IPO LIC PMGR PRO RFA 1 177468 Allows users to be configured as Phone Manager Pro users The user s Phone Manager mode is set through the IP Office configuration User Telephony Phone Manager Type e Phone Manager Pro IP Aud
97. is set to use the public network trunk as its clock source and ignoring the possible clock source from the QSIG trunk The other IP Office system is using the clock signal received from the first IP Office on its QSIG trunk as its clock source Thus both IP Offices are using the same clock source and that clock source is the public network exchange Public Network PRI Network Unsuitable Multiple Source Priority When multiple trunks with the same setting are providing clock signals the trunk used is determined in the following order of priority e 1P500 and IP500v2 Control Units Trunks are used in the order of slots 1 to 4 and then by port on each slot e P421 and IP406 V2 Control Units Trunks are used in the order Slot B ports 1 to 4 then Slot A ports 1 to 4 Viewing the Current Clock Source The current clock source being used by an IP Office system is shown on the Resources page within the IP Office System Status Application IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 110 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Setting a Trunk Clock Quality Setting 1 Within the IP Office configuration select i 1 Line Initial Configuration Setting the Digital Trunk Clock Source 2 For each digital line select the line and on the Line tab select whether that trunk should provide the clock source for the network or whether the trunk is unsuitable For E1R2 trunks the Clock Quality setting is on the Advanced tab
98. loaded the navigation pane shows just BOOTP and Operator entries IP Office Default Settings The following are the basic default configuration settings for an IP Office system System Name MAC address of the control unit System Password password License Server I P Address 255 255 255 255 LAN1 LAN1 LAN2 WAN IP address 192 168 42 1 192 168 43 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 DHCP Mode Server Server No of DHCP IP Addresses 200 200 e Extensions and Users A user is automatically created for each physical extension port detected in the system Users are assigned extension numbers starting from 201 User names take the form Extn201 Extn202 e Hunt Group A single hunt group 200 called Main is created and the first 10 users are placed into that hunt group as members e Incoming Call Routes Two default incoming call routes are created Voice calls are routed to the hunt group Main Data calls are routed to the RAS user Dialln IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 184 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Receiving the Configuration 8 10 Adding Licences 32 Character license keys strings are used to activate various IP Office features These keys are uniquely based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the Feature Key dongle installed with the IP Office system Licenses can be added individually to the IP Office s configuration However the licence key file
99. mounting kit If being rack mounted these units use the 1P500 rack mounting kit They cannot be wall mounted e 1P400 Analog Trunk Module ATM16 248 Provides an additional 16 ANALOG 373 ports for connection of analog trunks Supports both loop start and ground start trunks e Available in a number of variants for different locales e Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP Office control unit are grounded e 1P400 Digital Station Module 252 Provides depending on the variant an additional 16 or 30 DS 376 ports for supported Avaya digital phones This module has been superseded by the Digital Station V2 e 1P400 Digital Station Module V2 250 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 DS 376 ports for supported Avaya digital phones 43 Supersedes the previous Digital Station module e 1P400 Phone Module 256 Provides depending on variant an additional 8 16 or 30 POT 382 ports for analog phones This module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2 e 1P400 Phone Module V2 254 Provides depending on variant an additional 8 16 or 30 PHONE 382 ports for analog phones Supersedes the previous Phone module With IP Office 3 1 the Phone V2 supports a wider range of message waiting indication MWI options than Phone V1 modules e With V2 units the labeling of analog phone ports was changed from POT to le PHONE IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 31 IP Office 7 0
100. not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit It can be wall mounted using the 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 3 5Kg 7 8lbs Boxed 4 8Kg 10 8lbs Based on DS30 V2 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 229 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IPO 500 ee Station Connections TW WW 1 20 21 22 235 4 eo 26 ST 26 23 30 IT ad 25 30 DIDO DELIZIE i h h h h A l i h h wets tals is 3 16 EEEE eE EA EXPANSION 16 244 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE ve o CE DC I P376 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DS 376 RJ45 socket Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones 4 If connected to an out of building extension 39 the connection must be made via additional I ROB barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground DTE 144 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION 1379 RJ45 Socket
101. number will continue operating for up to 2 hours Removal Before a memory card is removed from an IP Office system that is running the card must be shutdown Removing a memory card while the system is running may cause file corruption Card services can be restarted by either reinserting the card or using a Start Up command Card Shutdown Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Shutdown 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK e At the back of the control unit confirm that the appropriate memory card LED is off e The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions Card Shutdown Using the System Status Application Application 1 Start System Status 67 gt and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel select System 3 Select Memory Cards 4 Select either System Card or Optional Card 5 At the bottom of the screen select Shutdown e At the back of the control unit confirm that the appropriate memory card LED is off e The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions Card Shutdown Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access t
102. of power failure Analog ports 1 and 2 are directly connected to analog extension ports PF1 and PF2 respectively If used the connected phones must be clearly labeled as power failure devices This is only supported for loop start analog trunks DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module RJ45 socket Power failure analog extension ports See Analog section above Ground point Used for connection of a functional earth 38 if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead e IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth 38 e Di WARNING Within areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 gt and to surge protection equipment 39 All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system IPO 500 Analog Trunk 16 America A
103. on IP Office Admin DVD 2 1n SMNPc select Config MIB Database 3 Select Add and select the MIB files listed above in the order listed CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 1 The MIB installation instructions provided above are correct for CastleRock SNMPc V5 0 8 and later For V5 0 1 of CastleRock SNMPc the following must be carried out l Copy all of the IP Office MIBs and standard MI Bs from the IP Office Administrator Applications DVD to the SNMPc mibfiles directory In the SNMPc mibfiles directory open the files STANDARD mib and SNMPv2 SMI mib in Notepad In the SNMPv2 SMI mib file find the definition of zeroDotZero and copy this to the clipboard In the STANDARD MIB file find the SNMPv2 SMI section and paste in the definition of zeroDotZero from the clipboard before the end of this section just before the END statement Save the modified STANDARD MI B file Add the MIB file SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB mib to the MIB database using the instructions provided in the IP Office installation guide Add all the MIB files listed in the instructions provided in the IP Office installation guide in the order given Compile the MI Bs ready for use The reason for this is The IPO PHONES MI B mib relies upon the DIFFSERV MI B mib for the definition of the textual convention of IndexInteger The DIFFSERV MI B needs the definition of the textual convention zeroDotZero which is normally defined in SNMPv2 SMI mib However including SNMPv2 SMI mib in
104. provided by Avaya from their license ordering web site generates a License csv file containing all the ordered licenses That file can be imported into the configuration N Parts and Equipment Required e O License Keys Documentation Ensure that the Feature Key dongle serial number used to generate the license keys matches that of the Feature Key dongle installed and that all the licenses required have been included ia SD I mporting a License csv File 1 Copy the License csv file to the Manager PC 2 Start Manager and receive the IP Office system s configuration 3 Select File I mport Export Import 4 Click the button next to Look In and browse to and select the folder containing the license file 5 The file should be listed as Available along with an indication of the number of licenses it contains Select the check box next to the file name and then clock OK 6 Click on tal to send the configuration back to the IP Office 7 Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the licenses They should now be Valid 1 a Manually Adding Licenses Use this process to individually copy and paste license keys into the configuration Cutting and pasting removes any errors that may be caused by the incorrect typing of any license key 1 Start Manager and receive the IP Office system s configuration 2 Select License 3 To add a license click mj and select License Enter the new li
105. provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 326 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 60 M7310 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module 9 11 61 M7310N Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 327 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 62 M7324 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module e Additional buttons can be supported on a M7324 phone through the addition of KLM button module 344 i Go a pa den iS fio wa I a GI US CE is 9 11 63 M7324N Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module IP Office Sta
106. rebooted into offline mode It may be necessary to use the Refresh option within the Upgrade Wizard to reconnect following the reboot Validate upgrade can then be attempted to again check the amount of available RAM memory for transfer of BIN files If the memory is still insufficient the option is offered to either do an unvalidated upgrade or cancel b The bin files required are transferred to the system and stored in temporary memory c For 1P500v2 control units the backup system files and upload system files actions are performed d Once all file transfers are completed the upgrade wizard will prompt whether it okay to proceed with the upgrade process Select Yes to continue e Each module being upgraded will delete its existing core software restart and load the new software file that was transferred This process may take several minutes for each unit e Unvalidated Upgrade This method of upgrading should be avoided unless absolutely necessary It is only required for IP Office systems with pre 2 1 software and should only be done from a Manager PC with a fixed IP address running on the same LAN segment and subnet as the IP Office system During the upgrade the units and modules erases their current software and then request the new software file from Manager 7 Following the upgrade check that the upgrade wizard now shows that the selected units and modules have upgraded It may be necessary to select Refresh to update the informati
107. relative to the installation requirements of that locale This documentation covers the equipment supported by IP Office Release 6 That includes equipment supported but no longer available as new from Avaya Repair IP Office systems do not contain any user serviceable or repairable components If a faulty unit is suspected the whole unit should be replace e 1P400 control units should only be opened where indicated for the installation of 1P400 cards e P500 control units should not be opened under any circumstances RoHS ROHS is a European Union directive for the Removal of Certain Hazardous Substances from Electrical and Electronic Equipment Similar legislation has been or is being introduced in a number of other countries Avaya has decided to make its global product range compliant with the requirements of ROHS The actions taken vary e In some cases equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available from Avaya e In some cases new manufactured stock has been made RoHS compliant and keeps its existing SAP code e In other cases the equipment has been replaced by a new ROHS compliant alternative with new SAP codes e The SAP codes within this document are for ROHS compliant equipment unless otherwise stated IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 10 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview 1 1 IP Office Modes IP Office systems based on the 1P500v2 control unit can run in a number of mode
108. run on a PC connected to the IP Office system via its LAN interface These applications are all provided on the IP Office Administrator Applications DVD and don t require any licenses Due to the nature of the applications if installed on a PC at the customer site this should be a secure PC or the PC of a trusted user If a voicemail server PC is also being installed with the IP Office system the same PC can be used for the programming and maintenance applications For maintainers these applications can also be run remotely if a route for data connections to the customer s IP Office exists from the maintainer s location e IP Office Manager 355 This tool is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration Different levels of access can be defined to control which parts of the configuration the Manager user can view and alter Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system e System Status Application 36t This application can be used to inspect the current status of IP Office lines and extensions and to view records of recent alarms and events It runs as a Java application e SNMP MIBs 139 Not an application as such Using IP Office SNMP MI B files the status of the IP Office system to be monitored by 3rd party SNMP applications such as Castlerock and HP OpenView When configured for SNMP operation the IP Office can also send alerts for potential problems IP Office systems also support the sendi
109. scenarios where multiple voicemail servers are present for example distributed and backup server a mix of Linux based and Windows based servers are allowed DVD IP Office Application Server Release 7 0 DVD Set 2 700501420 License w Depends on the IP Office applications selected during installation The IP Office Application Server server itself does not require any license PC Requirements The compatibility of any particular server PC cannot be guaranteed A list of known suitable servers is available at https hardware redhat com PC Requirements Minimum Recommended RAM Hard Disk Free Space 30GB 30GB Processor Additional Apps Web Browser e Internet Explorer 7 e Firefox 3 e Opera 2 e Safari 3 2 Ports component S IP Office Application Server e HTTP HTTPS Access 1070 e SFTP Access 22 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 351 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e Access to additional ports is as per the IP Office applications selected during installation IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 352 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications 9 14 2 ContactStore The Voicemail Pro can be used for manual and automatic call recording Normally those recordings are placed into the mailbox specified for the user or hunt group whose call is being recorded and are then treated as normal messages Contact Store allows those recording
110. select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Restore System Files e The contents of the backup folder on the System SD card will be copied to the primary folder The process takes approximately 6 minutes e When the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted Using the System Status Application 1 Start System Status 67 gt and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel select System 3 At the bottom of the screen select Restore System Files e The contents of the backup folder on the System SD card will be copied to the primary folder The process takes approximately 6 minutes e Vhen the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select System Restore e The contents of the backup folder on the System SD card will be copied to the primary folder The process takes approximately 6 minutes e Vhen the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted IP Office Stand
111. single PRI cards above but supporting the connection of two PRI trunks On the IP406 V2 supported in Slot A only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 24 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Control Unit Cards 1 5 4 Other Cards Each IP Office control unit can be fitted with a number of internal cards The cards supported depend on the control unit type Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards Li These cards provide message and prompt storage space for embedded voicemail and auto attendant af options The cards used are specially formatted compact flash cards e The IP500v2 control unit uses its SD Feature Key dongle card for embedded voicemail and file storage Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards SAP Code Bid aa IP406 V2 Memory Card 244 700343460 Supports a 512MB Compact Flash card This provides up to 15 hours of uncompressed message storage e Memory cards in these slots can also be used for storage of files normally obtained via TFTP transfer For example the music on hold wav file and supported Avaya phone software files This will however reduce storage space for prompt and message files if embedded voicemail is being used e IP Office systems that have downloaded an internal music on hold source can then backup and restore that music on hold to and from the memory card e Non Avaya cards can be used for file storage but will not support Embedded Voicemail I P400 Voice MIpression Module
112. specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise no use should be made of materials on this site the Documentation s and Product s provided by Avaya All content on this site the documentation s and the product s provided by Avaya including the selection arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases You may not modify copy reproduce republish upload post transmit or distribute in any way any content in whole or in part including any code and software Unauthorized reproduction transmission dissemination storage and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components a
113. system the default name and password for configuration access are Administrator and password IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 66 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP Office Administration Software Starting Manager 3 4 Starting System Status The IP Office System Status application SSA is a reporting tool that provides a wide range of information about the current status of an IP Office system Its can report the available resources and components within the system and details of calls in progress Details of the number of alarms are recorded and the time date of the most recent alarms n When required for diagnostics escalation SSA is able to take a snap shot image of ss the IP Office system s status including a copy of its current configuration Use of i SSA requires an IP Office service user name and password that has been configured for System Status access in the IP Office s security settings Requirements e DIP Office Administration PC A Windows PC with the IP Office Administrator Application suite installed 63 e O LAN Cable 1 There are several methods that can be used to start the IP Office System Status application e On a PC where System Status has been installed select Start Programs IP Office System Status e f Manager is also installed and is running select File Advanced System Status e For IP500v2 controls units start a web browse and enter the IP address of the c
114. system is 1024 337 The DSS4450 works in association with the 4412D and 4424D telephones each of which can support up to two DSS4450 adjuncts Each DSS4450 provides an additional 60 programmable keys with single red lamps except for the bottom two rows which have green lamps The DSS4450 requires an auxiliary Avaya power supply unit and must be used with the cables supplied IP Office supports a maximum 2 x 4450 units on each Digital Station expansion module including the P406 V2 control unit A maximum of 8 x 4450 units total are supported on the whole IP Office system For additional limitations see Phone Add Ons 337 This phone is not supported on the 1P500 DS8 Extension Card For the IP500 it will work on external Digital Station Expansion Modules Connects via DSS port on phone Supported by 4412D 4424D Maximum per phone 2 Maximum per DS module 2 control unit Maximum per IP Office 8 system Additional requirements 4450 power supply unit on phone IP Office Release 1 0 Programmable Buttons wf 60 50x27 10x LAST CN LN 4450 Black 108199696 4450 White 108199407 Small 4400 Series Stand Black 108541194 Small 4400 Series Stand White 108541202 Power Supply for 4450 108596412 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 339 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 12 3 BM32 The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 The BM32 add on provides
115. system is the system or control unit It stores the system configuration and controls the system operation Each control unit can be customized by adding various base 19 and trunk 22 gt cards External expansion modules can be also be connected to add additional extension and trunk ports IP Office Release 7 0 supports the following IP Office control units Previous IP Office control units are not supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and are not covered by this documentation e IP500v2 Control Unit 199 This control unit has four front slots for 1P500 base cards It has an internal power supply unit and uses a mandatory SD card Feature Key dongle It includes a 2 port ethernet LAN switch layer 3 managed on the rear e IP500 Control Unit 202 This control unit has four front slots for 1P500 base cards It has an internal power supply unit and uses a mandatory smart card Feature Key dongle It includes a 2 port ethernet LAN switch layer 3 managed on the rear IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 14 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 3 IP500v2 System Components The following are the typical components of an IP Office system based on an 1P500v2 control unit VKOOnDd15SDvXoxkw9cR9x jJOXr AWz9 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 System Overview Control Units IP Office I P500v2 System Unit 199 The control unit holds the main configuration and performs the routing and switching for
116. the IP Office control unit 2 Attach the external expansion module s power supply 3 Connect the expansion interconnect cable from the module s EXPANSION port to the first free EXPANSION port on the control unit ao 2605 aohdnen nie rele teletaleta L o 60000990 l Oadadava D E tileTefatele E aoa E rale Talata oG050 Pood uletaletelete al epeoenens o One aeadad erasers ppaagoga GO GOnO po 4 Make careful note of the port used and include this detail on the cable label and any other system records 5 Switch on power to the module Wait for the center LED on the front of the module to change from red to green 6 Switch on power to the control unit 7 Once the control unit has rebooted using Manager receive the system configuration 8 Click on f Unit in the left hand panel 9 Check that the list of units shown in the right hand panel is correct 10 The external expansion modules should be upgraded to the same level of software as the control unit Do this by repeating the IP Office upgrade process see K Upgrading the Core Software 183 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 187 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 12 Rack Mounting The IP500 control unit and IP500 external expansion units can be rack mounted if required into 19 inch rack systems This requires an IP500 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700429202 for each unit The kit includes e A rack mounting bracket and screws for attach
117. the MIB file compilation list results in errors due to conflicts with what appear to be internal definitions within SNMPc and the SNMPv2 SMI section in its STANDARD mib file Therefore to resolve the issue the required definition of zeroDotZero must be placed in the SNMPv2 SMI section in SNMPc s STANDARD mib file IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 141 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 10 2 Enabling SNMP and Polling Support In order for the IP Office control unit to be discovered and polled by an SNMP manager its SNMP agent must be enabled and placed in the same read community as the SNMP manager l In Manager receive the control unit s configuration 2 Double click System from the Configuration Tree panel and select the SNMP tab 3 Tick SNMP Enabled 4 1n SNMP Port enter the UDP port number used by the IP Office SNMP agent to listen for and respond to SNMP traffic The normal default is 161 5 In Community Read only enter the community to which the device belongs for read access This community name must match that used by the SNMP manager application when sending requests to the device The community public is frequently used to establish communication and then changed at both the SNMP agent and manager ends for security 6 Click OK 7 Send the configuration back to the IP Office and select reboot 8 Following the IP Office reboot the SNMP manager should be able to discover the control unit 9 T
118. the appropriate memory card LED is off e The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions Card Shutdown Using the System Status Application Application 1 Start System Status 67 gt and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel select System 3 Select Memory Cards 4 Select either System Card or Optional Card 5 At the bottom of the screen select Shutdown e At the back of the control unit confirm that the appropriate memory card LED is off e The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions Card Shutdown Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select System for the System SD card or Option for the Optional SD card 5 Select Shutdown e At the back of the control unit confirm that the appropriate memory card LED is off e The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 167 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7 6 2 Card Startup Reinserting a memory card into a system that is al
119. the brackets and fit the control unit into the rack e Connect External Expansion Modules 88 Connect the external expansions modules to the control unit e Grounding 90 Attach required ground cables to the control unit and external expansion modules e LAN Network Connections 91 Attach the IP Office control unit and a PC with IP Office Manager to the LAN network e Starting the System 92 gt Insert the System SD card and power up the system e Changing the System to IP Office Standard Version Mode 95 1P500v2 systems installed in IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode can be changed to operate in IP Office Standard Version mode e Connecting Phones 96 Connect the Avaya digital phones IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 70 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation 4 1 Tools and Equipment Required The following is a general summary of the tools required Additional tools and equipment will be required for wall and or rack mounting and to fashion ground cable connections suitable to local requirements e Tools Required e O 5mm Flat blade screwdriver e O Crosshead screwdriver e O Anti static wrist strap and ground point e O RJ45 RJ 45 Ethernet LAN Cable e O M4 Cross Head Screwdriver e O Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade e O If wall mounting drills and tools for wall mounting fixtures e Additional Parts Required In addition to orderable IP Office
120. this a wall mounting kit is required in addition to suitable wall fixings In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit The following wall mounting kits exist e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP Code 700500923 This kit can be used for wall mounting an 1P500 or IP500 v2 control unit and IP500 external expansion modules This kit incorporates cable routing at the front and rear of the unit For control units it allows orientation of the control unit base card slots to the left or to the right e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit SAP Code 700430150 This old design of wall mounting kit can be used for wall mounting an IP500 or 1P500v2 control units only It does not provide any cable routing and requires the control unit to be mounted with the base card slots to the right only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 190 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Wall Mounting 8 13 1 Wall Mounting Kit V2 These notes relate to the IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP 700500923 This kit can be used to wall mountI P500v2 control units and IP500 external expansion modules The kit includes all
121. to add a combination of ports to an I1P500v2 control unit Not supported by IP500 control units e Supports e 10 voice compression channels supporting G 711 G729a and G 723 with 64ms echo cancellation e 6 Digital Station ports for digital stations 43 except 3800 4100 4400 7400 M and T Series e 2 Analog Extension ports e 2 BRI Trunk ports 4 BRI channels e 1P500 Control Unit e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 2 combination cards of any type e IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems are limited to a maximum of 12 BRI channels using BRI Combination and or BRI trunk daughter cards e IP500 Trunk Card Support 1 The trunk daughter card is pre installed and cannot be replaced with another card type Port Type Digit Station Provides DS 3876 ports for digital stations 43 except 4100 4400 7400 M and T Series LEDS e Green On Phone detected e LED1 is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Supports ICLID modes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 Extension REN 2 1 for external bell device Off Hook current 25mA Ring Voltage 40V Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing capacitor For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection sho
122. unit a E f Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings 144 Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal program and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time Switch off power to the IP Office control unit Power on the control unit and press the escape key every second until you get a Loader message Below is an example P12 Loader 2 4 CPU Revision 0x0900 Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK If an OK response is not received check the settings of your terminal program and repeat the process above 3 Enter AT X The control unit should respond Multi Sector Erase 4 The control unit will now request the bin file it requires For 1P500v2 control units this will be from files on the System SD card For other control units it will be from Manager and appears in the TFTP Log 5 If the file transfers does not appear to be taking place check that the IP address shown in the TFTP Log matches the BOOTP entry Adjust the BOOTP entry if necessary 6 When completed the system will reboot IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 149 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 7 SD Card Management IP Office Standard Version Installation ffice 7 0 Page 151 IPO 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7
123. unit otherwise a Hook one of the cable covers into the leading hole of one of the metal brackets b Hook another bracket onto the other end of the cable cover and then attach that bracket to the unit c Repeat the process to attach the other cable cover to the unit 5 Fit the Wall Bracket See Figure 4 Using 2 of the screws provided with the kit attach the wall bracket to the plywood surface 6 Place the Unit onto the Wall Bracket See Figure 5 Lift the unit onto the wall bracket The two metal brackets at the top of the unit hook over the top of the wall bracket 7 Attach the Unit to the Wall Panel See Figure 6 a Using the remaining 4 screws provided with the kit fix the cover brackets to the plywood surface b Reinsert the base cards and blank slot covers Page 84 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Wall Mounting 4 6 2 Wall Mounting Kit V1 These notes relate to the older design of wall mounting kit SAP 70043015 used for 1P500 and IP500v2 control units This kit cannot be used for external expansion modules The kit includes two brackets one top and one bottom and screws for attachment to the control unit Additional 4 x 4 5mm fixtures and fittings are required suitable for the wall type In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be verti
124. users can play voicemail messages through their email mailbox or voicemail mailbox Basic Voicemail Pro Minimum PC Requirements Operating System Support Processor 2008 Server Any 1 7GHz XP Professional Also allow 1MB per minute for message and windows prompt storage e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Voicemail Pro plus UMS Web Voicemail and or Campaigns Minimum PC Requirements Operating System Support Processor 2008 Server IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 363 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e ee PE sia Windows _ Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage e Both Web Campaigns and UMS Web Voicemail require the IIS web server on the voicemail server PC to be enabled e UMS Web Voicemail will install PHP if not detected as already installed Voicemail Pro plus IVR and or TTS Minimum PC Requirements Basic Operating System Support Voicemail Pro Serveros Service Client x Hard Disk Free Space 20GB 2008 Server vista TX Athlon XP 3000 Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage Generic TTS only The current ScanSoft TTS provided with Voicemail Pro is not supported on Vista e If the database being queried is located on the VM Pro server the query speed of the database will be
125. w See Voicemail Pro Licenses 392 The details below are for a Windows based server installation of Voicemail Pro Voicemail Pro can also be installed as part of a Linux based server installation using the IP Office Application Server DVD 351 The Voicemail Pro server part of the software consists of several components in addition to the core server software these are e Campaigns The Voicemail Pro can be configured to run a campaign This consists of a series of questions for which the Voicemail Pro records the callers answer or key presses The resulting recordings can then be played back by users The web aspect of campaigns allows user to perform this playback and processing of campaign recordings via their web browser This requires an IIS web server to be run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro software e Text to Speech TTS Through adding additional licenses the Voicemail Pro is able to use the TTS functions of Windows to speak text and numbers to callers in addition to recording prompts This is intended mainly for scenarios where the Voicemail Pro is obtaining text and number values from a customer database e Unified Messaging Service UMS Voicemail Pro supports a feature called voicemail email to send messages or message alerts to a user s email mailbox This however is a one way process with no link back to the user s voicemail mailbox on whether the email has been read or deleted UMS allows this to become a two way process where
126. 0 5mm Flat blade screwdriver 2 0 Anti static wrist strap and ground point Procedure Installing a Trunk Daughter Card 1 Check that correct cards have been supplied 2 Ensure that you are wearing an anti static wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point 3 On the base card identify the position of 3 holes for the plastic pillars for the 1P500 card These are along the same edge as the card connector 4 Fit the stand off pillars to the 1P500 base card 5 If there is a clip on metal shield over the connector block on the base card remove it 6 Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the IP500 trunk card onto its connector block and the stand off pillars 7 Check that the card connector has snapped into position 8 Using the washers and screws provided secure the metal stand off pillars to the base card 9 A set of labels are supplied with the trunk daughter card Fit the appropriate label to the front of the base card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 79 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 5 2 IP500 Legacy Card Preparation An IP500 Legacy Carrier card can be used to fit 1P400 trunk or VCM cards into an 1P500 or 1P500v2 control unit Up to 2 1P500 legacy carrier cards can be inserted w PRI T1 w PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 e VCM 4 Dual PRI T1 w Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45 w VCM 8 w PRI 30 E1 1 4 w BRI 8 UNI wf VCM 16 Dual PRI El wf ANLG 4 Uni US only
127. 00 PRI Trunk Card 222 e 1P400 Cards 24 The I1P500 Legacy Carrier base card can be used to allow 1P400 trunk cards and 1P400 VCM cards to be added to the IP500 control unit e License Keys 39 Various IP Office features and applications require a license key to be entered into the system s configuration Each key is a 32 character text string unique to the feature being activated and the serial number of the Feature Key dongle installed in the system VKOOnDd15SDvXoxkw9cR9x jJOXr AWz9 e IP500 External Expansion Modules 26 Additional ports can be added using a number of 1P500 external expansion modules Support also includes 1P400 external expansion modules 31 gt Up to 8 external expansion modules are supported or 12 if the control unit is fitted with an IP500 4 Port Expansion Base Card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 17 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e Power Supplies 33 gt The IP500 control unit has an internal power supply unit Each external expansion module is supplied with an external power supply unit Additional power supply units may also be required for IP phones and some phone add ons e Power Cords 34 Depending on the locale different power cords need to be ordered for each control unit external expansion module and any phones or devices using external power supply units e Cables 36 The IP Office is designed primarily for connection to a structured cabling system
128. 0D REL 4 00 10 07 04 HWT 51H HiWiv 1 FiWV 4 3 The firmware loaded into the phones has a major and minor version The Major version in the example above is Shown as FWV 4 and the minor version is shown as REL 4 00 4 Press Done to exit self test mode IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 129 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Procedure Forcing a Software Upgrade e The following procedure should only be used if it has been determined that the 2400 5400 Series phones need to be manually forced to change their firmware During this process the phone cannot be used e For the IP Office 4 1 Q1 2008 maintenance release and higher using the batch file to enable the phones to upgrade their firmware is ignored unless the No User user Source Number of ALLOW_5410 UPGRADES is added to the IP Office configuration Locate the Manager program directory and within it the files turn_on bat and turn_ off bat Right click on turn_on bat and select Edit Locate the entry lt IP Address gt and replace this with the IP address of the IP Office system Close the file and save the changes Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the file turn_off bat Oo UW A U N HH Ensure that Manager is running and is enabled to run as a TFTP Server Manager acts as the TFTP server from which the phones will request firmware files 7 Double click on the file turn_on bat 8 A prompt window should appear asking you to wait and eventually if succes
129. 0v2 Installation Starting the System 4 11 1 Checking the LEDs Control Unit LEDs LED Description Optional SD Off Card shutdown 167 e Red flashing Card initializing or shutting down Green on Card present Red fast flashing card full System SD Green flashing Card tee Red steady Card failure wrong type Orange steady Reset imminent CPU Alternate red green Starting up Red on No software Green on Okay Flashing Red Error Shutdown Base Card LEDs Base Card LEDs 1 to 8 Usage All Cards e LED1 is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown 1P500 Analog Phone e No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions IP500 Digital Station e Green On Phone detected IP500 Combination LEDS 1 to 6 e Green On Phone detected I P500 VCM e LEDs 1 to 8 are unlabelled They are used to indicate voice compression channel usage Each LED lit represents 12 5 of the available voice compression channel capacity in use total card capacity rather than licensed capacity I P500 4 Port Expansion LEDs 1 to 8 are used for the expansion ports on the rear of the control unit LEDs 9 to 12 are used for the card s own expansion ports Green On Expansion module present Red Flashing initializing o Red on e o Trunk Daughter Card LEDs Trunk Daughter Card LEDs 9 to 12 Usage e LED 9 is also used f
130. 1 System Components Applications 9 14 9 System Status Application SSA This tool provides a wide range of information about the current status of an IP Office 4 0 or higher system Its includes available resources and components within the system This includes details of current call in progress Details of the number of alarms are recorded and the time date of the most recent alarms When required for diagnostics escalation SSA is able to take a snap shot image of the IP Office system s status including a copy of its current configuration Use of SSA requires an IP Office service user name and password that has been configured for System Status access in the IP Office s security settings e For IP500v2 systems SSA is pre installed on the system s Avaya SD memory card and can be run by browsing to the IP Office system s IP address DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 License X No license required PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements Operating System Support Hard Disk Free Space tl Scan ees XP Professional _ Sun Java Virtual Installed with SSA if not already peewee enn peen e Vista support is only on Business e Internet Explorer 7 Enterprise and Ultimate versions SAM rene e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Server OS 2003 Server i IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 361 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue
131. 10k channel Maximum a c signal 200mV rms IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 373 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 4 BRI Port So The BRI ports found on the front of the So8 module are BRI So interface ports for connect to ISDN terminal devices For IP Office 4 2 1P500 BRI trunk daughter cards can be switched from To to So mode 1P400 BRI trunk cards can only ISDN Terminal be used as To connections 375 1 1 White Orange R45 2 Orange White 2 3 Rx A White Green 3 4 Tx B Blue White 4 5 TX A White Blue 5 6 Rx B Green White 6 7 White Brown 7 8 Brown White 8 e Terminating Resistors 1000hm Terminating resistors are required across the transmit and receive wire pairs at each end of the S bus e The IP Office So8 module BRI ports include integral 1000hm terminating resistors e For IP Office 4 2 individual ports of an 1P500 BRI daughter card can be switched to So mode This is done by setting the Line Sub Type to S Bus in the IP Office configuration In this case terminating resistors must be added at the IP Office end in addition to those at the other end of the S bus connection e Addition of the necessary termination at the IP Office end can be done using an 1P500 BRI So Converter Cable 700458649 This short 25cm 10 cable includes both the necessary terminating resistors and the cable cross over e Many ISDN terminal devices includes terminating resistors If thi
132. 13382 BS1363 United Kingdom 700213374 NEMA1 15 America 700213390 Korea Korea 700254519 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit All 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 253 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 4 Phone V2 The 1P400 Phone V2 module also known as the Phone V2 module is used to add additional PHONE ports to an IP Office system PHONE ports are used for analog phones The Phone V2 module is available in 8 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the Phone 8 Phone 16 and Phone 30 respectively The Phone V2 module supersedes the original 1P400 Phone module now referred to as the Phone V1 The module version is indicated by labels on both the base and the rear of the module Key changes are e The Phone V2 uses an earthed 3 pin 60W external power supply unit e With IP Office 3 1 the message waiting indication MWI on each port can be configured for None On 51V Stepped 81V Line Reversal A or Line Reversal B On uses the default determined by the system locale Ports on a Phone V2 module can additionally be configured for 101V operation e These ports do not include a ringing capacitor Therefore for connection to 4 wire analog phones where this is a requirement typically the United Kingdom and Ne
133. 16 bin S 0 11016 IP Office gai ROMAE ne Lene nadcp 1 bin 9 0 11016 IP Office Select Directory nadcpv2 bin 9 0 11016 IP Office Refresh tm16 bi 9 011016 IP Offi bel reer ney Select all Units System C Deselect All Units O System c 192 168 0 1 IPSooYe 7 0 11016 IP Office errr es avpotsi6 bin 9 011016 IP Office m h l l Deselect PBs and its modules DO dvppots bin S 0 11016 IP Office O mast 16 bin 9 0 11016 IP Office Upgrade CD nadcp 16 bin 9 0 11016 IP Office 2 CD nadcpv2 bin 9 0 11016 IP Office O naatmi bin S 0 11016 IP Office 4 4 9 0 11016 Unit Broadcast Address If Backup System Files 255 255 255 255 Refresh i Validate le Upload System Files Upgrade Cancel M Restart IP Phones E 2 The information displayed depends on the type of control unit e For IP500v2 control units The current version of each IP Office bin file held in the control units memory is shown That is regardless of whether that bin file is currently being used by any module in the system e For other control units For the control unit and each external expansion module present in the system the current version of software installed is displayed 3 The Version column indicates the current version of software installed The Available column indicates the version of software Manager has available If the available version is higher the check box next to that row is automatically selected e If any of the modules have pre v
134. 255 255 0 To directly connect a PC change the TCP IP properties for the PCs LAN port to the following Fixed IP address 192 168 42 203 Default gateway 192 168 42 1 e While setting the PC to be a DHCP client could be used this is not recommended for performing more advanced functions such as firmware upgrades 2 Connect the LAN cable from the PCs LAN port the LAN or LAN1 port on the IP Office control unit 3 Check that the orange LED lamp on the IP Office LAN port is on The green LED may also be flickering as it indicates traffic across the LAN connection 4 To test the connection before running Manager or System Status Application e Select Start Run and enter cmd e In the command window that appears enter ping 192 168 42 1 The results should show a number of ping replies from the IP Office This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office e If there are no ping replies enter ipconfig The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as required above If they do enter exit and check the cable connection 5 You can now start Manager 66 System Status 67 or System Monitor 68 gt IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 65 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 3 3 Starting Manager IP Office Manager is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration Manager can also be used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system Requirements
135. 3 except 4100 4400 7400 M and T Series LEDs e Green On Phone detected e LED1 is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Supports ICLID modes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 Extension REN 2 1 for external bell device Off Hook current 25mA Ring Voltage 40V Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing Capacitor For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors During power failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12 No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions Analog Trunk DTMF ICLID Busy tone detection Over voltage and lightning protection DTMF and LD dialing Adjustable echo cancellation default 16ms Selectable to Off 8 16 32 64 and 128 milliseconds LEDs e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IPO IP500v2 COMBINATION IPO IP500v2 COMBINATION CARD ATM 700476013 CARD ATM IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 210 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Base Cards 9 3 4 BRI Combination Card This card is used
136. 3 DSS The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones It does not support T3 IPN phones Previous restrictions against using T3 phones on systems with other types of digital stations no longer apply se Connects via IP Office Release Headset Socket Programmable Buttons Message Waiting Lamp Upgradeable Firmware Using optional T3 Headset Link unit T3 UPN Comfort Black White T3 IP Comfort Black White T3 DSS Unit Black White T3 DSS Expansion Unit Black White T3 IP Power Supply Unit AEI Headset Link for T3 IP Power Supply for T3 IP DSS Headset Link for T3 UPN IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700380280 700380314 700414758 700414741 700380322 700380330 700380348 700380355 700414766 700414774 700414790 700380363 DS ports 3 1 Not Small Office Edition 10 nl Handsfree Speaker Microphone f f i Xx Page 335 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 72 T3 Compact This phone is supported in Europe only U Law only The T3 Classic has 1 Link port for optional add on T3 Headset or T3 DSS units up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones It does not support T3 IPN phones Previous restrictions against using T3 phones on systems with other types of digital stations no longer apply Connects via Headset Socket IP Office Release Programmable Buttons DS ports 3 1 N
137. 305 5620 306 5621 307 e 9600 Bence 9608 310 9620L 31t 9620C 31t 9621G 313 9630G 31 9640 316 9640G 316 9641G 318 9650 319 9650C 31 e T3 IP Series T3 IP Compact 336 T3 IP Classic 334 T3 IP Comfort 335 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 262 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones SIP e 1000 Series 1010 264 1040 264 e 1100 Series 1120E 265 1140E 265 e 1200 Series 1220 265 1230 265 e Softphone Avaya IP Office SIP Softphone application Analog Telephones Analog phones and devices connect to PHONE 382 ports with the IP Office system However due to the variety of analog phones and device available no guarantee of operation is given It is the responsibility of the IP Office installer and maintainer to test and verify the operation of proposed analog equipment e 6200 Series 6211 6219 6221 North America e Interquartz Gemini 9330 AV 9335 AV 9281 AV Europe Middle East Africa Asia Pacific IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 263 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 1 1010 1040 The 1000 Series phones are high quality SIP video phone devices The 1010 and 1040 phones are supported Each consists of a main module to which a range of video camera and microphone speaker devices can be attached The main module provides outputs for display of video on HD video compatible devices e The availability of VCM Voice Compressi
138. 34905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 w 24 12 buttons x 2 pages Page 307 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 43 9504 9500 Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher The phones provide 4 physical buttons with red and green LEDs These can be used for up to 12 programmable features 9504 Telephone Charcoal Grey 700500206 BM12 Button Module Charcoal Grey 700480643 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 308 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 44 9508 9500 Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher The phones provide 8 physical buttons with red and green LEDs These can be used for up to 24 programmable features The phones support the addition of up to 3 BM12 button modules supporting an additional 24 programmable features using 12 buttons per module Charcoal Grey 700500207 9508 Telephone Charcoal Grey 700480643 BM12 Button Module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 309 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 45 9608 e These phones are supported by IP Office Release 6 1 on 1P500 and IP500v2 systems only The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e The use of the IP Office control unit as the HTTP file server for these phones is not supported A third party HTTP file server must be used The phones supports 24 programmable buttons The
139. 3k 22 May 2011 9 11 34 4625 System Components Phones The 4625 is similar in physical appearance and function to the 4621SW However the 4625SW includes a color display This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone _ Message Waiting Lamp PoE Class Typical Idle Power Consumption Display Supported Add Ons Upgradeable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority IP network 3 2 w 24 12 buttons x 2 pages ul af uf uf 6 45W Class 3 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels EU24 EU24BL af af wf Standard DCP Phone Keys 5 SPEAKER J XE MESSAGES x A Ut DROP 4625SW Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset EU24 EU24BL 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord MUTE A CHL TRANSFER f CCC CONFERENCE HEADSET F HOLD H REDIAL Multi Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Multi Grey Multi Grey With CAT5 cable With CAT5 cable USA
140. 500 External Expansion Modules LELLO LELLO I P400 External Expansion Modules Wall Mounting IP500 1P500v2 control units and 1P500 external expansion modules can be wall mounted To do this a wall mounting kit is required in addition to suitable wall fixings In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit The following wall mounting kits exist e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP Code 700500923 This kit can be used for wall mounting an 1P500 or IP500 v2 control unit and IP500 external expansion modules This kit incorporates cable routing at the front and rear of the unit For control units it allows orientation of the control unit base card slots to the left or to the right e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit SAP Code 700430150 This old design of wall mounting kit can be used for wall mounting an IP500 or 1P500v2 control units only It does not provide any cable routing and requires the control unit to be mounted with the base card slots to the right only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 40 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Wall and Rack Mounting Rack Mounting All IP
141. 600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 4 Select Features Phone User System Admin 5 Enter your IP Office user login code 6 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select System for the System SD card or Option for the Optional SD card 5 Select Startup IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 121 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 4 Changing Components Except for memory cards see Memory Card Removal 120 cards and external expansions modules must only be removed and added to an IP Office system when that system is switched off 117 In the sections below the term component can refer to a card fitted into the IP Office or an external expansion module Note that for extension ports by default both an extension entry and a user entry will exist in the IP Office configuration Extension entries can be deleted without deleting the corresponding user entry This allows retention of the user settings and association of the user with a different extension by changing that extensions Base Extension number to match the user s Extension ID Like for Like Replacement If replacing with a componenet of the same type no configuration changes are necessary 1 Switch off the IP Office system 117 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion por
142. 7 Connects to the XM24 port on the base of 6416 and 6424 phones Requires the phone to have a separate power supply using an Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and a power outlet socket are required For additional limitations see Phone Add Ons 337 Connects via Supported by Additional requirements IP Office Release Programmable Buttons XM24 XM24 Stand 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 XM24 port on phone 6416 6424 Maximum per phone L Maximum per DS module control unit 2 Maximum per IP Office system 10 1151D1 or 1151D2 PSU for phone 1 0 wf 24 Grey White Grey White With CAT5 cable With CAT5 cable USA Europe Australia and New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina 700406523 700406515 108272378 108272386 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Page 348 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phone Add Ons 9 13 Ancilliary Systems 9 13 1 Digitial Mobility Solution Avaya 4100 Series and 7400 Series phones are supported using a Digital Mobility Solution DMS This is a DECT system that can be used to support up to 64 handsets The DMS connects to the 1P500 system using a TCM port for each handset a a Digital Mobility 2 4 GHz solution North America and CALA 7420 Handset
143. 7 3 Viewing the Card Contents Using IP Office Manager you can view the folders and files on the System SD card and the Optional SD card You can then use various commands to upload and download files to and from the cards UA Avaya IP Office R6 Manager Embedded File Management OffLine 6 0 11025 Administrator I ol x File Edit wiew Help n Pi ila MO Lee Eg UffLine Mame 14xx_R1 bin Pe SYSTEM a Se E Date Modifed 10 11 2009 15 55 36 i E BACKUP Jee Boe Lene Size bytes 175 272 DI i E DYNAMIC 2410_R6 BIN 66962 pm A 3 LVMAIL 2420_RE BIN Attributes a PRIMARY aa 4607 dbte1_82 bin 899 M Readony I Hidden a 4602dbte1_82 bin an 4602sbtet_82 bin aa 5410 _RE6 BIN 5420 RE BIN Total Space Used bytes 705 921 024 56 FBO bte1810 bir i Space pata bytes 3 246 656 206 sa 5602dbte1 806 bin PIE ani S602sbte1 606 bin j JE AIPOSS jpg a01d01b2_3 bin 1648284 10401 p17 bin 1760231 Od0ip2_9 1 bin 1758746 02d01b2_3 bin 1646512 a cn I Pierre n M Archive la System nio a Optional SD O 0 di J di r aie 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 158 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management
144. 743 700229727 Page 300 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 36 5410 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2410 However the 5410 phone is only supported on IP Office Connects via DS port IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons w 12 6 buttons x 2 pages Headset Socket ul Handsfree Speaker nell d Microphone Message Waiting Lamp wf Display 29 characters x 5 lines 168 x 80 pixels Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware ul Standard DCP Phone Keys b HEADSET amp MUTE fm VOLUME UP i amp F HOLD A C C TRANSFER FF VOLUME DOWN CEC CONFERENCE J K SPEAKER Z MESSAGES Z Ct prop suJ REDIAL 5410 Multi Grey 700345291 5410 RoHS compliant Multi Grey 700382005 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 301 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 37 5420 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2420 However the 5420 is only supported on IP Office Standard DCP Phone Keys sf lm VOLUME UP sl 7 VOLUME DOWN J K SPEAKER Z b HEADSET A E MESSAGES Z HOLD CH DROP SE REDIAL When used with an EU24 unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone Display Connects via
145. 8 programmable buttons e SMB24 345 24 Max 3 per phone 42 per system Supported with 9630G 9640 9640G 9650 and 9650C telephones e T3 DSS 346 36 Max 3 per phone 30 per system Up to 3 of these units can be connected to any of the IP Office T3 phones Each provides an additional 36 programmable buttons Each button includes a single red status LED Maximum 3 per phone 30 per system Connection of the T3 DSS varies e Vith non IP models the first T3 DSS connects directly to a link port on the phone No additional power supplies are required e With T3 IP Models the first T3 DSS connects to a DSS Link Unit fitted to the phone A power supply is required for the DSS e T7316E KEM 347 24 Max 9 per phone 42 per system Used with T7316E 332 phones Each button module provides 24 programmable buttons Up to 4 buttons modules are supported per phone without additional power supply Up to 4 buttons modules are supported per phone without additional power supply From 5 to 9 modules can be supported with additional power Maximum 9 per phone 4 without additional power e XM24 348 24 Max 1 per phone 2 per expansion module or control unit 21 per system Add on for 6416D and 6424D phones Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons Connects direct to phone IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 337 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 12 1 201B RIM The 201B Recorder Interface Module RIM is suppo
146. A 182300 This legacy license enables Visual Basic Script support with Voicemail Pro For IP Office Release 6 this is also enabled by the Advanced Edition license IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 393 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 17 6 Customer Call Reporter Licenses Support for the Customer Call Reporter application is enabled by the presence of Preferred Edition and Advanced Edition licenses in the IP Office configuration For system being upgraded Customer Call Reporter can alternately be enabled by a legacy CCR Sup license or a CCC Supervisor and CCR CCC Upg license e Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro 1P400 LIC PREFRD VMPRO 171991 This license enables support for Voicemail Pro as the IP Office s voicemail server with 4 voicemail ports The Preferred Edition license allows the voicemail server to provide the services listed below Additional license can be added for additional voicemail features these are detailed separately This license was previously called Voicemail Pro 4 ports e Mailboxes for all users and hunt groups e Campaigns e Announcements for users and hunt groups e TTS email reading for users licensed to Mobile Worker or Power User profiles e Customizable call flows l e Use of Conference Meet Me functions on IP500 e Call recording to mailboxes and IP500v2 systems e Advanced Edition This license enables the additional features listed below A Preferred Edition lic
147. Adapter 700383771 Bluetooth Adapter 700383789 Replacement Handset 700416548 Amplified Speech Handset 700446370 Replacement Handset Cord 9 feet 700383318 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 314 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones Replacement Handset Cord 25 feet 700383821 Replacement Line Cord 700383326 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 315 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 49 9640 9640G These phones are supported on IP500 and IP500v2 systems running IP Office Release 6 0 and higher The phones are supplied with a two position stand e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license e The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e For IP Office Release 6 1 these phones are supported running SIP software When that is the case the IP Office or IP Office Manager should not be used as the file server for the phone Avaya SIP phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints license e The Class requirement of PoE powered phones may be increased if the phone is used with additional equipment such as a button module 96600 Feature 9640 l Hone 07327414052 n CIRIE EEE Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree
148. Add Ons EU24 EU24BL Upgradeable Firmware ul PC Pass Through Port with Voice ft af dl Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys wf amp amp HEADSET J MUTE si sila VOLUME UP Z A SPEAKER X E MESSAGES amp F HOLD J GO TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN Z prop fa REDIAL Z CCC CONFERENCE 46201 P Multi Grey 700212186 4620SW Multi Grey 700259674 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 EU24 Multi Grey 700381817 EU24BL Multi Grey 700381544 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 When used with an EU24 or EU24BL unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 297 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 33 4621 The 4621 is similar in physical appearance and function to the 4620SW However the 4621SW includes a backlight function for the screen This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support
149. Admin DVD f rfc2213 integrated services mib mib AdminCD snmp_mibs standard folder on OpenView Install CD g diffserv dscp tc mib AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard folder on IP Office Admin DVD h diffserv mib hpov mib AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard folder on IP Office Admin DVD i ipo phones mib mib AdminCD snmp_mibs lIPOffice folder on IP Office Admin DVD 2 Start the OpenView Network Node Manager console 3 Select Options and then Load Unload MI Bs SNMP 4 Select Load and select all the MIB files listed above 5 Select Compile IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 140 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes SNMP CastleRock SNMPc 5 1 6c and earlier 1 Copy the following MIB files to the applications MIBs folder normally C Program Files SNMPc Network Manager mibfiles gt e gt Je Jefe F Te ENTITY MIB AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin DVD AVAYAGEN MIB mib AdminCD snmp_mibs lI POffice on IP Office Admin DVD PO PROD MIB mib AdminCD snmp_ mibs lIPOffice on IP Office Admin DVD IPO MI B mib AdminCD snmp_ mibs IPOffice on IP Office Admin DVD INET ADDRESS MI B mib AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin DVD INTEGRATED SERVICES MIB AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin DVD DIFFSERV DSCP TC mib AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin DVD DIFFSERV MIB mib AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard on IP Office Admin DVD IPO PHONES MI B mib AdminCD snmp_mibs lIPOffice
150. Avaya e Tek Tips http www tek tips com e IP Office Info http www ipofficeinfo com e Yahoo Groups http groups yahoo com group ipoffice e PBX Tech http www pbxtech info forumdisplay php f 8 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 51 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 16 Emergency and Power Failure Ports IP Office systems can provide 2 types of analog extension power failure ports These are Type Description Switching Power Failure Ports Emergency Only Power Failure Ports During normal IP Office operation these ports can be used for normal analog phone connection During power failure the port is directly connected to an analog trunk port During normal IP Office operation these ports cannot be used During power failure the port is directly connected to an analog trunk port Provided By e 1P500 Analog Phone 8 Card When an 1P500 Analog Phone 8 base card is fitted with an IP500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure extension port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 I1P500 ATM Combination Card On this card during power failure extension port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 IP500 Analog Trunk Daughter Card Regardless of the 1P500 card hosting it during power failure pins 4 and 5 of port 12 are connected to pins 7 and 8 1P400 ATM16 External Expansion Module This external expansion module has two ports PF1 and PF2 on its rear During power
151. Conferencing Unit ACU is a multiple microphone desktop conferencing unit The Audio Conferencing unit only supports the following Feature codes e Speeddial Feature 0 This feature code can be used to dial a stored number e If Feature O is followed by a 3 dight number in the range 000 to 255 the system directory entry with the matching index is dialed e f Feature O is followed by and a 2 digit number in the range 71 to 94 the personal directory entry with the matching index is dialed e Hold Switch Calls Feature 2 This feature code will hold the current call If there was already a call on hold the feature code will switch between calls e Conference Feature 3 If the Audio Conferencing Unit has a call connected and another call on hold using this feature code will conference the unit and those calls e Last Number Redial Feature 5 When the phone is idle this feature code can be used to redial the last number dialed from the Audio Conferencing Unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 321 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 53 ETR 6 ETR 6D This phone is supported with IP Office Release 6 0 and higher It is only supported on an ETRE card in 1P500v2 systems They are only supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems running in a North American locale They are not supporte
152. DC 1 P 376 DTE 144 EXPANSI ON 1379 PHONE 382 i 19 20 21 22 235 24 eo 26 2T 26 23 30 ee eE A eE EA EXPANSION 5 045 MAX DIGITAL STATION We 1 54 PHONE ve DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only RJ 45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module RJ45 socket Used for connection of analog phones Intended for two wire analog phones For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors If connected to an out of building extension 3 the connection must be made via additional P Office Barrier Boxes 133 in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing 38 Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections 39 All expansion modules are supplied with a base software leve
153. DI EDI EDI EDI EDI EDI EDI EDI BPS BPS BP BPS BP T Fork mn A Be OF MM D wH Dm A E n Extension Extn Extension Id Base Extension Caller Display Type Reset Volume After Calls Device type Module Port Disable Speakerphone 7 lee Digital Extension 1 202 a gt ee DL l Avaya 5410 BDI 1 ad 3 Select that extension and change its Base Extension setting to 203 ie to now match User B s extension number If IP Office Manager is set to validate edits it will warn that this change conflicts with the existing Base Extension setting of another extension Ignore the warning at this stage Click OK 4 Locate the other extension with the Base Extension set to 203 ie matching User B s extension number 5 Select that extension and change its Base Extension setting to 202 ie to now match User A s extension number If the error pane is visible View Error Pane the warnings about extension conflicts should now disappear Click OK 6 Save the configuration back to the IP Office system 7 At each of the extensions dial the log out short code set on the IP Office system By default this is 36 e If any of the users is set to Forced Login they will have to complete the login process at their new extension using their Login Code IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 124 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Swapping Extension Users
154. E port on the IP Office control unit 2 Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings 144 Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen 3 Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK 4 Enter AT SECURI TYRESETALL 5 You will be prompted to confirm the control unit s MAC address before continuing Enter the address 6 The control unit will resoond OK when the action has been completed 7 Close the terminal program session 8 Manager can now be used to receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted security settings Defaulting the Configuration and Security Settings via the Boot Loader This process defaults the IP Office security settings and its configurations settings 1 Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action If a copy of the configuration cannot be downloaded using Manager check the Manager application directory for previously downloaded configurations a Use Manager to download an up to date copy of the configuration If that is not possible check in the Manager application folder for a previous copy of the configuration b Using IP Office Manager select File Open Configuration c Using the Select I P Office Menu locate and select the IP Office system Click OK d Enter the name and password for a service user account on that IP Offic
155. Embedded Voicemail Application 48 Memory Card 25 EMC Cautions Canadian Department of Communications 403 EMC Caution for China 403 Federal Communications Commission 403 Envirmental Requirements 54 Equipment Availability 9 Expansion Port 370 Expansion Modules IP400 Analog Trunk 26 IP400 Analog Trunk 16 248 IP400 Digital Station 26 252 IP400 Digital Station V2 250 IP400 Phone 26 256 IP400 Phone V2 254 IP400 So8 26 258 IP400 WAN3 26 IP500 Analog Trunk 16 225 IP500 BRISo8 227 IP500 Digital Station 26 229 IP500 Phone 26 234 IPO 500 Analog Trunk 26 IPO 500 BRISo8 26 Expansion Port 379 EXT O P Port 370 EXT O P Port 135 379 Extension Numbers Swapping 124 External Expansion Modules 26 F Faulty Units 9 FCC Rules 409 Feature Key Server Application 48 Feature Keys Parallel 42 Serial 42 Smart Card 42 USB 42 Features 2402D Phone 275 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 2410D Phone 276 2420 Phone 277 3616 Phone 278 3620 Phone 279 3626 Phone 280 3641 Phone 281 283 3645 Phone 282 3711 Phone 284 3810 Phone 289 4406D Phone 291 4412D Phone 292 4424D Phone 293 4601 Phone 294 4602IP Phone 295 4602SW Phone 295 4610SW Phone 296 4620IP Phone 297 4620SW Phone 297 4621SW Phone 298 4625SW Phone 299 5202D Phone 300 5220D Phone 302 5410 Phone 301 5601 Phone 303 5602IP Phone 304 5602SW Phone 304 5610SW Phone 305 5620 Phone 306 5621 Phone 307 T3 Classic 334 T3 Comfort 335 T3 Compact 336 Firewall Ex
156. Expansion Modules 1 7 Power Supplies and Cables 1 7 1 Power SUpplieS 1 7 2 Power Supply Cords ccccccccseccssssseeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 3 Power Supply BaCkup cccccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 4 Cabling and Cables in 75 ro ndi Nee 1 7 6 Lightning Protection Out of Building CONNEclioiS erica 1 8 Wall and Rack MOUNtiNg 1 9 Feature Keys and Licenses i i 70IP Office PRONeSE arie 1 11 VoIP 1 11 1 Voice Compression ChannelS 1 12 Supported Country LocaleS nenene 1 13 IP Office Software Applications 1 14 Training Web Slesia 1 16 Emergency and Power Failure Por s 2 Installation Requirements 2 1 Environmental RequirementS 2 2 Space RequiremEnNts ii 2 2 1 IP500 and IP500v2 Control Units 2 2 2 External Expansion Modules 2 23 WV All Mounting cesis iatale 2 2 4 Rack Space Requirements 3 IP Office Administration Software 3 1 Installing the Admin Applications 3 2 Installer PC Connection 3 3 Slarting Manager olii ELA LIL 3 4 Starting System StatUus 3 5 Starting Moni pela lia 3 6 Phone Based Administration
157. FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC NOTICE This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment EMC Caution for China ER ol har er ee ER AH PEAS ANY SS BY TB E hE me Mia tici IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 403 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 10 7 Regulatory Instructions for Use 10 7 1 Australia Connection Connection of 1P400 Office products must be via a Line Isolation Module with a telecommunications compliance label BRI Interface During the configuration ensure 000 emergency number is not barred by per
158. FK serial number of the System SD card fitted in the system Each license is a unique 32 character string based on the feature being licensed and the serial number of the SD card plugged into the system control unit Entering licenses manually is liable to errors caused by miskeying the correct 32 character string Entering Licenses 1 Start Manager 66 and receive the configuration from the IP Office system 2 gt Select Select System The field Dongle Serial Number shows the serial number of the Feature Key Dongle is already detected Check that this number matches the one against which the licenses have been issued Click OK gt License To add a license click ci and select License Enter the new license and click OK We recommend that add licenses by cut and pasting them from a supplied file listing each 32 character license keys That avoids potential issues with mistyping The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected If the name is I nvalid the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters Click on the ial Save icon to send the configuration back to the IP Office Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the license It should now be Valid IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 107 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 6 Disable Unused Trunks Each IP Office trunk card pr
159. Fixed Function Keys Z A SPEAKER o 3 HEADSET MUTE fm VOLUME UP ME CONTACTS J EZ MESSAGE X amp HOLD w E TRANSFER J WF VOLUME DOWN 4 CALL LOG x prop fad REDIAL x CCE CONFERENCE AW MENU x FORWARD Functions for fixed functions keys not present are accessible through display menu soft key functions 9650 Telephone Charcoal Grey 700383938 9650C Telepehone Charcoal Grey 700461213 9650 without faceplate 700408628 9650C without faceplate 700462526 SMB24 Button Module Charcoal Grey 700462518 SMB24 without faceplate 700462526 SMB24 Replacement Stand Silver 700416571 Replacement Stand Silver 700416563 Wedge Stand Charcoal Grey 700383888 Wall Mounting Plate Charcoal Grey 700383383 Gigabit Adapter 700383771 Bluetooth Adapter 700383789 Replacement Handset 700416548 Amplified Speech Handset 700446370 Replacement Handset Cord 9 feet 700383318 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 319 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Replacement Handset Cord 25 feet 700383821 Replacement Line Cord 700383326 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 320 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 52 Audio Conferencing Unit Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module The Audio
160. G ADD LIC RFA 205650 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 388 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Licences 9 17 3 Telephone Endpoint Licenses The use of H323 and SIP phones with IP Office Release 6 is controlled by the following licenses Different licenses are used for Avaya IP phones non Avaya phones including non Avaya softphones and Avaya softphones For details of the Phone Manager Pro PC SoftPhone refer to the Other Licenses section 397 e Avaya IP Endpoints License On IP500 and IP500v2 systems these licenses are used to license additional Avaya IP phones This includes all 1600 4600 5600 9600 IP DECT DECT RA T3 IP Spectralink and VPN phones supported by IP Office Release 6 e IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 1 229444 e IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 5 229445 e IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 20 229447 e IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 5 TRIAL 229449 e The system will automatically license 12 Avaya IP phones for each 1P500 VCM 32 or VCM 64 card installed in the system without requiring additional licenses to be added to the configuration e Additional Avaya IP phones are licensed either by the addition of Avaya IP Endpoints licenses above or the conversion of legacy IP500 VCM Channels licenses to Channel Migration licenses see below e By default licenses are consumed by each Avaya IP phone that registers with the IP Office in the order that they register The license is released
161. I 30 E1R2 RJ45 wf VCM 4 Dual PRI T1 Dual PRI ElR2 RJ45 w VCM 8 PRI 30 E1 1 4 w BRI 8 UNI w VCM 16 Dual PRI El w ANLG 4 Uni US only w VCM 24 i VCM 30 e P400 PRI trunk cards fitted to 1P500 1P500v2 systems do not require trunk licenses e IP500 Control Unit e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 2 e IP500 Trunk Card Support X Description IPO 500 Carrier Card 1P Office 500 Carrier Card 1700417215 Il Panels on the front of the carrier card can be snapped off to match the port connects when fitting an 1P500 trunk card Single PRI Dual PRI ATMA Quad BRI IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 214 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Base Cards 9 3 8 TCM8 Digital Station This card is used to add TCM R 45 385 extension ports to an IP500v2 control unit It provides 8 RJ 45 extension ports for supported M Series and T Series digital stations It can also be used for 4100 and 7400 Series phone support by connection to a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system A further 4 RJ45 ports are provided for trunk connections when an IP500 trunk card is fitted to this card e Supports Provides 8 TCM 385 ports for supported 4100 7400 M and T Series digital stations e IP500 Control Unit X e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 4 e 1P500 Trunk Card Support 1 Port Type F
162. IP Office configuration file can be placed on the System SD card That file will tnen be used when the IP Office system is started IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 74 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation SD Card Preparation 1 Using IP Office create an offline configuration that matches the customer requirements and the equipment that will be installed in the IP Office 2 Rename the configuration file config cfg 3 Using a card reader copy the file into the system primary folder on the System SD memory card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 75 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 4 3 Creating a Configuration File IP Office Manager can be used to create a new configuration without connecting to an IP Office system During the process you can specify the locale of the system what type of trunk cards it uses and what type of control unit and expansion modules to include This allows the creation of a configuration prior to installation of system The configuration file can be placed onto the System SD card 74 before it is installed into the system Otherwise the configuration can be uploaded to the system using Manager after initial installation of the system e The configuration created must match the physical equipment in the IP Office system onto which the configuration will be loaded Doing otherwise may cause the IP Office system to reset and experience othe
163. IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Display Supported Add Ons Upgradeable Firmware IP network 3 0 577 w 24 12 buttons x 2 pages nd of xd uf PoE Class Typical I dle Power Consumption 5 75W Class 2 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels EU24 EU24BL wf PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority Standard DCP Phone Keys fm VOLUME UP sl 7 VOLUME DOWN H SPEAKER 4 HEADSET v MUTE X E MESSAGES amp F HOLD A C40 TRANSFER Z prop 2244 REDIAL CCC CONFERENCE 4621SW Multi Grey Replacement Handset Dark Grey Amplified Handset Dark Grey Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey EU24 Multi Grey EU24BL Multi Grey With CATS cable With CATS cable 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina When used with an EU24 or EU24BL unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700345192 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 Page 298 15 601042 Issue 2
164. Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 13 DTE Port Maintenance The DTE port on the back of IP Office control units is not normally used when configuring an IP Office system However in extreme cases the DTE port can be used to default the system s configuration or to erase it core software if necessary h WARNI NG Due to the nature of the actions in this section they should only be performed if absolutely necessary to return a system back to working order In all cases you must make every effort to ensure that you have a backup copy of the system configuration e The DTE ports on IP Office expansion modules are not used for any maintenance or diagnostics 6 13 1 DTE Port Settings These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units and external expansion modules The DTE ports on external expansion modules are not used The RS232 DTE ports on the control units can be used for system maintenance and connection of serial terminal adaptors On IP400 control units the port can also be used for connection of the IP Office serial port licence key dongle An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required Configure this for operation via a PC serial port as follows Bits per second 38 400 Parity None Flow Control None Data bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Settings Emulation TTY DTE Cables These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance They can also be used for connection of RS232 serial t
165. J 45 to RJ 45 Red Expansion Interconnect Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457 1m 3 3 1m 3 3 Cable 379 modules RJ 45 to RJ 45 Blue May be replaced by a yellow interconnect cable 2m 6 6 700472871 supplied with the P500 4 Port Expansion 208 card when using that card LAN Cable 380 Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 700213481 3m 9 10 100m 328 devices RJ 45 to RJ 45 Grey The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP 50nf Km Telephone AWG22 AWG24 AWG26 CW1308 0 65mm 0 5mm 0 4mm 1400 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 2400 5400 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 4406D Phone 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 400m 1310 4412D Phone 1000m 3280 700m 2295 400m 1310 400m 1310 4424D 500m 1640 500m 1640 400m 1310 400m 1310 9500 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 TCM without power 305m 1000 booster with power 790m 2600 booster Analog Phones 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1640 800m 2620 ETR Phones 305m 1000 305m 1000 122m 400 122m 400 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 372 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Physical Ports 9 16 2 ANALOG Port These ports are analog tru
166. LE WORKER 5 229435 e IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 20 229436 e IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 5 TRIAL 229437 e Office Worker Profile License These licenses set the number of users who can have their profile set as Office Worker For user with this optional additional settings are enabled in the IP Office configuration for the following services one X Portal for IP Office no telecommuter features and UMS Web Services If no Office Worker Profile licenses are present existing legacy Phone Manager Pro per seat licenses can be used to enable users for the Office Worker profile e IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER RFA 1 229438 e IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER RFA 5 229439 e IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER RFA 20 229440 e IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER 5 TRIAL 229441 e Power User Profile License These licenses set the number of users who can have their profile set as Power User For user with this optional the same additional services as for Teleworker and Mobile Worker are enabled for the user in the IP Office configuration plus the following service SoftPhone e PO LIC R6 PWR USER 1 229426 e IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 5 229427 e PO LIC R6 PWR USER 20 229428 e IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 5 TRIAL 229429 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 390 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Licences Legacy User Licenses The following licenses are no longer available from Avaya but are still supported for sy
167. MB Hard Disk Free Space 50MB Server OS 2003 Server PIII 800MHz 2008 Server Celeron Celeron 3 800Mhz Client OS Athlon B 65 OMHz XP Professional Vista Windows 7 Operating System Support a Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office Ports TAPI2 TAPI tspi2w tsp UDP 50797 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 362 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications 9 14 11 Voicemail Pro This application requires various licenses entered into the IP Office configuration to control the features it offers and the number of simultaneous connections 1P500 40 IP Office 5 0 or 30 pre IP Office 5 0 1P500v2 40 The operation of Voicemail Pro can be customized to provide special services The Voicemail Pro software can be installed as separate Voicemail Pro client and server parts This allows the remote administration of the Voicemail Pro server from a PC with just the Voicemail Pro client installed A copy of the client is automatically installed locally with the Voicemail Pro server DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 or IP Office Application Server Release 7 0 DVD Set 2 700501420 Languages Chinese Mandarin and Cantonese Danish German Greek English UK English US Spanish Latin Spanish Finnish French French Canadian Hungarian Italian Korean Dutch Norwegian Polish Portuguese Brazilian Swedish License
168. Most SNMP manager applications can also do simple IP address polling to locate non SNMP enabled devices However this method of polling does not identify the device type or other information e SNMP polling including details about the responding device For example an IP Office control unit s response includes the control unit type level of software routing table information up time etc e Traps When certain events occur a devices SNMP agent can send details of the event to the SNMP manager This is called an SNMP trap These appear in the event log of the SNMP manager Most SNMP managers can be configured to give additional alerts in response to particular traps e Management Some SNMP agents support device management and configuration changes through the SNMP manager interface This is not supported by IP Office IP Office SNMP operation has been tested against Castle Rock SNMPc EE 5 1 6c and HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 41 What Information is Available Via SNMP As described above SNMP information can either be polled by the SNMP application or received as the result of the IP Office sending SNMP trap information While the mib files should not be edited they can be read using a text editor and contain descriptions of all the various information objects that can be polled or sent and the information tha each object will include For a list of the mib files see Installing the IP Office MIB Files 140 The NOTI FI CATI ON TY
169. NLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE AVAYA Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 License types Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other
170. Numbering Extension Numbering e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems can use 2 digit or 3 digit numbering In 2 digit systems the user extensions are fixed as 10 to 57 In 3 digit systems the user extension are numbered 100 upwards by default but can be renumbered in the range 100 to 579 e P Office Standard Version mode systems can use a mix of extension numbers up to 9 digits in length By default extensions are given 3 digit extension numbers starting from 201 upwards e In IP Office Standard Version mode extension numbers are also used for hunt groups In other modes hunt groups have fixed numbers that cannot be used for extensions Number of Extensions e IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes supports 48 extensions in 2 digit numbering mode 100 extensions are supported in 3 digit numbering mode e P Office Standard Version mode supports up to 384 extensions Changing Extension Numbers IP Office Manager can be used to renumber all extensions on the system This will also update any references to the extension number in other configuration fields 1 Start Manager 66 and receive the configuration from the IP Office system 2 Select Tools Extension Renumber GE Renumber Bio Rebase extension nu
171. OLUME DOWN Z prop HJ RepiaL GEC CONFERENCE 5610SW Multi Grey 700345333 5610SW ROHS compliant Multi Grey 700381965 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 EU24 Multi Grey 700381817 EU24BL Multi Grey 700381544 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 305 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 41 5620 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4620SW It is no longer available from Avaya having been replaced by the 5621 This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints 389 license Connects via Headset Socket Display IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Handsfree Speaker Microphone q Message Waiting Lamp PoE Class Typical Idle Power Consumption Supported Add Ons Upgradeable Firmwar
172. OS Linux operating system the IP Office applications and a set of web pages for server management Note that except in the case of an IP Office Application Server upgrade the installation overwriites any existing oeprating system and data on the server PC e one X Portal for IP Office 357 User and configuration access is via web browser in the same way as for a Windows sever installation of one X Portal for IP Office e Voicemail Pro 36 Configuration access is done using a Windows installation of the Voicemail Pro client software An installation package for the Voicemail Pro client is included on the IP Office Application Server server For Voicemail Pro server running on the IP Office Application Server the following Voicemail Pro features are not supported e VB Scripting e UMS Web Voicemail However access via IMAP and one X Portal are available as alternatives e TTS Text to Speech l e 3rd Party Database Integration e MAPI Email e VPNM e UMS Exchange Integration When logged into the voicemail server using the Voicemail Pro client those features not supported are grayed out or hidden If those features are present in an imported call flow they will not function and calls attempting to use those features will be disconnected The Voicemail Pro client s backup and restore functions can be used to move voicemail data between a Linux based server and a Windows based server and vice versa For Small Community Network
173. OS O AGO 2 reo aa 295 GTA AD DIICATIONS misc ccdcvacoa iii 351 OTS S 1 AOI aaa 296 9 14 1 IP Office Application Server 351 O 02 4020 Gicriliaaiag 297 9 14 2 Contacisiore siii 353 ST 994021 298 9 14 3 Customer Call Reporter CCR 354 LIOA AGZ Sa a a et die 299 9144 Manageriali 355 Erli ELL 300 Sdi S MOMI O esan sla 356 OATS 6 riale 301 9 14 6 one X Portal for IP Office 357 ITLS ao 2d 0 ee ee ee ee ne een 302 9 14 7 Phone Manager 358 91138 560 Faasen ee er 303 9 148 SOtGCONSOlE anara iii 360 Os 18 9 DOO eA E E AE EE AEE E E 304 9 14 9 System Status Application SSA 361 9 1140 561 0 rina 305 9 14 1T0 TAPI aaa 362 SA11L41 56020 ola 306 9 14 11 Voicemail PrO 363 Oi Tce DO cei 307 9 14 12 Single Server Suppott 365 LIPAISI hee ie vest sli ba are ee 308 914 13 IF OCG Posa dr il ee ol 366 9 11 44 9508 ira ia 309 9 15 Operating System SUMMAFYy 369 91145 9008r eo Lee ali a 3109 16 Physical PONS arinn cea 370 9 11 46 9620L 9620C auar A Abies 311 SiblCablesanisi a YE beeen 371 9411 479621 lalla elia 313 9 16 2 ANALOG POlt i iii a 373 9114896030 Grae nai 314 916 3S AUDIO PO N A tetas 373 9 11 49 9640 9640 G renina n 316 916 4 BRI PONM 50 374 915096411 318 9 16 5 BRI POM CUO Lalla anta 375 9 11 51 9650 9650C i cecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 319 9
174. Office Standard Version mode They are not supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes e one X Portal for IP Office 357 This application is installed on a server PC connected to the IP Office Users can access the one X portal from their own PC using a web browser The application allows the user to control their phones access voicemail messages call logs and phone directories e Phone Manager 358 Phone Manager allows a user to control and monitor their phone through their PC For Avaya phones that support handsfree operation Phone Manager can be used to make and answer calls During use Phone Manager records details of calls made answered and missed It can also be configured to show the status of other users on the system Phone Manager also allows the user to access and change many of the setting stored in the IP Office configuration that relate to their own phone operation for example their forwarding destination numbers Phone Manager software can operate in several modes e Phone Manager Lite 35 The default mode of Phone Manager Requires no license this application can be installed for any IP Office user e Phone Manager Pro 358 Users configured for Phone Manager Pro are able to access a range of additional features Phone Manager Pro requires entry of licenses into the IP Office system The licenses also control the n
175. Office control units and external expansion modules can be rack mounted into standard 19 rack systems Each unit requires a 2U slot space within the rack Rack mounting requires an 1P400 or 1P500 rack mounting kit for each control unit and external expansion module Where IP Office systems are being rack mounted the effect of conditions within the rack cabinet must be considered For example the rack temperature may be above the room temperature and airflow within the rack will be restricted The environmental requirements 54 for the individual IP Office units are still applicable inside the rack cabinet IP500 Rack Mounting Kit Po x10 e IP500 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700429202 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single IP500v2 control unit IP500 control unit or I P500 external expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module bolts for securing the module in the rack and cable tidy brackets e 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700210800 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single control unit or expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module and bolts for securing the module in the rack Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit e Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700293905 Barrier boxes must be used for out of building analog phone extensions 39 This bracket allows up to 8 IP Office barrier boxes to be ra
176. P Office Softphone 520 p RIP UDP To and from the IP Office to other RIP devices For RIP1 and RIP2 RIP1 520 2 RIP UDP compatible the destination address is a subnet broadcast eg 192 168 42 255 For RIP2 Multicast the destination address is 224 0 0 9 1701 L2TP UDP Layer 2 tunneling protocol 1718 i H 323 UDP H 323 Discovery 1719 H 323 RAS UDP H 323 Status VolP device registering with the IP Office 1720 H 323 H 245 UDP H 323 Signalling Data to a registered VolP device 2127 UDP UDP PC Wallboard to CCC Wallboard Server 3478 SIP UDP Port used for STUN requests from the IP Office to the SIP provider 5005 RTCPMon UDP RTCP Monitoring information from Avaya H323 phones 5060 sip UDP SIP Line Signalling TCP 8080 HTTP TCP Browser access to the Delta Server application 8089 F Enconf UDP From the IP Office to the Conferencing Center Server Service User access to the Conferencing Center is direct via HTTP sessions 8888 HTTP TCP Browser access to the IP Office ContactStore VRL application IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 366 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications CO I 49152 i RTP RTCP to 53247 50791 50793 50794 50795 50796 50797 50798 50799 50800 50801 50802 50804 50805 50808 50812 50813 hA ATY hi da dal A da dl YTY FT F IPO Voicemail IPO Solo Voicemail
177. P Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot 7 4 4 1 Restoring a Configuration from an Optional Card The following processes copy the configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt The processes take a few seconds e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot Copying a Configuration from the Optional SD Card File Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Upgrade Configuration e The configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt in the primary folder on the Optional SD card are copied to the primary folder on the System SD card This process takes approximately a few seconds e When the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted Copying a Configuration File from the Optional SD Card Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User Syst
178. P Office will merge the licenses in that file with its configuration The files should be a plain text file UTF8 containing either e A license name and license key separated by a Teleworker uAuToY 9VvVV evozIgeegwLXL2sAs1Z5 comma on each line Mobile Worker NvWO iVY5KJpZMNeY89IBlsI1 0 QUCDm Power User 9IU0W3yuPsbx GS2XcMal6 J9H8cSeZ9 System Advanced JAWZaw YtK37vcnXkqM4mDYDIdSMd9_ 1 e A license key on each line uAuToY 9VvVV evozIgeegwLXL2sAs1Z5 NvWO iVYSKJpZMNeY89IB1sIj0 QUCDm 9ITJQW3 yuPsbxjGS2XcMalo J9H8cSeZ9 JAWZaw YtK37vcnXkqM4mDYDIdSMd9_ 1 1 Using a card reader copy the file into the system primary folder on the System SD memory card 4 4 5 Adding a 9600 Series Screen Saver File When idle 9600 Series phones can timeout to displaying a screen saver image A file 96xxiposs jpg is present on the cards by default You can replace this file with your own branded file The file should be smaller than the screen size on 9600 Series phones in order to then be moved around the screen Maximum Size Maximum Size 350 x 153 9620C 232 x 69 9640 232 x 140 9650C 232 x 140 e Color Displays Color depth is 16 bit A separate color image will look best e Non Color Displays Best results are achieved with a single grayscale logo image 2 levels of grayscale are also Supported e To invoke transparent backgrounds with logos use a background color of 0 255 0 brightest possible green 4 4 6 Adding Music on Hold Files
179. PE objects are those used for SNMP traps 142 the other types of objects are those that can be polled 142 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 139 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 10 1 Installing the IP Office MIB Files To allow full communication between an SNMP agent and an SNMP manager the SNMP manager must load MIB files Management Information Base specific to the SNMP agent device and the features it supports These MIB files contain details of the information the agent can provide and the traps that it can send Full details of the structure of the IP Office MIB files MIB groups within those files and event traps can be found in the IP Office Installation Manual The MIB files for IP Office operation are included on the IP Office DVD in the folder AdminCD smnp_ mibs The actual files required and the method of loading depend on the SNMP manager application being used The details below cover the two SNMP manager applications tested HP Open View Network Node Manager 1 Copy the following MIB files to the applications MIBs folder a rfc2737 entity mib mib snmp_mibs standard folder on OpenView Install CD b avayagen mib mib AdminCD snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin DVD c ipo prod mib mib AdminCD snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin DVD d ipo mib mib AdminCD snmp_mibs lPOffice folder on IP Office Admin DVD e inet address mib mib AdminCD snmp_mibs Standard folder on IP Office
180. Plate Kit 1P500 Blanking Plate Kit 700429194 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 203 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Power supply socket e Card Slate _ 1 2 3 4 SA IP Office 500 De Gilt R5232 LiF TII O EP aupio e eT oe a RESETS OO Status LEDs Reset i awe Expansion ports for Feature Key A E ion Modul ih pansion Modules card slot External slot for embedded RARE ISTE USE Port i memory input Not used External output LAN Forts witch for example LAN LAN door relays WAN LAN ee uc AUDI O 373 CPU C F C F TII EXPANSI ON 37 EXT O P 135 INPUT LAN 380 RESET 143 RS232 144 USB WAN 380 rh 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input e Alternate red green Starting up e Red on No software e Green on Okay e Flashing Red Error Shutdown e Off Card shutdown 167 e Red flashing Card initializing or shutting down e Green on Card present e Red fast flashing card full e Green flashing Card in use e Red steady Card failure wrong type e Orange steady Reset imminent Used to house the optional embedded voicemail card RJ 45 socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains tw
181. PoE Injector SPPOE 1A 700500725 BM12 Button Module Charcoal Grey 700480643 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 318 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 51 9650 9650C These phones are supported on IP500 and IP500v2 systems running IP Office Release 6 0 and higher The phones are supplied with a two position stand e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license e The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e For IP Office Release 6 1 these phones are supported running SIP software When that is the case the IP Office or IP Office Manager should not be used as the file server for the phone Avaya SIP phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints license e The Class requirement of PoE powered phones may be increased if the phone is used with additional equipment such as a button module Connects via IP network IP network IP Office Release 6 0 6 0 Programmable Buttons ul ul Headset Socket i Ti Handsfree Speaker nell lf al nl Microphone Message Waiting Lamp ul Ti PoE Class Typical Idle Class 2 Class 2 Power Consumption Display 1 3 VGA 1 3 VGA Color Greyscale Supported Add Ons SMB24 345 x 3 SMB24 345 x 3 Upgradeable Firmware ul nf ryaqg eaas PC Pass Through Port of ff with Voice Priority
182. RIAL 229425 e Power User 5 Users IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 5 TRIAL 229429 e Teleworker 5 Users IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 5 TRIAL 229433 e Mobile Worker 5 Users IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 5 TRIAL 229437 e Office Worker Profile 5 Users IPO LIC R6 OFFICE WORKER 5 TRIAL 229441 e Customer Service Agent PO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA TRIAL 5 227053 e Customer Service Supervisor IPO LIC R6 CUSTMR SVC SPV 1 TRIAL 229443 e Avaya IP Endpoints 5 Extensions IPO LIC R6 AVAYA IP ENDPOINT 5 TRIAL 229449 e Receptionist Users IPO LIC RECEPTIONIST RFA 1 TRIAL LIC CU 189783 e VMPro Networked Messaging IPO LIC NTWKD MSGING TRIAL RFA LIC DS 189776 e VMPro TTS ScanSoft IPO LIC AVAYA TTS TRIAL RFA 1 LIC CU 189778 e VM Pro TTS Generic IPO LIC 3RD PRTY TTS TRIAL RFA LIC CU 189781 e Audix Voicemail IPO LIC ACM CENTRAL VM TRIAL LIC DS 189786 e IPSec Tunneling IPO LIC IPSec VPN RFA TRIAL LIC DS 189806 e SIP Trunk Channels IPO LIC SIP TRUNKING TRIAL RFA 5 205820 e 1P500 Voice Networking IPO LIC 1P500 VCE NTWK ADD 4 TRIAL 205823 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 396 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Licences 9 17 8 Other Licenses e Receptionist IPO LIC RECEPTIONIST RFA 171987 This license is used to enable support for the IP Office SoftConsole application This license can only be used by users set to Receptionist
183. Restart the IP Office system 5 Use Manager to delete the trunks or extensions users in the configuration that are no longer supported by the component installed IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 122 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Changing Components Adding a New Component If adding a new component to an available slot or port when restarted the IP Office will automatically create configuration entries for the new trunks or extensions users 1 Switch off the IP Office system 117 2 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting 1P500 cards 78 Adding External Expansion Modules 88 gt 3 Restart the IP Office system 4 Use Manager to configure the new trunks or extensions users Permanent Removal If permanently removing the component the configuration will need to be edited to remove redundant trunk or extension user entries 1 Switch off the IP Office system 117 2 Remove the card or external expansion module 3 Restart the IP Office system 4 Use Manager to delete the trunks or extensions users in the configuration that relate to the component removed 5 In the Control Unit section of the configuration delete the entry for the component that is no longer present in the system Replacement of a Different Type If replacing a component with one of a different type the process should be divided into two stages First re
184. S 2003 Server 2008 Server Client OS XP Professional Vista Windows 7 e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office System Monitor Monitor sysmonitor exe IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 UDP 50794 Page 356 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 6 one X Portal for IP Office System Components Applications This application is installed on a server PC connected to the IP Office Users can access the one X portal from their own PC using a web browser The application allows the user to control their phones access voicemail messages call logs and phone directories DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 2 or IP Office Application Server Release 7 0 DVD Set 2 700501420 License w See User Licenses 390 Languages Dutch English UK English US French Italian Brazilian Portuguese Russian and Latin Spanish The details below are for a Windows based server installation of one X Portal for IP Office one X Portal for IP Office can also be installed as part of a Linux based server installation using the IP Office Application Server DVD 351 PC Requirements Minimum Server PC Requirements Hard Disk Free Spa
185. SION RJ 45 socket Used for connection of ISDN terminal devices Note These ports appear a lines within the IP Office configuration However they cannot be used for connection to external BRI lines DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only R 45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Function ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground 38 if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables All IP400 So8 700185077 1EC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit All 700210800 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 259 IP Office 7 0 15
186. SK e 5x16 character alphanumeric plus status indicators e 4 hours talk time and 80 hours standby Extendable with optional battery packs to 8 hours talk time and 160 hours standby IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 281 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 16 3645 The Avaya 3645 IP Wireless Telephone is a WiFi telephone that runs using H 323 e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license The 3645 supports the following features e Lightweight innovative design e Simple to use e 802 11la 802 11b and 802 11g standard compatible e Transmission type Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS e FCC certification Part 15 247 e Management of telephones via DHCP and TFTP e Voice encoding G711 e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 40bit and 128 bit WPA PSK WPA2 PSK e 5x16 character alphanumeric plus status indicators e 4 hours talk time and 80 hours standby Extendable with optional battery packs to 8 hours talk time and 160 hours standby e Can be enabled for Push to talk walkie talkie feature for broadcast between employees IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 282 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 17 3701 System Components Phones The 3701 is an Avaya DECT handset supported on IP Office when using Avaya IP DECT base stations
187. Supported Country Locales When a new or defaulted system s configuration is first opened in Manager the value set in the Locale field should always be checked and changed if necessary The system s Locale sets factors such as the default ringing patterns and caller display settings The locale also controls the language that a voicemail server will use for prompts System Overview VoIP The locales supported in IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version and IP Office Standard Version modes are The locales supported in IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version mode are Argentina Australia Bahrain Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Colombia Denmark Egypt Finland e Bahrain e Egypt e Kuwait France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Italy Korea Kuwait Mexico Morocco e e Morocco e Oman e Pakistan IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Netherlands New Zealand Norway Oman Pakistan Peru Poland Portugal Qatar Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore e Qatar e Saudi Arabia e South Africa South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States Venezuela e Turkey e United Arab Emirates Page 47 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 13 IP Office Software Applications The IP Office applications are available on a number of DVDs These can be ordered at a nominal cost t
188. TA 16 244 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE ve o CE DC 1 P376 DTE 144 EXPANSION 379 PHONE 382 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only RJ 45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module RJ 45 socket Used for connection of analog phones Intended for two wire analog phones For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors If connected to an out of building extension 3 the connection must be made via additional IP Office Barrier Boxes 133 in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing 194 Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections 39 All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the cor
189. TI ONS When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool 2 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 3 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 4 Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 54 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Installation Requirements Environmental Requirements 2 2 Space Requirements IP Office control units and modules are designed to be installed either in a free standing stack or into a 19 rack system Rack installation requires a rack mounting kit 40 for each control unit and expansion module e Cable Clearance Clearance must be provided at the front and rear of all modules for cable access and feature key dongle connection e On IP400 systems allow a minimum clearance of 75mm 3 inches e On IP500 and IP500v2 systems allow a minimum clearance of 90mm 3 5 inches e Additional Clearance Care should be taken to ensure that the positioning of the modules does not interrupt air flow and other factors that may affect environ
190. To do this a wall mounting kit is required in addition to suitable wall fixings In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit The following wall mounting kits exist e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP Code 700500923 This kit can be used for wall mounting an 1P500 or IP500 v2 control unit and IP500 external expansion modules This kit incorporates cable routing at the front and rear of the unit For control units it allows orientation of the control unit base card slots to the left or to the right e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit SAP Code 700430150 This old design of wall mounting kit can be used for wall mounting an IP500 or 1P500v2 control units only It does not provide any cable routing and requires the control unit to be mounted with the base card slots to the right only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 82 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Wall Mounting 4 6 1 Wall Mounting Kit V2 These notes relate to the I1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP 700500923 This kit can be used to wall mountIP500v2 control units and IP500 external expansion modules The kit includes all
191. Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version and IP Office Standard Version modes e 4100 Series 4135 4136 4145 4145EX 4146 4146EX Connection to IP Office TCM ports via a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system e 7400 Series 7420 7430 7434 7439 7440 7444 7449 Connection to IP Office TCM ports via a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system e ACU Audio Conferencing Unit 32t e M Series MT7100 325 MT7100N 325 MT7208 326 MT7208N 326 M7310 327 M7310N 327 M7324 328 M7324N 328 e T Series T7000 32 T7100 329 T7208 33 T7316 33 T7316E 332 T7406 333 T7406E 335 IP Telephones IP Phones SIP and H323 connect to the IP Office system via the RJ 45 LAN or WAN These device require an Avaya IP Endpoint license and voice compression resources They are not supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode H323 e 1600 Series 1603IP SW 26 1608 271 1608 1 27t 1616 273 1616 1 275 e 3600 Series 3616 278 3620 279 3626 280 3641 28 3645 282 e 3700 Series 3701 283 3711 284 Connection via DECT base stations 3720 285 3725 286 3740 287 3749 288 Connection via DECT R4 base stations 2000 Series 4601 29 4602 295 4602SW 295 4610 296 4610SW 298 4620 297 4620SW 297 4621SW 298 4625 299 e 5600 Series 5601305 560230 56025W 304 5610
192. Version Installation IP Office 7 0 System Components Phones 700383789 700416548 700446370 700383318 700383821 700383326 Page 317 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 50 9641G e These phones are supported by IP Office Release 6 1 on 1P500 and IP500v2 systems only The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e The use of the IP Office control unit as the HTTP file server for these phones is not supported A third party HTTP file server must be used The phones support 24 programmable buttons which are displayed as touchscreen options These can be used for call appearance functions and other IP Office features In addition the phone supports a home screen on which the user can add up to 8 icons for programmable functions in addition to those icons present through installation configuration This phone can be used with up to 3 x BM12 button module Each module provides an additional 24 programmable buttons Attaching button modules may change the phones PoE class and may require a separate power supply If not being powered by PoE these telephones do not support the former 1151 and 1152 series of single phone power supply units Instead an Avaya Single Port PoE injector SPPOE 1A should be used AVAYA a g n z I e RI algo FUTE Phe EVE Pi Le CT gol ivy we ife Fi alr Calc Tao ps 1 i d T a A z Cay ali pest re Bono porti 9641G Telephone Charcoal Grey 700480627 Single Port
193. Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license Connects via IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Message Waiting Lamp Upgradable Firmware IP network 2 0 3626 Wireless Phone Additional battery pack for 3626 Desktop charger for 3626 3626 Gang changer Clip for 3626 3626 Vinyl case with keypad cover 3626 Carry case Yellow 3626 Carry case with keypad cover Black Yellow 3616 3626 Configuration Cradle IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700413024 700277395 700412919 700412927 700413131 700412984 700289309 700289317 700289325 700375934 Page 280 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 15 3641 The Avaya 3641 IP Wireless Telephone is a WiFi telephone that runs using H 323 e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license The 3641 supports the following features e Lightweight innovative design e Simple to use e 802 11la 802 11b and 802 11g standard compatible e Transmission type Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS e FCC certification Part 15 247 e Management of telephones via DHCP and TFTP e Voice encoding G711 e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 40bit and 128 bit WPA PSK WPA2 P
194. Voice Networking 50796 IPO PCPartner 50797 IPO TAPI 50798 IPO Who Is response 50799 IPO BLF 50800 IPO License Dongle 50801 EConf Protocol numbers currently decoded by IP Office Monitor are e 1 Internet Control Message ICMP e 2 Internet Group Management IGMP e 6 Transmission Control TCP e 8 Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP e 9 Interior Gateway Protocol I GP e 17 User Datagram UDP e 41 Ipve IPV6 e 46 Reservation Protocol RSVP e 47 General Routing Encapsulation GRE e 58 ICMP for IPv6 IPv6 1 CMP e 111 IPX in IP IPX In IP e 115 Layer Two Tunneling Protocol L2TP e 121 Simple Message Protocol SMP IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 368 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications 9 15 Operating System Summary This sections summarizes the support for IP Office applications by IP Office Release 7 0 Some specific features of applications may have additional requirements Those requirements will be details in the appropriate application installation manual Windows Operating System Support The following table gives a summary of the operating systems on which the IP Office applications that are part of the IP Office Release 7 0 have been tested and are supported While the applications may function of other operating systems they have not been tested by Avaya and are not supported IP Office Application Windows Clients Windows Servers XP Pr
195. White 108541202 Power Supply for 4450 108596412 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 293 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 29 4601 This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or an 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source For ROHS compliance the 4601 has been replaced by the 4601 however the two phones are functionally the same e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints 38 license pu st O 1 Connects via IP Network IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons ul 2 Headset Socket A Handsfree Speaker Microphone xX X Message Waiting Lamp f PoE Class Typical Idle Power 3 5W Class 2 Consumption Display None Supported Add Ons None Upgradeable Firmware T PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority X X Standard DCP Phone Keys x A SPEAKER x fae HEADSET v MUTE sd ila VOLUME UP sil E MESSAGES sal amp HOLD J GO TRANSFER wf WF VOLUME DOWN prop Ha REDIAL 7 CCC CONFERENCE 4601 Multi Grey 700381890 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia and New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 Replacement Handset Da
196. able wall fixings In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit The following wall mounting kits exist e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 SAP Code 700500923 This kit can be used for wall mounting an 1P500 or IP500 v2 control unit and IP500 external expansion modules This kit incorporates cable routing at the front and rear of the unit For control units it allows orientation of the control unit base card slots to the left or to the right e IP500 Wall Mounting Kit SAP Code 700430150 This old design of wall mounting kit can be used for wall mounting an IP500 or 1P500v2 control units only It does not provide any cable routing and requires the control unit to be mounted with the base card slots to the right only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 57 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Wall Mounting Kit V2 Clearance Cover Closed 90rn mn 3 5 Cover Open 160mm 5 3 200mm 19 67 2 x ammi 129 fi cee ee Wall Bracket 445 rim 5 lo ea
197. additional options are available e Backup System Files If selected before upgrading to the new software the current files in the System SD cards primary folder will be copied to its backup folder e Upload System Files If selected the full set of software files that Manager has is copied to the primary folder on the System SD card In addition to control unit and module software this will include phone software files Following the reboot the phone will upgrade using those files if necessary e Restart IP Phones If selected following the upgrade and reboot all Avaya IP phones are also restarted This will cause them to recheck whether the firmware they currently have loaded matches that on their configured file server Use this option if the IP Office system is the file server and the upgrade included new IP phone firmware 6 Select Upgrade The system password for each system will be requested Enter it and click OK The next steps depend on the upgrade options selected Do not cancel or close the upgrade wizard while these processes are running e Validated Upgrade If using the Validated option a number of actions take place as follows a The upgrade wizard checks the amount of free RAM memory available in the control unit to temporarily store the new BIN files If insufficient memory is available you will be prompted whether to continue with an off line upgrade or cancel upgrading e lf offline is selected the IP Office is
198. adeWiz displays the module type its current version of software installed in the unit and the software version of the bin file that Manager has available 6 For those units and modules where manager detects that it has a higher version available the tick box next to the unit or module is automatically selected 7 For those modules which you want to upgrade tick the check box For modules where a later version of software is available the check box may have already been automatically ticked 8 Select Upgrade 9 The system password will be requested Enter it and click OK 10 The bin files required are transferred to the system and stored in temporary memory 11 Once all the files have been transferred the upgrade wizard will prompt whether it okay to proceed with the upgrade process Select Yes to continue 12 Each module being upgraded will delete its existing core software restart and load the new software file that was transferred This process may take several minutes for each unit Do not cancel or close the upgrade wizard while this process is running 13 Following the upgrade check that the upgrade wizard now shows that the selected units and modules have upgraded It may be necessary to select Refresh to update the information in the upgrade wizard display IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 183 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 9 Receiving the Configuration Q The process here applies to systems runn
199. age 181 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 7 Check the CPU LED During normal operation the CPU LED on the rear of the IP500 control unit Should be green e Note New IP Office 500 control units are supplied with a base software level of 4 0 0 The CPU LED on these units will flash red until the unit is CFTE DP AUDI upgraded to the required level of released IP Office core software Sue F Ee Ho i Normal Power On Sequence When power to the control unit is switched on the normal sequence for the CPU LED is as follows 1 Steady Red for 3 seconds 2 Off for 10 seconds 3 Flashing alternate red green for 4 seconds 4 The LED should be steady green following successful start up Note that the IP500 cards on the front of the control unit may still be going through their own start up process e Flashing RED A flashing red CPU LED at this stage indicates an error The most likely cause is a missing Feature Key card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 182 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Check the CPU LED oftware New 1P500 control units are supplied with a basic level of software 4 0 0 That software is sufficient to allow LAN network connect to the control unit in order to then upgrade it to the level of IP Office software required E Objective Upgrade the control unit to IP Office 4 0 software Q Information Required e O System Password For a n
200. aged layer 3 Ethernet switch The WAN port is not supported on systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes The LEDs are used as follows e Green On connected Flashing Activity e Yellow On 100Mbps Off 10Mbps LAN Cables These are CAT5 UTP cables for connection of various IP devices within the IP Office system n f 1 LAMLAN Crossover Cable 3 Metera 9 64 Feet LAN Interconnect Cable 1 Meter 25 Feet LAN MDI Standard Crossover Crossover I nterconnect RJ45 1 Rx A Tx A White Orange 1 3 RJ45 2 dm Rx B Tx B Orange White 2 6 3 TX A 4 Rx A White Green 3 1 I oo 1 4 Not used Not used Blue White 4 4 oo 1 5 Not used Not used White Blue 5 5 6 Tx B Rx B Green White 6 2 7 Not used Not used White Brown 7 7 8 Not used Not used Brown White 8 8 e SAP Code e LAN Cable GREY 700213481 Standard straight LAN cable e LAN Crossover Cable Black 700213473 LAN crossover cable IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 380 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Physical Ports 9 16 14 PF Port These ports are found on the rear of the IP400 Analog Trunk expansion module They are analog extension ports that can be used in conjunction with analog loop start trunks during power failure to the IP Office system Any phones connecte
201. al gt D binary file to load It does this using the possible source below in the order shown system system skipping to the next source if the file is not present or is not valid primary primary 1 System SD card primary folder Pa backup 2 The control unit s own internal non volatile memory Once a system has _ dvi been installed it uses its non volatile memory to keep copies of the dynamic O dynamic configuration and system binary files it is using These can be used to temp temp restore operation during a system reboot Note that though a system can boot from non volatile memory a System SD card must still be present for correct system operation 3 System SD card backup folder 4 Optional SD card primary folder 5 Optional SD card backup folder 6 If no file is found the control unit will fallback to making BOOTP requests to the network IP Office Manager can respond the BOOTP request See Erasing the Operational Firmware 148 Once a valid ip500v2 bin file is found the IP Office control unit will load that firmware The source from which the control unit binary file was loaded is then used to load further files Configuration File Loading Having installed the necessary system firmware files as above the 1P500v2 control unit requires a configuration file e If the IP500v2 booted using binary files from an SD card location it looks for a valid configuration file in the same location e If a confi
202. al Station Module V2 250 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 DS 376 ports for supported Avaya digital phones 43 Supersedes the previous Digital Station module e 1P400 Phone Module 256 Provides depending on variant an additional 8 16 or 30 POT 382 ports for analog phones This module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2 e 1P400 Phone Module V2 254 Provides depending on variant an additional 8 16 or 30 PHONE 382 ports for analog phones Supersedes the previous Phone module With IP Office 3 1 the Phone V2 supports a wider range of message waiting indication MWI options than Phone V1 modules e With V2 units the labeling of analog phone ports was changed from POT to PHONE IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 246 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules e 1P400 So8 Module 258 Provides 8 ETS BRI So 874 ports for the connection of ISDN devices This unit is not intended to support BRI trunks IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 247 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 1 Analog Trunk 16 The IP400 Analog Trunk module also known as the ATM16 is used to add 16 additional analog trunks to an IP Office system The module supports both loop start and with suitable grounding ground start trunks e IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connect
203. alog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth 38 gt e dB WARNI NG Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 and to surge protection equipment 39 1P400 Analog 4 North and South 700185192 Loop Start America 1P400 Analog 4 EU Europe 700241672 Loop Start 1P400 Analog 4 NZ New Zealand 700241706 Loop Start e These cards include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of 1P400 control units 9 7 3 BRI Trunk Cards The BRI trunk card is also referred to as the Quad BRI It provides 4 RJ 45 sockets for ETSI BRI trunk connections with each trunk supporting 2B D channels I P400 BRI 700185168 IP400 BRI 8 UNI All except China 700262017 ri wf e The trunk card ports include 100 ohm termination e These cards include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of 1P400 control units e For the IP500 and IP500v2 control units an 1P500 Carrier Card is required up to a maximum of 2 1P500 Carrier Cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 241 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 7 4 T1 PRI Trunk Cards These trunk cards support 23B D primary rate US PRI trunks and 24B T1 robbed bit trunks The mode of operation is selected w
204. am in addition to the SMDR interface provided in IP Office SMDR see below The real time event stream takes the form of a call record which is issued whenever the state of any endpoint of a call changes typically there are two endpoints on a call but for some circumstances such as conference calls intruded calls there may be more IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 50 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview IP Office Software Applications 1 14 Training Avaya University provides a wide range of training courses for IP Office and its associated applications This includes courses necessary for IP Office resellers to become Avaya Authorized Channel Partners and for individuals to achieve IP Office certification Details of courses can be found on the Avaya University web site http www avaya learning com The site can be used to check course availability and to book course It also includes on line courses and on line course assessments The site requires users to setup a user name and password in order to track their personal training record 1 15 Web Sites Information to support the IP Office can be found on a number of web sites e Avaya http www avaya com The official web site for Avaya The front page also provides access to individual Avaya web sites for different countries e Avaya Enterprise Portal http partner avaya com This is the official web site for all Avaya Business Partne
205. an upgrade license if upgraded to a software release higher than any that it has run in the initial 90 day period fh Warning Systems upgraded without the appropriate license will display No license available and will not allow any telephony functions e Software Upgrade Existing IP Office systems being upgraded to IP Office Release 6 0 or higher require an upgrade license This applies to all IP Office system modes for example IP Office standard mode IP Office Standard Version IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes There are two types of upgrade licenses as follows e Small System Upgrade Licenses IPO LIC UPG R7 0 SML 262645 This license can be used to upgrade systems with up to 32 users and no external expansion modules e Large System Upgrade Licenses IPO LIC UPG R7 0 262644 This license can be used to upgrade system with more than 32 users or with external expansion modules IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 387 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 17 2 Trunk Licensing The following trunks licenses can be used by a IP Office Standard Version mode system e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional channels These licenses are used to enable additional B channels above the basic 8 on an IP500 PRI U card The IP500 PRI U card supports E1 T1 and E1 R2 PRI modes The IP Office system supp
206. analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 20 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Control Unit Cards IP500 ETR6 Base Card 213 This card is only supported in an 1P500v2 control unit running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode It is not supported in IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Standard Version modes It provides 6 ETR ports for connection of ETR phones 2 Analog extension ports are also provided for emergency use only with an analog trunk card e The card can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter card which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per IP500v2 control unit Not supported by IP500 control units e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone ports 7 and 8 are connected to analog trunk port 12 However during normal operation analog phone ports 7 and 8 are not useable IP Office Standard Versio
207. analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions Optional Depends on the type of trunk daughter card fitted The ETR6 can be fitted with either a Analog Trunk Ports Trunk 220 card or PRI Trunk 222 card LEDs LED use depends daughter card type fitted e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog e Green on Card fitted Card e Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor IPO I P500v2 EXTN CARD ETR6 IPO IP500v2 EXTN CARD ETR6 700476039 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 213 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 3 7 Legacy Card Carrier The 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier base card can be used to fit IP Office 1P400 cards into the 1P500 or 1P500v2 control unit This can include I1P400 trunk and 1P400 VCM cards Up to 2 Legacy Card Carrier cards are supported in a control unit e Supports The following P400 cards are supported Cards not listed are not Supported w PRI T1 w PR
208. and 5602SW phones are similar in physical appearance and functions However the 5602SW includes a PC data pass through port which gives priority to phone traffic The 5602IP is no longer available from Avaya The 5602SW is the ROHS compliant version that has replaced the previous 5602SW model but is otherwise the same This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints 38 license 56021P 5602SW Feature a Connects via I P Office Release Programmable Buttons Headset Socket Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp PoE Class Typical Idle Power Consumption Display Supported Add Ons Upgradable Firmware PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority IP network 3 0 2 Clt x JX ri 4 1W Class 2 24 characters x 2 lines None nl AI of sf Standard DCP Phone Keys amp MUTE A CPC TRANSFER CCC CONFERENCE x b HEADSET Z HOLD x o SPEAKER A MESSAGES Ut prop SLJ REDIAL fm VOLUME UP VOLUME DOWN 56021P Multi Grey 5602SW Multi Grey 5602SW RoHS compliant Multi Grey Replacement Handset Dark Grey Amplified Handset Dark Grey Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey Push to Talk Handset
209. any individual conference Silence suppression is applied to conferences with more than 10 parties 4 Any combination of 1P500 trunk daughter cards and up to 2 1P400 trunk cards Up to 148 channels using up to 1P500 VCM 1P400 VCM and IP500 Combination cards Maximum 40 usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV connection sessions subject to available licenses maximum 30 pre IP Office 5 0 For Embedded Voicemail up to 6 2 by default additional channels require licenses Supported in all IP Office locales e IP Office core software level 4 0 minimum e Bin file ip500 bin Internal power supply unit Free standing rack mounted requires 1P500 Rack Mounting Kit or wall mounted requires 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 365mm 14 4 Height 73mm 2 9 2U Clearance 90mm minimum all sides 220m at front Maximum configuration file size 1024KB IPO 500 Base Unit IP Office 500 Base Unit 700417207 Smart Card Feature Key Smart Card Feature Key MU Law 700417470 Smart Card feature Key A Law 700417488 CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit 1P500 Rack Mounting Kit 700429202 IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 IP500 Rack Mounting Kit 700500923 IP500 Wall Mounting Kit I1P500 Wall Mounting Kit 700430150 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 202 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Control Unit 1P500 Blanking
210. ard Version Installation Page 160 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Backing Up the System SD Card 7 4 3 Backing Up to the Optional Card This process copies all files on the System SD card to the Optional SD card It includes the primary and backup folders and the embedded voicemail files including message files Any matching files and folders on the Optional SD card are overwritten The process is a simple copy Any files already copied that change while the process are not recopied Any new files added for example voicemail messages while the process is running may not be copied This process takes at least 90 minutes and may take much longer depending on the amount of data to be copied for example it will be longer if embedded voicemail is being used by the IP Office system to take messages Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Copy System Card e The contents of the System SD card will be copied to the Optional SD card This process at least 90 minutes and can take much longer Using the System Status Application 1 Start System Status 67 and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel select System 3 Select Memory Cards 4 Select System Card 5 At the bottom of the screen select Cop
211. ard slot music or hold LAN LAN External output switch input WAN LANZ Pores ee oe AUDI O 373 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input AUX 155 If pressed during a restart of the control unit the control unit skip booting 155 from the primary folder on the System SD card If pressed for more than 5 seconds when a system is running the control unit will shutdown 1117 for 10 minutes CPU Indicates the status of the control unit e Alternate red green Starting up e Redon No software e Green on Okay e Flashing Red Error Shutdown EXPANSION RJ45 socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect 379 cable supplied with the expansion module EXT O P 135 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office INPUT 34 AC power input port LAN 380 RJ45 socket The port is a full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover port With the WAN port forms a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch O tional SD Used for the Optional SD card The LED is used in the same way as for the System SD see below 15 RESET 145 This switch is used to restart the IP Office optionally erasing the configuration and or the core software in the process See Reset Button 143 RS232 144 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance System SD Used for
212. aspects of traditional PABX telephone systems and IP data and telephony systems This works at various levels e Individual phone users can control the operation of their phone through applications running on their PC e Data traffic can be routed from the LAN interface to a telephony trunk interface for example a dial up ISP connection e Voice traffic can be routed across internal and external data links This option is referred to as voice over IP VoIP The VoIP mode of operation can include external SIP trunk IP trunks between customer systems and or H 323 IP telephones for users In either case the following factors must be considered e The IP Office control unit must be fitted with voice compression channels 46 These channels are used whenever an IP device trunk or extension needs to communicate with a non IP device trunk or extension or a device that uses a different codec e A network assessment is a mandatory requirement for all systems using VoIP For support issues with VoIP Avaya may request access to the network assessment results and may refuse support if those are not available or Satisfactory A network assessment would include a determination of the following e A network audit to review existing equipment and evaluate its capabilities including its ability to meet both current and planned voice and data needs e A determination of network objectives including the dominant traffic type choice of technologies
213. ation of the relevant setting varies for each trunk type e Analog Trunks Line Settings Analogue Options Line Number Telephone Number Incoming Group ID Outgoing Group ID Outgoing channels Voice channels Prefix National Prefix AL Line Appearance ID fa e T1 and T1 PRI Trunks PRI 24 Line Channels i i Line Number Line SubType Channel Allocation 24 gt Prefix Clock Quality Network Framing CRC Checking ero Suppression Bazs Ww CSU Operation Line Signalling LPE w Haul Length 0 115 ft Incoming Routing Digits 4 O K Channel Unit Foreign Exchange IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 112 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e BRI El PRI SO and QSIG Trunks PRI Line Short Codes Channels os Prefix lo 80 HM ational Prefix Line Number Telephone Number International Prefix CRC Checking Clock Quality SIP Trunk Prefixes Initial Configuration Setting the Trunk Prefixes Line SubType ETSI TEI Number of Channels 20 Po CI 4 Outgoing Channels Voice Channels 20 4 d Lum il Data Channels Line Signalling LPE w For IP Office Release 6 the prefix fields Prefix National Prefix Country Code and International Prefix are available with the SIP Line settings These fields are used in the following order 1 If an incoming number called or calling starts with the symbol the is replaced with
214. ay 2011 Chapter 6 Additional Processes IP Office Standard Version Installation ffice 7 0 Page 115 IPO 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 Additional Processes This section covers the following additional installation processes e Switching Off an IP Office System 117 e Rebooting an IP Office System 119 e Memory Card Removal 120 e Changing Components 122 e Swapping Extension Users 124 e Upgrading the IP Office Software 125 e Out of Building Extensions 39 e Using the External Output Port 135 e So8 BRI Modules 138 e SNMP 1138 e Reset Button Usage 143 e AUX Button Usage 143 e DTE Port Maintenance 144 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 116 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes 6 1 Switching Off an IP Office System IP Office systems running IP Office Release 6 can be shut down in order to perform maintenance The shut down can be either indefinite or for a set period of time after which the IP Office will automatically reboot During the shut down process the current configuration in the control unit s RAM memory is copied to the control units non volatile memory For 1P500v2 systems that location is the System SD card For control units with memory cards the memory cards can be shutdown and restarted 167 separately from the system WARNINGS e A shutdown must always be used to switch off the system Simply removing the power cord or switching off th
215. aya use only RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module RJ45 socket Used for connection of analog phones If connected to an out of building extension 3 the connection must be made via additional IP Office Barrier Box devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground Function ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional ground 194 if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead Must be connected if any out of building extensions 39 are connected to this module All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system 1P400 Phone V1 8 Ports 700184773 16 Ports 700184781 30 Ports 700184799 1EC60320 C7 Power Cord CEE7 16 Europe 700213382 BS1363 United Kingdom 700213374 NEMA1 15 America 700213390 Korea Korea 700254519 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit AII 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 257 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 6 So8 The S08
216. be connected to a functional ground Where the unit is connected to a power outlet using a power cord with an earth lead the power outlet must be connected to a protective earth In some cases such as ground start trunks in addition to being a protective measure this is a functional requirement for the equipment to operate In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high lightning risk dB WARNI NG During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment e Additional protective equipment In addition to grounding additional protective equipment will be required in the following situations e On any Digital Station or Phones external expansion module connected to an extension located in another building Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations 39 e In the Republic of South Africa on all Analog Trunk external expansion modules ATM16 and on any control units containing an analog trunk cards ATM4 ATM4U Tools Required e O M4 Cross Head Screwdriver e O Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade Parts and Equipment Required e O 14AWG Solid copper wire for ground connection e O Cable sleeve matching local regulator requirements Typically green for a functional ground and green yellow for a protective ground The ground point on IP Office con
217. be connected without any additional programming o l Warning If the system has been upgraded from a previous release of IP Office software all phones will be restricted from making any calls until a system upgrade license 387 has been entered The dialing restriction includes not being able to make emergency calls e This section does not cover the installation of DECT H323 and SIP telephones For installation of those devices refer to the appropriate supplementary installation manuals Analog Phones Connect any analog phones to their appropriate Phone 382 ports Ensure that those connected to power failure ports 52 gt are clearly labeled as such ETR Phones Connect any ETR phones to their appropriate ETR 378 ports These phones do not need to load additional firmware TCM Port Phones Connect any TCM phones to their appropriate TCM 385 ports These phones do not need to load additional firmware For some types of phone the phone can only report its general type to the IP Office but not the specific model It is recommended that after connecting all the phones the phone types should be correctly set in the IP Office configuration e Important The default types cannot be changed after installation without defaulting the configuration Therefore you must ensure that you connect the correct type of phone to each port If you need to swap phones uses the process for exchanging extension numbers 124 rather than swapping wiring 1
218. be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional P500 Rack Mounting Kit It can be wall mounted using the 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 2 8Kg 6 3Ibs Boxed 4 1Kg 9 2lbs IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 227 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IPO 500 So8 Module Connections IF Office 500 BRI Soc EXPANSION TTT BRI 374 RJ45 socket Used for connection of ISDN terminal devices Note These ports appear a lines within the IP Office configuration However they cannot be used for connection to external BRI lines DC 1 P376 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DTE 144 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the 379 Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module rh Function ground point Used for connection of a protective or functional 38 ground if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead All expansion modules are supplied with a base sof
219. cal flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit e The brackets must be used as shown with the deeper tray like bracket used at the bottom of the wall mounted control unit TOP as 04 imm Ni 500mm 19 7 t 645mm I i BOTTOM BOTTOM Fix to solid vertical surface using wall fixings suitable for the wall type AN Orientation must be as shown A minimum clearance of 500mm 19 7 is required on all sides IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 85 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 7 Rack Mounting The IP500 control unit and IP500 external expansion units can be rack mounted if required into 19 inch rack systems This requires an IP500 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700429202 for each unit The kit includes e A rack mounting bracket and screws for attachment of the bracket to the unit e Nuts and bolts for rack attachment e Brackets and cable ties for cable tidying As indicated in the diagram following the rack mounting bracket can be used in several positions on the unit P400 external expansion units used in an 1P500 system can also be rack mounted but use a separate 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit Environmental Requirements In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional factors must b
220. cales there may be Argentina Australia Bahrain Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Colombia Denmark Egypt Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Italy Korea Kuwait Mexico Morocco the configuration from the IP Office system Netherlands New Zealand Norway Oman Pakistan Peru Poland Portugal Qatar Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore to select the required locale The default language for the locale is shown in brackets more than one entry with different default languages for each South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States Venezuela 5 Click on the tal save icon and save the updated configuration back to the IP Office system IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 101 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 2 Changing the IP Address Settings When a new or defaulted IP Office is switched on the control unit will make a DHCP requests for IP address settings on each of its LAN interfaces LAN1 and LANZ2 e If the IP Office receives a response from a DHCP server it will configure itself as a DHCP client using the address details provided by the DHCP server e If the IP Office does not receive a response from a DHCP server it will configure itself as a DHCP server and use the following default address details Network Settings LAN1 LAN2 WAN IP address 192 168 42 1 192 168
221. ce 10GB Processor Intel Pentium D945 Dual Core Celeron Not tested AMD Athlon 64 4000 User PC Requirements Web Browser Google Chrome Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Mozilla Firefox 3 0 Safari 3 2 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Operating System Support Server OS 2003 Server 2008 Server Client OS XP Professional N A Vista N A Windows 7 N A e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Vindows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Page 357 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 7 Phone Manager Phone Manager is an application that allows the user to control and monitor their own phone through their PC For Avaya phones that support handsfree operation Phone Manager can be used to make and answer calls During usage the Phone Manager records details of calls made answered and missed It can also be configured to show the status of other users on the system Phone Manager also allows the user to access and change many of the setting stored in the IP Office configuration that relate to their own phone operation for example their forwarding destination numbers Though installed as a single set of software that same software can operate in several modes e Phone Manager Lite The default mode of Phone Manager Requires no license this application can be installed for any IP Office user e Phon
222. ced Format IP Office SD Card 3 Select IP Office A Law IP Office U Law or IP Office Partner Version This selection just sets the card label shown when viewing the card details It does not affect the actual formatting Select the label that matches the files set you will be placing on the card 4 Browse to the card location and click OK 5 The status bar at the bottom of Manager will display the progress of the formatting process 6 When the formatting is complete you can use the Recreate IP Office SD Card command to load the IP Office folders and files onto the card from the Manager PC Recreating an IP Office SD Card This command can be used with a read writeable SD card on the Manager PC It copies the files and folders used by an IP500v2 system when starting It updates the card with the version of those files installed with the IP Office Manager application It includes the binary files for the 1P500v2 system external expansion modules and phones It also includes the prompt files for embedded voicemail operation This process just replaces existing files and adds new files It does not delete files so for example any existing embedded voicemail messages and greetings are retained If the card contains dynamic system files such as SMDR records they are temporarily backed up by Manager and then restored after the card is recreated For the card to be used in an 1P500v2 system s System SD slot the card must be Avaya SD Feature Key car
223. cense and click OK 4 The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected If its Status is Unknown and name Invalid the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters 5 Repeat the process for any other licences 6 Click on al to send the configuration back to the IP Office 7 Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the licenses They should now be Valid IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 185 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 11 Adding External Expansion Modules External expansion modules connect to the IP Office control unit using an expansion interconnect cable E Objective Connect the external expansion modules and then restart the control unit so that the new modules are recognized l Each module is supplied with an expansion connect cable and a power supply unit 335 An appropriate locale specific power cord 34 gt for the power supply unit and cables 36 for the ports on the front of the module must be ordered separately e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnect cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are
224. ceptiong 366 G General Information Training Courses 51 Web Sites 51 Grounding Control Units 38 H H323 Phones 43 262 Region Availability 43 262 Hazard Symbols 400 Hazardous Substances 9 Homologation Statement 400 HP OpenView 139 I IP Office Operation in Australia 404 Canada 404 China 405 European Union 406 New Zealand 406 USA 407 IP400 Trunk cards 24 239 Voice Compression Modules card 25 IP500 Analog Phone Base Card 19 205 Analog Trunk Daughter Card 22 BRI Trunk Daughter Card 22 Control Unit 202 Digital Station Base Card 19 205 Legacy Card Carrier Base Card 19 205 PRI U Trunk Daughter Card 22 Page 412 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Reset Button 143 system 17 Trunk Daughter Card 22 VCM Base Card 19 205 IP500 Installation Admin Applications 63 Card 78 175 Check Card LED 93 Check CPU LED 182 Connect Manager 65 Documentation 72 173 Expansion Modules 186 Feature Key 179 Grounding 90 194 Licences 185 Power 180 Rack Mounting 86 188 Receive Config 184 Start Manager 66 Tools 71 172 Unpacking 73 174 Upgrade Software 183 Wall Mounting 190 L LAN Port 370 LAN Port 380 Licences ContactStore 353 Manager 355 Monitor 356 Phone Manager 358 SoftConsole 360 Syatem Status Application 361 TAPI 362 VoiceMail Pro 363 Licenses PC Base 42 PC Less 42 Lightening Portection 400 Lightening Protection 39 131 Lithium Batteries 400 Maintenance Applications 48 Manager Application 48 Clock Qualit
225. check the Manager application directory for previously downloaded configurations a Use Manager to download an up to date copy of the configuration If that is not possible check in the Manager application folder for a previous copy of the configuration b Using IP Office Manager select File Open Configuration c Using the Select I P Office Menu locate and select the IP Office system Click OK d Enter the name and password for a service user account on that IP Office Click OK Manager will receive and display the configuration from the IP Office e If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system e This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office prior to any following process e Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC 2 Select File Advanced Upgrade The UpgradeWiz is started and scans for IP Office modules using the Unit Broadcast address Adjust this address and click Refresh if the expected control units are not shown Avaya IP Office R7 Upgrade Wiz C Program Files Avaya IP Office Manager e 3 ol x IP Address Type Version Mode Licensed Required Licence Available Status Progress D0EDO07O05ZIAI 006007052143 192 168 0 215 IP 500 WE 7 011016 IP Office 4 4 7011016 avpotsi bin 9 0 11016 IP Office 4 4 3 011016 dvppots bin S 0 11016 IP Office 4 4 0 11016 e nas0
226. ck mounted and simplifies the number of connections to the protective ground point in the rack This kit must be used when more than 3 barrier boxes are in use and supports a maximum of 16 barrier boxes for a single external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 41 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 9 Feature Keys and Licenses A feature key is required for licensed features e IP500v2 Avaya SD Card 236 Inserts into the System slot on the rear of an 1P500v2 control unit This card is required even if not using any IP Office licenses 44 1P500 Smart Card 236 S Inserts into a dedicated slot on the rear of the IP500 control unit This card is required even if not using any IP Office licenses Various IP Office features and applications require entry of license keys into the system s configuration The license keys are unique 32 character codes based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the feature key dongle 236 installed with the IP Office system The serial number is printed on the feature key dongle and prefixed with SN 1P500 or FK IP500v2 It can also be viewed in the system configuration using IP Office Manager e For IP500 and IP500v2 systems the feature key dongle takes the form of a card smart media or SD card respectively inserted into the control unit The card is a mandatory item for these systems even if they use no licensed features J When a licens
227. components necessary for wall mounting onto a plywood surface The use of the cable covers is optional In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit e The installation must be done by a service person only e For control units the mesh flame screen must be installed in the bottom edge of the control unit before mounting e Ensure that the system has been shutdown and power has been removed from all the units Shutdown the system using a shutdown command and then remove power Do not simply remove the power e If mounting a control unit you must wait at least 15 minutes after removing the power cord before fitting the flame screen e A Suitable mounting surface of at least 19mm 0 75 inch plywood is required na Clearance S500mm 19 6 Cover Open 160mm b 3 2 x Srim U 120 Poet Foe Pe a ee es a a all Bracket 445mm a ps ee ce Lore ge ees Control elil Jbomm 14 4 vanicabolcanminn External Expansion Module 245mm SO0mm 19 E IP Office Standard Version In
228. confirms communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office prior to any following process e Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit a Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings 144 Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen b Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK c Enter AT DEBUG The control unit should response with the time and date and then Hello gt to show it is ready to accept commands 3 To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter eraseconfig The Hello gt command prompt reappears when the action is completed 4 To erase the backup configuration stored in non volatile Flash memory enter erasenvconfig The Hello gt command prompt reappears when the action is completed 5 To reboot the IP Office enter reboot The IP Office will reboot and restart with a defaulted configuration 6 Close the terminal program session 7 Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 145 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Erasing the Configuration and Security Settings via the Boot Loader This proce
229. cted by a metal cover 2 Undo the screws on the cover until it can be rotated clear of the feature key card slot 3 Insert the feature key The card should be face up and inserted in the direction of the arrow on the card 4 Rotate the slot cover back into position and tighten the screws IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 179 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 6 Applying Power This procedure starts a new IP Office control unit not connected to any LAN In this scenario the IP Office control unit will assume its default configuration settings E Objective To power up the IP Office control unit to a known state with a known set of defaults fT Warnings 1 When powering up the control unit for the first time do not connect the LAN port or WAN port of the control unit to any network 2 The power cord must be connected directly from the control unit to the switched power outlet socket The cord must not be fixed in anyway or routed through any permanent structure i Parts and Equipment Required e O Switched power outlet socket e O IP Office Control Unit e O Locale Specific Power Cord ia 2 Gi 20 Procedure 1 Connect the power cord from the power supply outlet to the power input socket on the rear of the control unit e Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls ceilings floors and similar openings Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical da
230. d The card must be correctly formatted however a reformat of an existing working card is not necessary before using recreate to update the card contents e The source for the files copied to the SD card are the sub folders of the Memory Cards folder under Manager s Working Directory normally C Program Files Avaya I P Office Manager However if the Working Directory is changed to a location without an appropriate set of Memory Cards sub folders the required set of files will not be copied onto the SD card 1 Once started do not interrupt this process for example by removing the SD card This process takes approximately 15 minutes 2 Insert the SD card into a card reader on the Manager PC 3 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Recreate IP Office SD Card 4 Select IP Office A Law IP Office U Law or IP Office Partner Version This selection will affect how the IP Office systems operates when defaulted with this card present in its System SD card slot IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 157 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 Browse to the card location and click OK 6 Manager will start creating folders on the SD card and copying the required files into those folders This process will take approximately 15 minutes 7 Do not remove the SD card during the process Wait until the Manager displays a message Avaya IP Office Manager Li 1 System SO Card successfully recreated
231. d in IP Office Standard mode Both Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phones are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone s AUX socket IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 322 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 54 ETR 18 ETR 18D This phone is supported with IP Office Release 6 0 and higher It is only supported on an ETRE card in 1P500v2 systems They are only supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems running in a North American locale They are not supported in IP Office Standard mode Both Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phones are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone s AUX socket IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 323 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 55 ETR 34D This phone is supported with IP Office Release 6 0 and higher It is only supported on an ETRE card in 1P500v2 systems They are only supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems running in a North American locale They are not supported in IP Office Standard mode Both Refresh and Eur
232. d DCP Phone Keys A SPEAKER x a HEADSET f MUTE f ad VOLUME UP x Ext MESSAGES sal amp HOLD J GO TRANSFER wf WF VOLUME DOWN x C prop HLJ REDIAL CCC CONFERENCE 4412D Black 108199050 White 108199043 Large 4400 Series Stand for 4412D 4424D Black 108541269 White 108541277 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 292 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 28 4424 This phone is supported in North America U Law only Not supported on the I1P500 Digital Station and 1P500 Combination cards Note A maximum of twenty seven 4424D telephones are supported on the 1P500 DS30 expansion modules and on 1P400 DS30 version 2 expansion module at PCS level 5 Earlier 1P400 DS30 expansion modules will only support sixteen of these telephones Connects via DS ports IP Office Release 1 0 Programmable Buttons di 24 cD Headset Socket ff Handsfree Speaker Microphone f f Message Waiting Lamp wa Display 24 characters x 2 lines Supported Add Ons 4450 339 x 2 Upgradeable Firmware M Standard DCP Phone Keys A SPEAKER x b HEADSET MUTE f dm VOLUME UP xX E MESSAGES i amp F HOLD A CH TRANSFER i F VOLUME DOWN x C DROP HLJ REDIAL CEC CONFERENCE 4424D Black 108199084 White 108199076 Large 4400 Series Stand for 4412D 4424D Black 108541269 White 108541277 4450 DSS Add On Black 108199696 White 108199407 Small 4400 Series Stand for 4450 Black 108541194
233. d TTS software with Voicemail Pro One license per simultaneous instance of TTS usage For IP Office Release 6 this license is no longer used for user email reading e UMS Web Services These licenses are used to enable UMS voicemail services support for users set to the Basic User profile Other users are enabled for UMS through their licensed user profile These licenses are also used to license hunt groups for UMS voicemail services e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 1 USER 217880 e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 5 USER 217881 e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 20 USER 217883 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 392 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Licences Legacy Voicemail Licenses The following legacy licenses are still supported by IP Office Release 6 e UMS Web Services These licenses are used to enable UMS voicemail services support for users set to the Basic User profile Other users are enabled for UMS through their licensed user profile These licenses are also used to license hunt groups for UMS voicemail services e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 1 USER 217880 e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 5 USER 217881 e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 20 USER 217883 e VMPro Database Interface 1P400 3RD PARTY IVR LIC RFA 182298 This legacy license enables 3rd party database support within Voicemail Pro call flows For IP Office Release 6 this is also enabled by the Advanced Edition license e VMPro VB Script 1P400 VB SCRIPTING LIC RF
234. d Version Installation Page 178 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation IP500 Card Installation 8 5 Inserting the Feature Key The I1P500 uses a smart card feature key dongle In addition to feature licensing the 1P500 control unit uses this feature key dongle to determine various systems defaults such as A Law or Mu Law operation default short codes and trunk settings ES Warnings Aes 1 The feature key is required for all 1P500 control units and must be present when the system is lH started and during operation This applies even if the 1P500 is not using any licensed features 2 The feature key slot cover must remain present to protect the card and the card reader from damage 3 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards 4 During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected a E Parts Required e 1P500 Feature Key The correct key will depend on the locale The listing below is typical and may not apply in all cases Ensure that the serial number of the key shown on the card is recorded e O Mu Law Used in North America and Korea e O A Law Used in all other locales Tools Required e O 5mm Flat blade screwdriver ia za 0 Procedure 1 Locate the feature key slot on the rear of the IP500 control unit The slot is adjacent to the power input socket and is prote
235. d to these ports should be clearly labeled as power fail extensions in accordance with the appropriate national and local regulatory requirements a a FJ45 1 Not used 2 Pin 2 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor 3 Not used 4 Ring 5 Tip 6 Pin 6 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor 7 Not used 8 Not used e Minimum Wire Size AWG 26 e Maximum Cable Length e AWG26 500m 1640 e AWG24 AWG22 1000m 3280 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 381 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 15 PHONE POT Port These ports are analog extension ports On older IP Office units these ports were labeled as POT ports rather than PHONE ports PHONE ports on Phone V1 V2 expansion modules can be connected to out of building extensions 39 gt If this is the case connection must be made via suitable protective devices IP Office Barrier Box at each end and via each building primary protection In addition the Phone module must be connected to a protective ground PHONE ports on IP Office control units must not be connected to out of building extensions prone Pin Descinton Frd45 e REN 2 e Off Hook Current 25mA e Ring Voltage 40V rms e Minimum Wire Size AWG 26 e Maximum Cable Length e AWG26 0 5km 1640 feet e AWG24 AWG22 1km 3280 feet _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Not used Not used Not used Ring Tip
236. dditional channels are configured as in service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards D channels are not affected by licensing IP500 BRI Trunk Daughter Card 221 ts This card allows the base card to support up to 4 BRI trunk connections each trunk providing 2B D digital channels The card is available in 2 port 4 channels and 4 port 8 channels variants e Maximum 4 per control unit e S Bus Connection The card can be switched from To trunk mode to So mode This mode requires additional terminating resistors and an ISDN crossover cable connection see BRI Port So 1374 e P Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems are limited to a maximum of 12 BRI channels using BRI Combination and or BRI trunk daughter cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 218 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 219 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 4 1 Analog Trunk Card This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for 4 loop start analog trunks This card can be fitted to any IP500 base card except the 1P500 Legacy Carrier card and 1P500 4 Port Expansion card e Ports Channels 4 Loop start analog trunk ports Connections via the host I1P500 base card e DTMF ICLID Busy tone detection e Over voltage and lightning protectio
237. dpoints 38 license e The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e For IP Office Release 6 1 these phones are supported running SIP software When that is the case the IP Office or IP Office Manager should not be used as the file server for the phone Avaya SIP phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints license e The Class requirement of PoE powered phones may be increased if the phone is used with additional equipment such as a button module Connects via IP network IP Office Release 6 0 Programmable Buttons ui Headset Socket i Handsfree Speaker Microphone Message Waiting Lamp ui PoE Class Typical Idle Power Class 2 Consumption Display 1 3 VGA Greyscale Supported Add Ons SMB24 345 x 3 Upgradeable Firmware ul PC Pass Through Port with of ff Voice Priority Fixed Function Keys Z A SPEAKER J 3 HEADSET MUTE fm VOLUME UP f MEI CONTACTS J E MESSAGE X amp HOLD w E TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN zE CALL LOG x prop HJ REDIAL x CCC CONFERENCE 4 MENU Z FORWARD Functions for fixed functions keys not present are accessible through display menu soft key functions 9630G Telephone Charcoal Grey 700405673 9630G without faceplate 700408602 SMB24 Button Module Charcoal Grey 700462518 SMB24 without faceplate 700462526 SMB24 Replacement Stand Silver 700416571 Replacement Stand Silver 700416563 Wedge Stand Charcoal Grey 700383888 Wall Mounting Plate Charcoal Grey 700383383 Gigabit
238. e IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 117 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Shutdown Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 9500 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone Unlike Manager a system phone user cannot select an indefinite shutdown They can set a timed shut down of between 5 minutes and 24 hours 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select System Shutdown 4 Select a time period for the shutdown It must be in between 5 minutes and 24 hours 5 Press Done and then Confirm to begin the shutdown System Shutdown Using the 1P500v2 AUX Button When the AUX button is pressed for more than 5 seconds the IP500v2 control unit will shutdown with the restart timer set to 10 minutes IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 118 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Switching Off an IP Office System 6 2 Rebooting an IP Office System You can use IP Office Manager to reboot an IP Office system 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Reboot 2 Use the Select IP Office menu to locate and select the IP Office system Enter a valid user name and password 3 The type o
239. e If trouble is experienced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 242 2121 or contact your local Avaya representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 407 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Equipment With Direct Inward Dialing DID Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide proper answer supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC s rules Proper Answer Supervision is when A This equipment returns answer supervision to the public switched telephone network PSTN when DID calls are e answered by the called station e answered by the attendant e routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment CPE user e Routed to a dial prompt B This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the PSTN Permissible excepti
240. e PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority IP network 3 0 w 24 12 buttons x 2 pages af of uf wf 5 9W Class 3 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels EU24 EU24BL af af wf Standard DCP Phone Keys Z A SPEAKER xX E MESSAGES HOLD Z CH DROP 2543 REDIAL b HEADSET MUTE A CHL TRANSFER CCC CONFERENCE fm VOLUME UP sl 7 VOLUME DOWN 56201P Replacement Handset Amplified Handset Noisy Location Handset Push to Talk Handset EU24 EU24BL 1151D1 Power Supply 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord Multi Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Dark Grey Multi Grey Multi Grey With CATS cable With CATS cable USA Europe Australia New Zealand India United Kingdom Argentina 700339815 700203797 700229735 700229743 700229727 700381817 700381544 700434897 700434905 405362641 407786623 407786631 407790991 407786599 408161453 When used with an EU24 or EU24BL unit a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 306 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 42 5621 This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4621SW System Components Phones This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The
241. e Click OK Manager will receive and display the configuration from the IP Office e If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system e This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office prior to any following process e Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit a Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings 144 Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen b Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal program and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time c Switch off power to the IP Office control unit d Power on the control unit and press the escape key every second until you get a Loader message Below is an example P12 Loader 2 4 CPU Revision 0x0900 e Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK f If an OK response is not received check the settings of your terminal program and repeat the process above 3 To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter AT X3 A typical response is Sector Erases Config followed by a series of OK responses 4 To erase the backup configuration stored in non volatile memory enter AT X2 A typical response if Sector 2 Erase NV Config
242. e considered when rack mounting a unit 1 Rack Positioning Ensure compliance with the rack manufacturers safety instructions For example check that the rack legs have been lowered and fixing brackets have been used to stop toppling 2 Elevated Operating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Therefore consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature Tma specified by the manufacturer e O Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F e O Operating Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing 3 Reduced Air Flow Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised Proper ventilation must be maintained The side ventilation slots on the IP500 control unit should not be covered or blocked 4 Mechanical Loading Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading 5 Circuit Overloading Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern 6
243. e power input may cause errors e This is not a polite shutdown any users calls and services in operation will be stopped Once shutdown the system cannot be used to make or receive any calls until restarted e The shutdown process takes up to a minute to complete When shutdown the CPU LED and the IP500 base card LEDs 1 and 9 if trunk daughter card fitted will flash red rapidly The memory card LEDs are extinguished Do not remove power from the system or remove any of the memory cards until the system is in the this state e To restart a system when shutdown indefinitely or to restart a system before the timed restart switch power to the system off and on again System Shutdown Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced System Shutdown 2 Using the Select IP Office menu the System Shutdown Mode menu is displayed System Shutdown Mode Indefinite AA Timed Joo 10 cancel 3 Select the type of shutdown required If Indefinite is used the system can only be restarted by having its power switched off and then on again If a Timed shutdown is selected the IP Office will reboot after the set time has elapsed System Shutdown Using the System Status Application 1 Start System Status 6 and access the IP Office s status output 2 1n the navigation panel select System 3 At the bottom of the screen select Shutdown System 4 Select the time duration for the shutdown or indefinit
244. e Essential Edition PARTNER Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems running a North American locale They are not supported in IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Standard modes The following are supported in mode e ETR Series ETR6 322 ETR6D 322 ETR18 323 ETR18D 323 ETR34D 324 ETR 34D phones limited to a maximum of 2 per card and 4 in total e PARTNER DECT 3910 290 3920 290 Digital Station DS Port These digital stations connect to the IP Office via DS 376 ports The following are supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version and IP Office Standard Version modes e 1400 Series 1403 266 1408 267 1416 268 e 9500 Series 9504308 9508 309 The following are only supported in IP Office Standard Version mode e 2400 Series 2402 275 2410 276 2420 277 e 3800 Series 3810 Wireless phone 289 Not supported on the 1P500 and 1P500v2 control unit DS ports e 4400 Series 4406D 29t 4412D 292 4424D 298 Not supported on the 1P500 and IP500v2 control unit DS ports e 5400 Series 5402 300 5410 301 5420 302 e T3 Upn Series T3 Compact 336 T3 Classic 334 T3 Comfort 335 Digital Station TCM Port These digital stations connect to the 1P500v2 IP Office system via TCM 385 ports The following are supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER
245. e Group For this example the following was used Short Code 1500 Number Feature Dial Line Group 601 the SO8 port number 2 Create an Incoming Call Routing that routes the appropriate calls to that short code For this example the following was used Line Group 95 identifies calls using the PRI lines configured above Destination 1500 the short code created above Bearer Any To allow the video device on the SO port to make outgoing calls to the PRI lines also requires a short code 1 For this example the following was used e Code 91N e Number N e Feature Dial Line Group 95 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 137 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Polycom Video Module Settings The Polycom modules used in the previous example were the Viewstation 128 Viewstation 256 and Viewstation MP The Polycom module must have software that supports Standard ETSI ISDN European ISDN and have its ISDN Switch Protocol setting set to Standard ETSI Euro ISDN The following were the settings used during testing Characteristics Admin Software and Hardware Software e Polycom View Station 512 MP e Software 7 0 1 e NTSC UIS Interface e Network Interface S T Interface e View Station PVS 1419 e ISDN Version IEUS v18 a00320 e Country USA e Country Code 1 e Language English USA e Area Code 732 e Auto Answer Yes e Number A blank e AllowDial Yes e Number B blank e Allow U
246. e Manager Pro Users configured for Professional Edition mode are able to access a range of additional features Phone manager Pro requires entry of licenses into the IP Office system The licenses also control the number of simultaneous Phone Manager Pro users The user s Phone Manager software then automatically changes from Lite mode to Professional Edition mode e Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone formerly called Phone Manager iPro This is a PC softphone mode of Phone Manager operation The user acts as a VoIP extension making calls through the speaker and microphone of their PC This mode requires further licenses in addition to the Phone Manager Pro licenses DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 Languages Brazilian Chinese Simplified Danish Dutch English French Finnish German Italian Korean Latin Spanish Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish License Licensed application See Phone Manager Licenses 397 PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements Server OS Hard Disk Free Space 2003 Server 2008 Server Windows 7 Operating System Support e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone also requires the user PC to have a speaker and microphone installed and the user associated with an IP extension on the IP Office Por
247. e connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24 EU24BL and the equipment to which it is attached Connects via EU24 port on phone Supported by 4620 4621 4625 5620 5621 Maximum per phone L Maximum per IP Office 8 Additional requirements A 1151 Type power supply unit must be used to power the phone IP Office release 3 1 Programmable Buttons uil 24 EU24BL 2XU A Backlighted Expansion Module Multi Grey 700381544 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 343 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 12 7 KLM Module The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 This type of button module can be used with the M7324 328 phones to provide additional programmable buttons For lt STANARD gt up to 2 modules can be attached to each phone For IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version only 1 module can be attached to each phone Each module requires its own power supply unit IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 01
248. e key is entered into the IP Office configuration the following information is shown e Status The status which is Unknown until the configuration file is sent back to the IP Office system e Unknown This status is shown for licenses that have just been added to the configuration shown in IP Office Manager Once the configuration has been sent back to the IP Office and then reloaded the status will change to one of those below e Valid The features licensed can be configured and used e Invalid The license was not recognized It did not match the serial number of the Feature Key e Dormant The license is valid but is conditional on some other pre requisite licenses e Obsolete The license is valid but is one no longer used by the level of software running on the IP Office system e Expired The license has gone past its expiry date e License The name of the licensed feature This may differ from the ordered RFA name e Instances Depending on the license this may be the number of ports enabled or number of simultaneous users of the licensed feature Sometime the number of instances is specified in the license name e Expires Most purchased licenses have no expiry setting For some features trial licenses may be available which will have an expiry date IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 42 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Feature Keys and Licenses 1 10 IP Office Phones IP Of
249. e primary folder at some previous point A backup copy of the primary temp contents to this folder can be invoked manually using Manager or SSA or as part of the IP Office software upgrade using Manager e Ilvmail Contains the system prompts used by embedded voicemail Note that the mailbox messages and greetings are stored in a sub folder of the dynamic folder e The sub folder AAG is used to store embedded voicemail auto attendant greetings e doc Contains initial installation documentation for IP Office and Avaya IP Office Essential Edition Partner Version e dynamic Contains files used by the IP Office and retained through a reboot of the IP Office system e The sub folder Ivmail is used to store individual user and group mailbox messages name recordings and announcements The storage capacity for embedded voicemail is limited to 15 hours regardless of the capacity of the card e temp Contains temporary files used by the IP Office and not retained through a reboot of the IP Office system The Optional SD card can contain a similar set of folders These are used as an additional backup or they can be used as the source for upgrading the contents of the System SD card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 154 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management 7 1 Booting from the SD Cards When being powered up the P500v2 control unit looks for a valid ip500v2 bin System gt D Option
250. e short codes e Through the Door tab in Phone Manager Pro e Through the Door Release option in IP Office SoftConsole e Via the Open Door action in Voicemail Pro Default Short Codes The following are the default short codes in the IP Office configuration for external output switch operation They use the short code features Relay On closed Relay Off open and Relay Pulse Closed 39 42 Open 40 43 Pulse 41 44 6 8 1 Port Connection These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units They are used for connection to external switching relays The port uses a standard 3 5mm stereo jack plug for connection The IP Office is able to open high resistance close low resistance or pulse close for 5 seconds and then open two switches within the port Either switch can be operated separately These switches are intended for activation of external relays in systems such as door opening systems e CAUTION In installations where this port is connected to a device external to the building connection must be via a towerMAX SCL 8 Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit DEL re Pete Switch 1 Switch 1 O R 3 5mm Stereo 2 Switch 2 1 4 Jack Plug 3 0 Volts Ground Chassis Switch 1 e Switching Capacity 0 7A e Maximum Voltage 55V d c e On state resistance 0 7 ohms e Short circuit current 1A e Reverse circuit current capacity 1 4A e Ens
251. e software of the control unit in the IP Office system 1P400 Phone V2 8 Ports 700359896 16 Ports 700359904 30 Ports 700359912 1EC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit All 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 255 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 5 Phone The 1P400 Phone module also known as the Phone V1 module is used to add additional POT ports to an IP Office system POT ports are used for analog phones The Phone module is available in 8 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the Phone 8 Phone 16 and Phone 30 respectively The 1P400 Phone Module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2 254 e With IP Office 3 1 and higher the message waiting indication MWI on each POT port can be configured for None On 51V Stepped 81V Line Reversal A or Line Reversal B On uses the default determined by the system locale POT ports on a Phone V2 module can additionally be configured for 101V operation Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file napots16 bin earli
252. eatures Cable lengths up to 305 m 1000 ft using 0 5mm 24AWG wires do not require a power booster Lengths up to 790 m 2600 ft are supported if an auxiliary power supply booster is used LEDs e Green On Phone detected e LED is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Optional Trunk The card can be fitted with one trunk daughter card of any type The trunk daughter card Card Ports then uses ports 9 to 12 on the base card for its trunk connections LEDs LED use depends daughter card type fitted e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Card Green on Card fitted Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor BRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use IPO 500 TCM 8 IP Office 500 TCM 8 700500758 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 215 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 3 9 VCM T
253. econds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor BRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use Optional Trunk The card can be fitted with one trunk daughter card of any type The trunk daughter card Card Ports then uses ports 9 to 12 on the base card for its trunk connections LEDs LED use depends daughter card type fitted e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Card Green on Card fitted Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 216 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Base Cards I PO 500 MC VCM 32 IP Office 500 Media Card Voice Coding Module 32 700417389 I PO 500 MC VCM 64 IP Office 500 Media Card Voice Coding Module 64 700417397 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 217 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 4 IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards ant Most IP500 base cards 1 can be fitted with an
254. ective earth connection 4 The control unit will begin loading firmware from the System SD card with which it will upgrade itself and the components installed in the control unit 5 This process takes approximately a minute The end of this process will be indicated by LED1 on each base card flashing every 5 seconds LED9 on each base card fitted with a trunk daughter card will also flash every 5 seconds 6 The control unit will then begin upgrading the external expansion modules This will be indicated by the red center LED on each module flashing red The process is completed when the LED changes to steady green 7 1f a configuration file is already present on the System SD 74 card it is loaded by the IP Office If not the IP Office creates a default configuration based on the components of the system and copies that configuration onto the System SD card 8 1t should be possible now to use IP Office Manager to access the configuration of the IP Office The LEDs on the rear of the control unit go through the following sequence during a normal start up Note that the times 10s Finished are approximately only System SD Optional SD If present On the front of the control unit LED1 on any IP500 base cards fitted is used as follows LED9 is also used for any trunk daughter cards fitted LED Finished LED1 LED9 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 92 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP50
255. ecurity settings me ea Monitor IP Office Monitor also known as System Monitor is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office system in great detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge However all IP Office installers and maintainers must understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues e Phone Based Administration For systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes many features can be administered using phone based administration from either of the first two extensions in the system This option is not used for IP Office Standard Version mode IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 62 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP Office Administration Software 3 1 Installing the Admin Applications The IP Office Administration suite consists of a number of applications for IP Office installers and maintainers e O System Monitor Install e O Manager Install f e O System Status Application Install f e O Call Status Optional This software is not supported with IP Office Release 7 0 systems It is provided only for the maintenance of older systems Requirements e DIP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928
256. ed T Red Green 8 Green Red Red Brown Ring 9 Brown Red Red Slate Slate Red 1 2 3 Black Blue 1 Blue Black Black Orange Orange Black Black Green Green Black Black Brown Brown Black Tip 400 Black Slate Slate Black Yellow Blue Blue Yellow 42 Yellow Orange Orange Yellow 43 Violet Slate 08 Slate Violet White Blue White Orange White Brown IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 2nd RJ 21 Connector n Oo ni rt Port Pin Wire Ring p Ring ip Ring p Ring p Ring ip Ring p Ring ip I I a f Not Used 26 White Blue Blue White White Orange Orange White White Green Green White 29 White Brown 43 Violet Slate Slate Violet Page 384 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Physical Ports 9 16 18 TCM Port RJ45 These ports are used for TCM extension ports in an 1P500v2 system They are found on 1P500 TCM8 Digital Station Cards 215 These are supported by IP500v2 systems running IP Office Release 7 0 and higher They are used for supported M Series and T Series digital stations They are also used for 4100 and 7400 Series phone support by connection to a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system Though the RJ 11 to RJ 11 cables supplied with some phones can be plugged directly into RJ 45 ports including those on IP Office modules this is not recommend as the connection lock is not positive and may bec
257. ed to a functional earth 38 gt e l WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 and to surge protection equipment 39 Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Locales Specific variants are provided for different IP Office locales see below Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file naatm16 bin I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 3 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional P400 Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 2 9Kg 6 6lbs Boxed 4 2Kg 9 4lbs IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 248 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules AHALOG 3 10 PFI FFS EXPANSION Forse ___838 amp x x ice ANALOG 1373 RJ45 socket Used for connection to analog tru
258. eddie ue Control Unit 365mm 4 4 External Expansion Module 245mm 7 SD mm gE fertical Clearance Wall Mounting Kit V1 TOP 804 Smm f i 500mm e 645mm I BOTTOM IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 58 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Installation Requirements Space Requirements 2 2 4 Rack Space Requirements All IP Office control units and external expansion modules can be rack mounted into standard 19 rack systems Each unit requires a 2U slot space within the rack Rack mounting requires an 1P400 or 1P500 rack mounting kit for each control unit and external expansion module Where IP Office systems are being rack mounted the effect of conditions within the rack cabinet must be considered For example the rack temperature may be above the room temperature and airflow within the rack will be restricted The environmental requirements 54 for the individual IP Office units are still applicable inside the rack cabinet IP500 Rack Mounting Kit Lo x10 e IP500 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700429202 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single IP500v2 control unit 1P500 control unit or 1P500 external expansion module This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module bolts for securing the module in the rack and cable tidy brackets e 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700210800 This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of
259. ee Phone Add Ons 337 Connects via Link port on phone Supported by T3 Compact T3 Classic T3 Comfort Maximum per phone 3 Maximum per DS module Additional requirements None IP Office release 3 1 Programmable Buttons w 36 T3 DSS Unit Black White T3 DSS Expansion Unit Black White IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700380322 700380330 700380348 700380355 Page 346 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phone Add Ons 9 12 10 T7316e KEM The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 This type of button module can be used with the T7316E 332 phones to provide 24 additional programmable buttons For IP Office Standard Version up to 9 modules can be added per phone though addition power requirements apply if more than 4 modules are used with a phone For IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version only 4 modules can be added per phone 01 13 02 14 03 15 bal Pickup i 04 16 05 17 Shipping Edward A 06 18 re Suppi Kiai 07 19 Seritity 08 20 09 21 10 22 11 23 12 24 Finance IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 347 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 12 11 XM24 The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 33
260. elating to changes that occurred after this document was completed Bulletins are available from http Support avaya com e Upgrade Path Multi Stage Upgrades Due to the need to adjust internal memory allocation and configuration storage for some upgrades the control unit may need to perform multi stage upgrade process The table below indicates the require upgrade paths Platform Current Release Upgrade Step 1 4 0 4 1 4 2 5 0 Load 7 0 All modules 4 0 4 1 4 2 5 0 Load 7 0 e Multiple Managers If more than one copy of Manager is running it is possible for the IP Office to request BIN files from a different Manager from the one that started the upgrade process Ensure that only one copy of Manager is running when upgrading an IP Office system e Other IP Office Applications Upgrading the core software of the IP Office control unit may require upgrades to associated software Typically IP Office is compatible with the previous release of most IP Office applications however for each IP Office core software release there may be exceptions These exceptions will be detailed in the Technical Bulletin for the IP Office core software release IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 125 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 6 1 Using the Upgrade Wizard 1 Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action If a copy of the configuration cannot be downloaded using Manager
261. em Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select Upgrade Config e The configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt in the primary folder on the Optional SD card are copied to the primary folder on the System SD card This process takes approximately a few seconds e Vhen the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 162 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Backing Up the System SD Card 7 4 4 2 Restoring Software from an Optional SD Card These processes copy all files in the folder except the configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt The processes take approximately 5 minutes These process do not restore embedded voicemail prompts see Upgrading Card Software 164 gt e fh IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com h Upgrade Licenses Some upgrades may require entry of upgrade licenses e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and service
262. embedded voicemail prompts 1 Once started do not interrupt this process for example by removing the SD card This process takes approximately 15 minutes 2 Insert the SD card into a card reader on the Manager PC 3 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Recreate IP Office SD Card 4 Select IP Office A Law IP Office U Law or IP Office Partner Version This selection will affect how the IP Office systems operates when defaulted with this card present in its System SD card slot 5 Browse to the card location and click OK 6 Manager will start creating folders on the SD card and copying the required files into those folders This process will take approximately 15 minutes 7 Do not remove the SD card during the process Wait until the Manager displays a message Avaya IP Office Manager LU System SD Card successfully recreated 7 Insert the card into the control unit s Optional SD card slot 8 Use one of the processes below to copy the software from the Optional SD card to the System SD card Each of those processes will cause the IP Office system to be restarted Copying Software Files from the Optional SD Card Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Upgrade Binaries e The software files all files in the folder except the c
263. en create a default configuration matching the cards installed in the control unit and external expansion modules attached to it You can perform a number of additional actions prior to installing the System SD card in order to pre configure the IP Office system e Upgrade the Card Firmware 74 e Adda Configuration File 74 e Add a License File 77 e Add Music on Hold Files 77 e Add a 9600 Screen Saver Image File 77 Additional actions that can be performed on SD cards are detailed in the SD Card Management 152 section 4 4 1 Upgrade the Card Firmware This command can be used with a read writeable SD card on the Manager PC It copies the files and folders used by an IP500v2 system when starting It updates the card with the version of those files installed with the IP Office Manager application It includes the binary files for the IP500v2 system external expansion modules and phones It also includes the prompt files for embedded voicemail operation This process just replaces existing files and adds new files It does not delete files so for example any existing embedded voicemail messages and greetings are retained If the card contains dynamic system files such as SMDR records they are temporarily backed up by Manager and then restored after the card is recreated For the card to be used in an 1P500v2 system s System SD slot the card must be Avaya SD Feature Key card The card must be correctly formatted however a reformat of an exi
264. ense is a pre requisite for this license e IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION RFA LIC DS 229424 e IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION TRIAL RFA LIC DS 229425 e Support for Customer Call Reporter including 1 e Voicemail Pro Visual Basic Scripting supervisor l l l e Voicemail Pro call recording to ContactStore 2 e Voicemail Pro database interaction IVR e Voicemail Pro call flow generic TTS 8 ports 1 1 Provides up to 8 ports of TTS for use with Speak Text actions within Voicemail Pro call flows Not used for user TTS email reading 2 Note In a Small Community Network using centralized voicemail this license only enables ContactStore support for the central IP Office Remote IP Offices in the network require their own Advanced Edition license or a VMPro Recordings Administrator license e Customer Service Agent These licenses enable the configuration of users as CCR agents Multiple license can be added for up to the maximum of 150 agents A license is consumed for each CCR agent logged in If no more license are available further agents cannot log in This license was previous called CCR Agent e IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA 1 217650 e IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA 5 217651 e IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA 20 217653 e Customer Service Supervisor This license is used to enable support for CCR supervisor and wallboard accounts Each license instance enables both 1 supervisor account and 1 wallboard account Multiple license can be
265. equire I1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 388 licenses added to the configuration These additional channels consume the licenses based on which additional channels are configured as in service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards D channels are not affected by licensing IP500 BRI Trunk Daughter Card 221 nts This card allows the base card to support up to 4 BRI trunk connections each trunk providing 2B D digital channels The card is available in 2 port 4 channels and 4 port 8 channels variants e Maximum 4 per control unit e S Bus Connection The card can be switched from To trunk mode to So mode This mode requires additional terminating resistors and an ISDN crossover cable connection see BRI Port So 1374 e P Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems are limited to a maximum of 12 BRI channels using BRI Combination and or BRI trunk daughter cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 22 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Control Unit Cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 23 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 5 3 IP400 Trunk Cards IP400 trunk cards can be used in 1P500 and IP500 v2 controls units by being fitted onto an 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier 214 base card Up to 2 cards can be added to the control unit in this way The following IP400 trunk card types are supported in this way by
266. er non telecommunications apparatus have a Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV safety Status 10 7 5 New Zealand The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 406 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Safety Statements Regulatory Instructions for Use 10 7 6 FCC Notification This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXxX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that
267. er supply unit Free standing rack mounted requires 1P500 Rack Mounting Kit or wall mounted requires 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 365mm 14 4 Height 73mm 2 9 2U Clearance 90mm minimum all sides 220m at front Maximum configuration file size 2048KB IPO 500 V2 Base Unit IP Office 500 V2 Base Unit 700476005 Avaya SD Memory Card IPO System SD Card A Law 700479702 IPO System SD Card Mu Law 700479710 IPO System SD Card Partner 700479728 1EC60320 C13 Earthed Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 IP500 Rack Mounting Kit IP500 Rack Mounting Kit 700429202 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 199 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 I1P500 Wall Mounting Kit 700500923 IP500 Wall Mounting Kit I1P500 Wall Mounting Kit 700430150 I1P500 Blanking Plate Kit 1P500 Blanking Plate Kit 700429194 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 200 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500v2 Control Unit e Card Slate _ 1 2 3 n Ault IP Office 500 Secucusss SED De LLL LL alee oo TULL m ASTI LAN vAN INPUT CEECEE BOGGBBEee UO Seemep OpbmED SP ADD i REEET Pr nato Sf si Poe SUG HT ATA Op boreal SD D i 2 J RS232 DTE Reset Expansion ports for status LEDs Fort switch Expansion Modules IE System SD card slot External LAN Ports Optional SD c
268. er units not supported on IP500 or avpots16 bin later units I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Boxed 4 4Kg 9 7lbs Based on Phone 30 V2 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 256 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules Phone V1 Module Connections SMe 1P400 Phone 19 20 21 22 POT 25 26 ST 28 2I 30 Ports pes ree DC 1 P376 DTE 144 EXPANSION 379 POT 3382 rh EXPANSION DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module 25 Way D Type socket For Av
269. erminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit This cable is a Straight through DB9 female to DB9 male serial cable a day day i I g D Type Plug D Type Socket IF Office DITE Port 2 WMetersit S7 Feet IP Office 9 Way RS232 PC Terminal DTE Port Adaptor Receive data Transmit Data RTS Request To Send CTS Clear To Send DSR Data Set Ready Ground DCD Data Carrier Detect DTR Data Terminal Ready RI Ring Indicator O Ber UU DW ON N W O Bir UU DW O NNU IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 144 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes DTE Port Maintenance 6 13 2 Erasing the Configuration The following processes erases the configuration held in the IP Office control unit s memory That include both the current configuration being used in RAM memory and the backup configuration stored in non volatile memory Following this the IP Office will restart with a default configuration This process should be performed from a PC with a fixed IP address directly connected to the IP Office control unit and with the IP Office system disconnected from any network Following this process the control unit s IP address will default to 192 168 42 1 e l Do not perform any of these processes unless absolutely necessary The IP Office s configuration settings can be default through Mana
270. ersion IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode It also includes 2 analog extension ports which are for emergency use only when the card is fitted with an analog trunk daughter card A further 4 RJ45 ports 9 to 12 are provided for trunk connections when an IP500 trunk daughter card is fitted to this card e Supports ETR and analog phones Each ETR phone can be used for an ETR or analog phone Support for ETR 34D phone is limited to a maximum of 2 per ETR6 card and 4 in total e IP500 Control Unit X e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 3 e IP500 Trunk Card Support 1 The IP500 BRI trunk daughter card is not supported Port Type Ports Features ETR e REN 1 Extensions e DTMF dialing only e Message waiting indication 51V stepped e ICLID mode Bellcore 202 LEDs e No status LED are used for ETR ports e LED1 is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown If fitted with an IP500 Trunk Daughter card during power failure both these ports are connected to analog trunk port 12 Supports ICLID modes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 REN 2 1 for external bell device Off Hook current 25mA Ring Voltage 40V Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing capacitor For connection to 4 wire
271. ersion 2 1 software installed an upgrade with Validate unticked is required If this is the case only continue with the upgrade process using a PC with a fixed IP address on the same LAN domain and physical LAN segment as the IP Office control unit and only upgrade the pre 2 1 system e If a multi stage upgrade is necessary use the following additional steps to select the appropriate interim software e Right click on the upgrade wizard and click Select Directory Locate and select the directory containing the bin file for the intermediate software level e The upgrade wizard should now list just the control unit as having upgrade software available IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 126 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Upgrading the IP Office Software e Upgrading to particular levels of IP Office software require a Software Upgrade X license where X is a number The Licensed and Required License columns indicate the current highest upgrade license the system has and the required software upgrade license for the currently installed software It does not indicate the license requirement for the level of software in the Available column For 1P500v2 systems a value of 255 indicates that the control unit is still in its initial 90 days where it can be upgraded without requiring a license 4 For those modules which you want to upgrade tick the check box 5 For IP500v2 control units the following
272. ersion Installation IP Office 7 0 700416548 700446370 700383318 700383821 700383326 Page 312 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 47 9621G e These phones are supported by IP Office Release 6 1 on 1P500 and IP500v2 systems only The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e The use of the IP Office control unit as the HTTP file server for these phones is not supported A third party HTTP file server must be used The phones support 24 programmable buttons which are displayed as touchscreen options These can be used for call appearance functions and other IP Office features In addition the phone supports a home screen on which the user can add up to 8 icons for programmable functions in addition to those icons present through installation configuration These phones do not support any button modules w cowThet 282 1G Telephone 700480601 Single Port PoE Injector SPPOE 1A BM12 Button Module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 313 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 48 9630G These phones are supported on IP500 and IP500v2 systems running IP Office Release 6 0 and higher The phones are supplied with a two position stand e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P En
273. erved Ensure that anti static protection measures are observed at all times when handling equipment with exposed electrical circuit boards 5 0 Check All Parts Visually inspect each item and check that all the necessary documentation and accessory items have been included Report any errors or omissions to the dealer who supplied the equipment 6 0 Check All Documentation Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with the equipment IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 174 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation IP500 Unpacking 8 4 IP500 Card Installation The IP500 base cards and trunk daughter cards should be fitted before power is applied to the control unit 1 Fitting 1P500 Trunk Daughter Cards to the Base Cards 178 2 Fitting 1P400 Legacy Cards to a Legacy Card Carrier 177 3 Installing 1P500 Cards into the Control Unit 178 e Ri Warnings Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards Cards must never be added or removed from the control unit while it has power connected e General Notes Cards can be fitted in any order into any available slots The only exception is the P500 4 Port Expansion card which can only be installed in right hand slot 4 For phone based administration the card in slot 1 must be able to support ETR 18D ETR 34D M7324 M7310 T7316E T7316 1408 or 1416 phones Phone based administration i
274. ervice Out Of Service Out OF Service e For T1 set the Type to Out of Service e For T1 PRI set the Admin field to Out of Service e For E1R2 trunks set the Line Signalling Type to Out of Service IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 109 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 7 Setting the Digital Trunk Clock Source Digital trunks require the telephone system at each end of the trunk to share a clock signal to ensure synchronization of call signalling The IP Office can obtain and use the clock signal from any of its digital trunks Typically the clock signal provided by a digital trunk from the central office exchange is used as this will be the most accurate and reliable clock source To do this the Clock Quality setting on each line in the IP Office configuration is set to one of the following e Network If available the clock signal from this trunk should be used as the IP Office s clock source for call synchronization If several trunk sources are set as Network the IP Office will default to using one as detailed below e Fallback If available the clock signal from this trunk can be used as the clock source if none of the trunks set as Network are providing a clock source e Unsuitable The clock source from this trunk will never be used as the IP Office s clock source If no clock source is available the IP Office can use its own internal clock if necessary In the example below the first IP Office
275. es J When a license key is entered into the IP Office configuration the following information is shown e Status The status which is Unknown until the configuration file is sent back to the IP Office system e Unknown This status is shown for licenses that have just been added to the configuration shown in IP Office Manager Once the configuration has been sent back to the IP Office and then reloaded the status will change to one of those below e Valid The features licensed can be configured and used e Invalid The license was not recognized It did not match the serial number of the Feature Key e Dormant The license is valid but is conditional on some other pre requisite licenses e Obsolete The license is valid but is one no longer used by the level of software running on the IP Office system e Expired The license has gone past its expiry date e License The name of the licensed feature This may differ from the ordered RFA name e Instances Depending on the license this may be the number of ports enabled or number of simultaneous users of the licensed feature Sometime the number of instances is specified in the license name e Expires Most purchased licenses have no expiry setting For some features trial licenses may be available which will have an expiry date IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 386 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Licences 9 17 1 System Editio
276. es may be increased if the phone is used with additional equipment such as a button module Connects via IP network IP network IP Office Release 6 0 6 0 Programmable w Soft Soft Buttons buttons buttons Headset Socket ul ul Handsfree Speaker f f af lf Microphone Message Waiting ff ff Lamp PoE Class Typical I dle Class 1 Class 1 Power Consumption Display 1 4 VGA 1 4 VGA Greyscale Color Supported Add Ons Upgradeable ul F Firmware PC Pass Through nell lf nell lf Port with Voice Priority Fixed Function Keys 5 SPEAKER J 5 HEADSET MUTE fm VOLUME UP ff BH CONTACTS J E MESSAGE amp F HOLD w CC TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN zE CALL LOG x ECC CONFERENCE MENU x prop x HEA REDIAL x FORWARD Functions for fixed functions keys not present are accessible through display menu soft key functions 9620L Telephone Charcoal Grey 700461197 9620C Telephone Charcoal Grey 700461205 9620L without faceplate 700461239 9620C without faceplate 700461247 Replacement Stand Silver 700416555 Wedge Stand Charcoal Grey 700383870 Wall Mounting Plate Charcoal Grey 700383375 Gigabit Adapter 700383771 Bluetooth Adapter 700383789 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 311 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Replacement Handset Amplified Speech Handset Replacement Handset Cord 9 feet Replacement Handset Cord 25 feet Replacement Line Cord IP Office Standard V
277. etails for the IP Office and click Logon IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 67 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 3 5 Starting Monitor IP Office Monitor also know as System Monitor is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office system in great detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge However all IP Office installers and maintainers must understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve Support issues 4 Requirements e O IP Office Administration PC A Windows PC with the IP Office Administrator Application suite installed 6385 e O LAN Cable 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Monitor 2 1f System Monitor has been run before it will attempt to connect with the system which it monitored previously If otherwise or you want to monitor a different system use the steps below 3 Select File Select Unit Select System to Monitor Enter Control Unit P Address Control Unit Type ninni Nan WAN AAF f Alchemy 192 168 42 1 IF Office Password 0 Cancel 4 Enter the IP Office IP address and password of the IP Office Control Unit you want to monitor e Using IP Office Manager it is possible to set a specific System Monitor Password for System Monitor access to an IP Office system If the IP Office doesn t have a System Monitor Password
278. ew or defaulted system this is password Tools Required e O Manager PC The Upgrade Wizard tool is part of the Manager application fd WARNINGS e Check IP Office Technical Bulletins Check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletin for the IP Office software release before proceeding any further It may contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was completed Bulletins are available from http support avaya com e Multiple Managers If more than one copy of Manager is running it is possible for the IP Office to request BIN files from a different Manager from the one that started the upgrade process Ensure that only one copy of Manager is running when upgrading an IP Office system Ara J Procedure Upgrade Procedure 1 Using IP Office Manager click L A and receive the configuration from the IP Office If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office 2 Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC This action should be completed before upgrading any IP Office system 3 Select File Advanced Upgrade 4 The UpgradeWiz is started and scans for IP Office unit using the Unit Broadcast address Adjust this address and click Refresh if the expected modules are not shown 5 For each the unit found the Upgr
279. f reboot can then be selected Reboot 806 Reboot Immediate When Free O tined IST e Reboot Select when the reboot should occur e Immediate Send the configuration and then reboot the IP Office e When Free Send the configuration and reboot the IP Office when there are no calls in progress This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Timed The same as When Free but waits for a specific time after which it then wait for there to be no calls in progress The time is specified by the Reboot Time This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Reboot Time This setting is used when the reboot mode Timed is selected It sets the time for the IP Office reboot If the time is after midnight the IP Office s normal daily backup is canceled e Call Barring These settings can be used when the reboot mode When Free is selected They bar the sending or receiving of any new calls 4 Click OK IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 119 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 3 Memory Card Removal fh Card Memory cards should always be shutdown 167 before being removed when the system is running Though the card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard Shutting down the card will disable embedded voicemail if being used If the System SD card is removed features licensed by the card s Feature Key serial
280. fail conditions PF1 is internally connected to ANALOG port 1 on the module PF2 is internally connected to ANALOG port 2 on the same module IP500 ETR6 Card On this card during normal operation extension ports 7 and 8 are not useable However if the card is fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure extension ports 7 and 8 are connected to analog trunk port 12 In all cases these only work with loop start analog trunks Any phones connected to these ports should be clearly labeled as power fail extensions in accordance with the appropriate national and local regulatory requirements IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 52 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 2 Installation Requirements IP Office Standard Version Installation ffice 7 0 Page 53 IPO 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 2 Installation Requirements 2 1 Environmental Requirements The planned location must meet the following requirements If being installed into a rack system these are requirements for within the rack 1 0 Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 2 0 Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing O Check there are no flammable materials in the area O Check there is no possibility of flooding O Check that no other machinery or equipment needs to be moved first 3 4 5 6 0 Check that it is not an excessively dusty atmosphere 7 0 Check that the area is unlikely to suffer rapid c
281. fice Release 7 0 supports the following phones and phone add ons Availability may depend on location and may be subject to local restrictions Enhanced Tip and Ring ETR Port These phones are only supported on an ETRE card in a 1P500v2 systems They are only supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems running a North American locale They are not supported in IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Standard modes The following are supported in mode e ETR Series ETR6 322 ETR6D 322 ETR18 323 ETR18D 323 ETR34D 324 ETR 34D phones limited to a maximum of 2 per card and 4 in total e PARTNER DECT 3910 290 3920 290 Digital Station DS Port These digital stations connect to the IP Office via DS 376 ports The following are supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version and IP Office Standard Version modes e 1400 Series 1403 266 1408 267 1416 268 e 9500 Series 9504308 9508 309 The following are only supported in IP Office Standard Version mode e 2400 Series 2402 275 2410 276 2420 277 e 3800 Series 3810 Wireless phone 289 Not supported on the IP500 and P500v2 control unit DS ports e 4400 Series 4406D 29t 4412D 292 4424D 29 Not supported on the IP500 and IP500v2 control unit DS ports e 5400 Series 5402
282. fice software The card is inserted into System SD Card In this method the System SD card is shut down and Local Upgrade 165 removed from the control unit The card s contents are the control unit s Option SD card slot and its contents copied to the System SD card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 128 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Upgrading the IP Office Software 6 6 3 Upgrading 2400 5400 Phones The firmware on most phones connected to an IP Office system is automatically upgraded if necessary when a phone is first connected to an IP Office port or for existing phones after a system reboot However this does not apply to Avaya 2400 Series and 5400 Series phones Checking the Firmware on a 2410 or 5410 Phones 1 Press E Exit to ensure that the phone has exited any other usage mode 2 Press either of the display keys next to MENU 3 Select OPTION 4 Select Self Test The display should now show details of the phone s currently installed firmware 24100 REL 2 00 9 21 04 HWT S2H AWi 1 Pizza 5 The firmware loaded into the phones has a major and minor version The Major version in the example above is Shown as FWV 2 and the minor version is shown as REL 2 00 6 Press Exit to exit self test mode Checking the Firmware on a 2420 or 5420 Phones 1 Select OPTION 2 Select Self Test The display should now show details of the phone s currently installed firmware 242
283. followed by OK IP Office 403 only If running an IP Office 403 control unit also enter AT X4 5 Switch power to the control unit off and then back on Within the terminal program you should see various messages as the control unit performs various start up tasks 6 Close the terminal program session 7 Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 147 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 13 4 Erasing the Operational Firmware When the firmware loaded by the control unit is erased the control unit will begin making BOOTP requests for a replacement firmware file Manager can act as a BOOTP server and respond to the control units request with the appropriate file from those installed with Manager Unlike other control units when the firmware loaded by an 1P500v2 control unit is erased the 1P500v2 control unit will first look for replacement firmware on its SD cards before falling back to using a BOOTP request to Manager The processes below should be performed from a PC with a fixed IP address directly connected to the IP Office control unit and with the IP Office system disconnected from any network During the process the control unit s IP address may default to a value in the 192 168 42 1 to 192 168 42 10 range If this occurs it may be necessary to amend the BOOTP entry in IP Office
284. for NET2 component Location ProgramFiles Avaya I P Office Ports IP Office Manager Manager manager exe TCP Port 50802 TCP Port 50804 TCP Port 50812 UDP Port 50798 Ports Component IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 355 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 5 Monitor Monitor also Known as System Monitor is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office system in great detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge However all IP Office installers and maintainers must understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues For IP Office 4 0 and higher the System Status Application 36t has been added to provide more easily interpreted information than is provided by Monitor e Two versions of Monitor are included in the IP Office Admin applications suite one for IP Office 4 0 systems and one for pre 4 0 IP Office systems Care should be taken to ensure that the correct version is used when monitoring an IP Office system DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 Languages English only License No license required PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements RAMO izeme OOOO Pentium m soom e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions Operating System Support Server O
285. forming the following e Short Code 000 e Telephone No 000 e Function DialEmergency Connections to TS013 the following Bearer Capabilities shall not be used e 7kHz Audio Video Restricted Digital Information If unknown type of number is used in calling party number the network will use the default CLI The system must be configured for Point to Multi point connection to comply with Austel requirements for connecting to TSO13 circuits As the IP Office does not support emergency dialing after loss of power the following warning notice should be recognized e WARNING This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails PRI Interface During the configuration ensure 000 emergency number is not barred by performing the following e Short Code 000 e Telephone No 000 e Function DialEmergency e WARNING This equipment will be inoperable during mains power failure 10 7 2 Canada This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 1 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provide
286. g written to an card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard Shutting down the card will disable embedded voicemail if being used If the System SD card is removed features licensed by the card s Feature Key serial number will continue operating for up to 2 hours Removal The following processes can be used with SD cards installed in P500v2 control units and also with Compact Flash memory cards installed in 1P406 V2 control units 7 6 1 Card Shutdown fh Card Memory cards should always be shutdown 167 before being removed when the system is running Removal Though the card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an card lack of flashing LED is nota sufficient safeguard Shutting down the card will disable embedded voicemail if being used If the System SD card is removed features licensed by the card s Feature Key serial number will continue operating for up to 2 hours Before a memory card is removed from an IP Office system that is running the card must be shutdown Removing a memory card while the system is running may cause file corruption Card services can be restarted by either reinserting the card or using a Start Up command Card Shutdown Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Shutdown 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK e At the back of the control unit confirm that
287. ger using the File Advanced Erase Configuration command e For IP Office Release 7 0 and higher 1P500v2 systems using IP Office A Law or IP Office Mu Law System SD cards will default to IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode Loading the configuration will switch IP Office Manager to simplified view To change the system back to operating in IP Office Standard Version mode select the File Advanced Change Mode Erasing the Configuration via Debug This process erases the IP Office s configuration settings but does not alter its security settings It is easier to use than the boot loader method 1 Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action If a copy of the configuration cannot be downloaded using Manager check the Manager application directory for previously downloaded configurations a Use Manager to download an up to date copy of the configuration If that is not possible check in the Manager application folder for a previous copy of the configuration b Using IP Office Manager select File Open Configuration c Using the Select I P Office Menu locate and select the IP Office system Click OK d Enter the name and password for a service user account on that IP Office Click OK Manager will receive and display the configuration from the IP Office e If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system e This action also
288. gital Station V2 1P400 Phone V2 1P400 So8 IP500 1EC60320 C13 PSU Phone 30 1P500 Digital Station 30 1P500 Digital Station 16A 1P500 Digital Station 30A IP Phones and 1151D1 All phones with XM24 Phone add ons Phone Add Ons All phones with EU24 EU24BL Phone add ons unless using Class 3 PoE 4600 and 56000 Series IP Phones when not using a PoE 1151D2 1600PWR 5V Plug top PSU used with 1600 Series phones on IP Office Various country when not being power using PoE variants e The 1151D2 is the same as the 1151D1 except that it includes a backup battery that is charged during normal operation This can provide typically 15 minutes backup at maximum load 20 Watts and up to 8 hours at light load 2 Watts e Avaya IP phones can use IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE power supplies Refer to the IP Office IP Phone Installation Manual for full details IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 33 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 7 2 Power Supply Cords Each control unit and expansion module requires a switched power outlet socket rated at 110 240V ac 50 60Hz Connection from that power outlet socket requires an appropriate locale specific power cord which is not supplied with the unit and must be ordered separately Note that if the power cord includes an earth lead the power outlet must be connected to a protective earth Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls ceilings floo
289. guration file is present and valid it is loaded e f a configuration file is present but is not valid load the configuration copy in its non volatile memory if present else it assumes a default configuration e If a configuration file is not present use the non volatile memory copy as above unless the reboot is as a result of a default system command e If the IP500v2 booted using binary files from its non volatile memory it will also load the configuration copy from that location e lt will indicate a boot alarm see below e It will attempt to restore the firmware file in the System SD card s primary folder using the copy in its non volatile memory e The normal boot up process of upgrading expansion module firmware does not occur If the File Advanced Upgrade command is used only external expansion modules actually present in the system are listed for upgrade Post Boot Operation During normal operation configuration and binary files sent to the System SD card primary folder using IP Office Manager are also written to the non volatile memory If the system has booted from its non volatile memory due to an SD card problem it is still possible to upgrade the ip500v2 bin file using the IP Office upgrade wizard IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 155 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Boot Alarms The following apply if the 1P500v2 boots using software other than that in its System SD primary f
290. h America U Law only Not supported on the 1P500 Digital Station and 1P500 Combination cards 1406D i cos Connects via DS port IP Office Release 1 0 Programmable Buttons Jo SD Headset Socket wf Handsfree Speaker Microphone w w Message Waiting Lamp n Display 16 characters x 2 lines Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware Standard DCP Phone Keys Z SPEAKER x d HEADSET Z MUTE f a VOLUME UP xX E MESSAGES i amp F HOLD J GO TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN x EE prop SE REDIAL wf CC CONFERENCE 4406D Black 108199027 4406D White 108199019 Small 4400 Series Stand Black 108541194 Stand 4400 Series Stand White 108541202 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 291 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 27 4412 This phone is supported in North America U Law only Not supported on the I1P500 Digital Station and 1P500 Combination cards Note A maximum of twenty seven 4412D telephones are supported on the 1P500 DS30 expansion modules and on 1P400 DS30 version 2 expansion module at PCS level 5 Earlier 1P400 DS30 expansion modules will only support sixteen of these telephones quan i ee Connects via DS port I P Office Release 1 0 Programmable Buttons f 24 12 8 12 TI Headset Socket w Handsfree Speaker of lf Microphone Message Waiting Lamp Display 24 characters x 2 lines Supported Add Ons 4450339 x 2 Upgradable Firmware Standar
291. hanges in temperature and humidity 8 O Check for the proximity of strong magnetic fields sources of radio frequency and other electrical interference 9 0 Check there are no corrosive chemicals or gasses 10 0 Check there is no excessive vibration or potential of excessive vibration especially of any mounting surface 11 0 Check that where telephones are installed in another building that the appropriate protectors and protective grounds are fitted see Out of Building Telephone Installation 39 gt 12 0 Check there is suitable lighting for installation system programming and future maintenance 13 0 Check that there is sufficient working space for installation and future maintenance 14 0 Ensure that likely activities near the system will not cause any problems e g access to and maintenance of any other equipment in the area 15 0 Where ventilation holes are present on any of the IP Office units those holes should not be covered or blocked 16 0 The surface must be flat horizontal for free standing or rack mounted installations Wall Mounting In additional to the requirements above the following are applicable to IP Office units that support wall mounting 1 Units must only be mounted onto permanent wall surfaces 2 The surface must be vertical and flat 3 Orientation of the unit must be as shown in the section on 1P500 Wall Mounting 82 4 The appropriate Avaya wall mounting kits must be used I MPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUC
292. has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 163 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7 5 Upgrading Card Software In addition to using the traditional P Office Upgrade Wizard 126 1P500v2 control units can be upgraded by loading the required set of firmware files onto the System SD card and rebooting the system e fh IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com h Upgrade Licenses Some upgrades may require entry of upgrade licenses e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot There are a number of ways in which this can be done Method Description Location Software Embedded Files Voicemail Prompts Using Manager 165 Using IP Office Manager the contents of the card are Local or uf nf compared to the files that Manager has available and Remote are upgraded if necessary System SD Card In this method the System SD card is shut down and Upgrade 165 removed from the control unit The card s contents are upgraded using
293. he control unit s response will include details of the control unit type and the current level of core software 6 10 3 Enabling SNMP Trap Sending In Manager receive the control unit s configuration 1 Double click System from the Configuration Tree panel and select the SNMP tab 2 Ensure that SNMP Enabled is ticked 3 Using either Trap Destination 1 or Trap Destination 2 enter the following information e Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP manager application e Enter the Port on which the traps messages should be sent This is the UDP port on which the IP Office sends SNMP trap messages The default is 162 e Set the Community that will be used by the agent and the SNMP manager The community public is frequently used to establish communication and then changed at both the SNMP agent and manager ends for security 4 Select the Events which should be sent e Generic Events such as soft reboot warm start hard reboot cold start links up down transition in the status of a PPP or frame relay interface or SNMP community mismatch e Entity Failures errors and changes of state in IP Office modules and trunk interfaces Note Does not include ATM4 e Licence Changes of state in the communication with the Feature Key Server e Phone Change Changes to the type of DS or IP phone connected to a port e Click on OK 5 Send the configuration back to the IP Office and select reboot IP Office Standard Version I
294. he single lamp not recommended for appearance functions as not all button states can be indicated e BM12 24 Max 3 per phone 32 per system Add on for 9508 309 9608 310 and 9641 318 phones Provides 12 buttons assignable in 2 pages for 24 features When used with a 9508 power must be supplied to the phone using an inline power module such as the 1151C or equivalent e BM32 340 32 Max 3 per phone 32 per system Add on for the 1616 phones that provides two columns of 16 buttons Up to 3 BM32 modules are supported with any 1616 For IP Office 5 0 up to a maximum of 32 BM32 modules total are supported the IP Office system e DBM32 341 32 Max 3 per phone 32 per system Add on for the 1416 phones that provides two columns of 16 buttons Up to 3 BM32 modules are supported with any 4616 For IP Office 5 0 up to a maximum of 32 BM32 modules total are supported the IP Office system e EU24 342 24 Max 1 per phone 8 per system Add on for the 2420 4620 4620SW 4625 5420 5620 5620SW and 5621 Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons Button display icons are on two switchable pages with 12 icons on each page e EU24BL 343 24 Max 1 per phone 8 per system As per the EU24 above but with a backlight function to match the 4621 Not supported on the 2420 and 5420 e KLM 344 48 Max 2 per phone 21 per system Used with M7324 328 phones Up to 2 buttons modules are supported per phone Each button module provides 4
295. heir Tx1 place a jumper across the two Rx1 pins of jumper block J 6 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 243 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 8 IP400 Internal Cards 9 8 1 Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards This card is supported on IP500 control units It is a specially formatted Compact Flash cards that provides embedded voicemail operation and can also be configured for basic auto attendant support Use of these cards for voicemail does not require a license e l These cards are not hot swappable Removal of the cards while the IP Office control unit is powered may cause lose or corruption of messages and prompts IP Office Manager can be used to shutdown a memory card 120 gt before its removal Uses a specially formatted Avaya 512MB Compact Flash card 700343460 ra Sa This card provides up to 15 hours storage for uncompressed lt gt prompts greetings and messages Operation of this card does not require voice compression channels Supports up to 4 simultaneous connections non expandable e From IP Office 3 0 onwards the prompt files for the following languages are pre installed on the Avaya memory cards e Danish e German e English UK e English US e Spanish e Spanish Mexico e Spanish Argentina Finnish French French Canadian Italian Korean Dutch Norwegian Portuguese Portuguese Brazilian Russian Swedish Chinese Mandarin Chinese Cantonese IP Office 4 2
296. hen the AUX button is pressed for more than 5 seconds the IP500v2 control unit will shutdown with the restart timer set to 10 minutes IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 170 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 8 IP500 Basic Installation IP Office Standard Version Installation ffice 7 0 Page 171 IPO 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 1P500 Basic Installation 8 1 IP500 Tools Required The following is a general summary of the tools required Additional tools and equipment will be a required for wall and or rack mounting and to fashion ground cable connections suitable to local requirements e Tools Required e O 5mm Flat blade screwdriver e O Crosshead screwdriver e O Anti static wrist strap and ground point e O RJ45 RJ 45 Ethernet LAN Cable e O M4 Cross Head Screwdriver e O Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade e O If wall mounting drills and tools for wall mounting fixtures e Additional Parts Required In addition to orderable IP Office equipment the following items will be required e O 14AWG Solid copper wire for ground connection of control units and expansion modules e O Cable sleeve matching local regulator requirements for ground wires Typically green for a functional ground and green yellow for a protective ground e O If wall mounting additional fixtures and fittings suitable for the wall type and mounting kit being used e O Cable ties and labels for tidying and
297. his type of card is used to add voice compression channels to an 1P500 and IP500v2 control unit Those channels are used for VoIP calls including IP extensions and or IP trunks The 1P500 VCM card is available in two variants 32 channels and 64 channels Both cards have 4 RJ45 ports for that are used for connections when an 1P500 daughter card 218 is fitted IP500 control units support up to 128 voice compression channels using 1P500 VCM cards and or 1P400 VCM cards 245 on an P500 carrier card 214 The 1P500v2 control unit supports up to 148 voice compression channels using the same cards plus voice compression ports on 1P500 Combination Cards 210 e Supports Codecs G 711 G729a and G 723 with 64ms echo cancellation The maximum number of simultaneous channels useable on an 1P500 VCM base card is affected by the codec being used The following table assumes that all calls using the VCM use the same codec IP500 VCM32 IP500 VCM64 Nrct ca o a e 1 P500 Control Unit e P500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 2 e 1P500 Trunk Card Support 1 Port Type Ports Features Not present Not present LEDs e LEDs 1 to 8 are unlabelled They are used to indicate voice compression channel usage Each LED lit represents 12 5 of the available voice compression channel capacity in use total card capacity rather than licensed capacity LED1 is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 s
298. his unit is not intended to support BRI trunks IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 223 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e IP500 Analog Trunk Module 225 Provides an additional 16 ANALOG 373 ports for connection of analog trunks Supports both loop start and ground start trunks e Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP Office control unit are grounded e In IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes only 1 Analog Trunk module is supported IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 224 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Expansion Modules 9 5 1 Analog Trunk 16 The 1P500 Analog Trunk module can be used to add 16 additional analog trunks to an IP Office system The module Supports both loop start and with suitable grounding ground start trunks e In IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes only 1 Analog Trunk module is supported e IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth 38 E WARNI NG Within areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 and to surge p
299. hone Voicemail Applications The IP Office supports a range of applications for the recording and playing of voicemail messages e Embedded Voicemail 244 This application is supported on all IP Office Release 6 systems Embedded Voicemail supports basic voicemail mailbox operation simple auto attendants and hunt group announcements For 1P500 and IP500v2 controls units embedded voicemail is provided by the Avaya SD card fitted by default e Voicemail Pro 363 This voicemail application runs on a server PC connected to the IP Office It requires various licenses entered into the IP Office configuration to control the features it offers and the number of simultaneous connections The operation of Voicemail Pro can be customized to provide special services e ContactStore for IP Office 353 Voicemail Pro can be used for manual and automatic call recording Those recording are placed into mailboxes Contact Store allows those recordings to be redirected into a database on the ContactStore PC This allows recordings to be archived and searched separately from mailbox messages This application requires entry of a license into the IP Office configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 49 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Call Logging Applications A wide range of 3rd party applications exist to provide call logging and accounting for telephone systems To support these the IP Office provides an SMDR output e SMDR O
300. i IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic Rate 4 Universal 700417413 IPO 500 Trnk BRI 8 Uni IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic Rate 8 Universal 700417421 IPO IP500 BRI SO CONVTR IP500 BRI So Converter Cable 700458649 CBL IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 221 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 4 3 PRI Trunk Cards This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for PRI trunks The card is available in single port or dual port variants This card can be fitted to any IP500 base card except the 1P500 Legacy Carrier card and 1P500 4 Port Expansion card e Ports Channels 1 or 2 PRI trunk ports 383 Each port supports the following PRI line types On dual port cards both ports will be the same line type The line type selection can be changed using IP Office Manager The options available depend on the IP Office operation mode and locale e El PRI 30B D channels per port e E1R2 PRI 30B channels per port e Tl robbed bit 24B channels per port or T1 PRI 23B D channels per port e The required mode can be selected within IP Office Manager by right clicking on the line icon and selecting Change Universal PRI Card Line Type and then selecting the required line type e Physical trunk connection is via ports 9 and 10 of the host IP500 base card e Port 11 and 12 can be used as test points for connection of test and monitoring equipment for the adjacent port e Licenses The IP
301. ice calls IP Office only supports fax across IP between IP Office systems with the Fax Transport option selected It does not currently support T38 Conference Resources and IP Devices T38 Fax Calls IP Office 5 0 supports T38 fax on SIP trunks and SIP extensions Each T38 fax call uses a VCM channel Within a Small Community Network a T38 fax call can be converted to a call across an H323 SCN lines using the IP Office Fax Transport Support protocol This conversion uses 2 VCM channels In order use T38 Fax connection the Equipment Classification of an analog extension connected to a fax machine can be set Fax Machine Additionally a new short code feature Dial Fax is available Note T3 IP devices must be configured to 20ms packet size for the above conditions to apply If left configured for 10ms packet size a voice compression channel is needed for all tones and for non direct media calls Measuring Channel Usage The IP Office System Status Application can be used to display voice compression channel usage Within the Resources section it displays the number of channel in use It also displays how often there have been insufficient channels available and the last time such an event occurred The IP500 VCM cards the level of channel usage is also indicated by the LEDs 1 to 8 on the front of the IP500 VCM card 216 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 46 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 12
302. ich is not required Tools Required 1 0 5mm Flat blade screwdriver 2 0 Anti static wrist strap and ground point Procedure Installing a Carrier Card 1 Check that correct cards have been supplied 2 Ensure that you are wearing an anti static wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point 3 On the carrier card identify the position of the jumper block and stand off pillar holes for the P400 card The peg holes are labeled as VCM or TRUNK 4 f fitting an 1P400 trunk card identify which of the plastic snap off panels on the front of the carrier card need to be removed to allow the trunk cable connections Carefully remove those panels Single PRI Dual PRI ATMA Quad BRI 5 Fit the stand off pillars to the IP500 carrier card 6 Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the IP400 card onto its jumper and the stand off pillars IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 177 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 4 3 IP500 Card Insertion Having prepared each IP500 base card by adding any trunk daughter card 176 or 1P400 legacy card 177 the base card can be inserted into the control unit e fT Warnings e Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards e Cards must never be added or removed from the control unit while it has power connected e Tools Required e O 5mm Flat blade screwdriver e O Anti static wrist stra
303. ier Box V2 should be used with Phone V2 modules e No other type of analog phone barrier box should be used e Where more than 3 barrier boxes are required in a building they must be rack mounted using a Barrier Box rack mounting kit 134 e A maximum of 16 barrier boxes can be used with any Phone module e The Phone Barrier Box does not connect the ringing capacitor in Phone V1 modules Main Building Secondary Building Control Unit fa C 2 eof Se Barrier Box Phone Module a a 7 Barrier Box es _ Analog Primary E T Phone Protection Boxes f Earthed Ducted a Approved Ground Point Approved Ground Points Cabling e RJ11 amp e RJ11 Connect to PHONE POT port on the Phone RJ45 Fi Connect to analog phone Cable not module using cable supplied with the barrier supplied box e RJ 45 e RJ 45 From main building via primary Connect to the secondary building barrier box protection in both buildings via primary protection in both buildings e Center Screw e Center Screw Connect to main building protective ground or ground terminal of Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit Use LBAWG minimum wire Connect to main building protective ground Use 18AWG minimum wire with a green and yellow sleeve with a green and yellow sleeve i e Right Hand Screw e Right Hand Screw Not used Connect to ground point on Phone module using ground cable supplied with barrier box
304. il Pro server support Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro also enables 4 voicemail ports These licenses can be used to add additional voicemail ports up to the maximum capacity of the IP Office system IP500 40 IP500v2 40 This license was previously called Additional Voicemail Pro ports e IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 2 LIC 174459 e IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 4 LIC 174460 e IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 8 LIC 174461 e IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 16 LIC 174462 e VMPro Recordings Administrators IPO LIC CONTACTSTORE RFA LIC 187166 To support ContactStore in a Small Community Network IP Offices other than the central IP Office require either their own Advanced Edition license or this license e VMPro Networked Messaging IPO LIC NTWKD MSGING RFA LIC 182297 Enables VPNM Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging functionality within Voicemail Pro This allows message exchange with remote Voicemail Pro systems and Avaya Interchange systems e VMPro TTS Generic 1P400 3rd PARTY TTS LIC RFA 182303 This legacy license enables use of text to speech facilities using third party TTS software with Voicemail Pro One license per simultaneous instance of TTS usage For IP Office Release 6 this license is no longer used for user email reading The IP Office Advance Edition license also enables 8 ports of generic TTS e VMPro TTS ScanSoft IPO LIC AVAYA TTS RFA 1 182299 This legacy licence enables use of text to speech facilities using Avaya supplie
305. illars to the 1P500 base card 5 If there is a clip on metal shield over the connector block on the base card remove it 6 Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the IP500 trunk card onto its connector block and the stand off pillars 7 Check that the card connector has snapped into position 8 Using the washers and screws provided secure the metal stand off pillars to the base card 9 A set of labels are supplied with the trunk daughter card Fit the appropriate label to the front of the base card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 176 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation IP500 Card Installation 8 4 2 IP500 Legacy Card Preparation An IP500 Legacy Carrier card can be used to fit P400 trunk or VCM cards into an IP500 or 1P500v2 control unit Up to 2 1P500 legacy carrier cards can be inserted w PRI T1 w PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 e VCM 4 Dual PRI T1 w Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45 w VCM 8 w PRI 30 E1 1 4 w BRI 8 UNI wf VCM 16 Dual PRI El wf ANLG 4 Uni US only wf VCM 24 w VCM 30 iB Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards Parts and Equipment Required 1 0 1P500 Carrier Card 2 0 1P400 Card The table opposite lists supported cards Any card not listed is not supported Cards are supplied with 2 plastic stand off pillars Trunk cards are also supplied with a replacement blanking plate wh
306. ing IP Office 3 2 and higher E Objective Receive a configuration from an IP Office running IP Office 3 2 or higher software Lal Avaya IP Of ce bhanaper E Tu Q Information Required e O Service User Name and Password The defaults for full configuration access are Administrator and Administrator However these should have been changed as part of the installation process see Configuring Security Settings AR 300700 Ge Ipaa Procedure Receiving the Configuration 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager Click L A in the main toolbar or select File Open Configuration from the menu bar N 3 The Select IP Office window appears After a few seconds it should list the control unit that is being setup The default name used is the control units MAC address e f the system required was not found the address used for the search can be changed Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search 4 Click the check the box next to the system and then click OK 5 The name and password request is displayed The name and password must match one of those setup through the security settings The default name and password for full configuration settings access is Administrator and Administrator 6 Successful receiving of the configuration is shown by the full configuration tree being shown in the left hand panel With no configuration
307. ing components of IP Office are outside the range of a basic IP Office installation They are covered by separate installation and configuration documentation If those components are to be part of the IP Office system installation that documentation should be obtained read and understood prior to the installation e Partner Version Installation e Compact DECT Installation e one X Portal for IP Office Installation e IP DECT R4 Installation e 4600 5600 Series IP Phone Installation e 3600 Series Wireless IP Installation e Embedded Voicemail nstallation e Phone Manager Installation Manual e Voicemail Pro Installation e SoftConsole Installation Manual e Contact Store Installation e SIP Extension Configuration e dB IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com e l Upgrade Licenses Some upgrades may require entry of upgrade licenses Equipment Availability SAP codes and details of specific items within this documentation are for reference only Items available in any specific locale should be confirmed against the local Avaya IP Office price list for that locale The local price list may also include additional items
308. ing power failure phone port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 IP500 TCM8 Digital Station Card 215 J a This card provides 8 TCM digital station ports for the connection of it Avaya 4100 7400 M Series and T Series phones e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 4 per control unit per 1P500v2 control unit Not supported by IP500 control units This card is available in variants supporting either 32 or 64 voice compression channels for use with VolP calls e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 2 which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 2 per control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 19 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Legacy Card Carrier Base Card 214 i This card allows various 1P400 trunk cards 24 gt and 1P400 VCM cards 25 gt to be used The front of the card includes panels that can be removed to match the trunk card fitted e This card does not accept any 1P500 trunk daughter card e Maximum 2 per control unit e 1P400 Cards Supported The following cards are supported w PRI T1 w PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 sl VCM 4 w Dual PRI T1 Dual PRI ElR2 RJ45 sal VCM 8 PRI 30 E1 1 4 w BRI 8 UNI sd VCM 16 Dual PRI El w ANLG 4 Uni US only sil VCM 24 sd VCM 30 1P500 4 Port Expansion Base Card 208 This card adds an additional 4 expan
309. io Enabled per user IPO LIC PMGR SFTPHN RFA 1 171992 Enables Phone Manager Pro IP softphone operation for a user Note Also requires the user to have a Phone Manager Pro license CTI Licenses e CTI Link Pro IPO LIC CTI RFA 171988 Enables CTI Link Pro functionality TAPI Link Pro and DEVLink Pro e Wave User IPO LIC TAPI WAV RFA 4 177466 Allows streaming of WAV files using TAPILink Pro for 3rd party voice applications This is a per user license Note that TAPI WAV calls use system data channels taken from the same pools as used for voicemail ports The maximum number of simultaneous TAPI WAV user calls and voicemail users is determined by the IP Office control unit type 1P500 40 IP500v2 40 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 397 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 10 safety Statements IP Office Standard Version Installation ffice 7 0 Page 399 IPO 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 10 Safety Statements The Avaya 1P400 Office and IP500 Office modules are intended to be installed by Service Personnel and it is the responsibility of the Service Personnel to ensure that all subsidiary interconnected equipment is wired correctly and also meet the safety requirements of 1EC60950 or UL60950 where applicable CE The CE mark affixed to this equipment means that the module complies with the 1999 5 EC R amp TTE 89 336 EEC EMC and 72 23EEC LVD Directives e The Decla
310. ion Installation Page 333 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 70 T3 Classic This phone is supported in Europe only U Law only The T3 Classic has 2 Link ports for optional add on T3 Headset and or T3 DSS units up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones It does not support T3 IPN phones Previous restrictions against using T3 phones on systems with other types of digital stations no longer apply Connects via Headset Socket IP Office Release Programmable Buttons Message Waiting Lamp Upgradeable Firmware Using optional T3 Headset Link unit T3 UPN Classic Black White T3 IP Classic Black White T3 DSS Unit Black White T3 DSS Expansion Unit Black White T3 IP Power Supply Unit AEI Headset Link for T3 IP Power Supply for T3 IP DSS Headset Link for T3 UPN IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700380272 700380306 700414733 700414725 700380322 700380330 700380348 700380355 700414766 700414774 700414790 700380363 DS port 3 1 Not Small Office Edition wf 4 wf Handsfree Speaker Microphone f f Page 334 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 71 T3 Comfort System Components Phones This phone is supported in Europe only U Law only The T3 Classic has 2 Link ports for optional add on T3 Headset and or T3 DSS units up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T
311. ion Modules I P400 External Expansion Modules Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and a 1m blue interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Analog Trunk I P400 Analog Trunk 16 North America 700211360 Europe 700241680 New Zealand 700241698 Digital Station 1P400 Digital Station 16 V2 All 700359839 I P400 Digital Station 30 V2 AII 700359847 1P400 Digital Station 16 AII 700184807 1P400 Digital Station 30 AII 700184880 I P400 Phone 8 V2 All 700359896 I P400 Phone 16 V2 All 700359904 I P400 Phone 30 V2 All 700359912 I P400 Phone 8 AII 700184773 I P400 Phone 16 All 700184781 I P400 Phone 30 All 700184799 SO BRI I P400 So8 All 700185077 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 27 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Connecting External Expansion Modules The integral expansion ports on a control unit are located on the rear of the unit For IP500 and IP500v2 control units an additional 4 expansion ports can be added to the front of the control unit by installing an 1P500 4 Port Expansion card e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnec
312. ion module DS Supports up to 4 connections A a ie i 9 376 ports only This device was previously e The between building connection must be via referred to as the Avaya 146E earthed ducting preferable underground The cable must not be exposed externally at any point TCM Phone Extensions None Currently not supported Analog Trunks ITWLinx towerMAX CO 4x4 132 For installations in the Republic of South Africa the fitting of surge protection on analog trunks is a Supports up to 4 two wire lines requirement This device was previously l l l l l referred to as the Avaya 146C For other locations where the risk of lightning strikes is felt to be high additional protection of incoming analog trunks is recommended External Output Switch ITWLinx towerMAX SCL 8 Connections from an IP Office Ext O P port to an This device was previously external relay device must be via a surge protector referred to as the Avaya 146G The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx http www itwlinx com IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 39 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 8 Wall and Rack Mounting All the IP Office control units are designed to be free standing On systems with external expansion modules the control unit and modules are intended to be stacked Using additional option mounting kits some systems can be wall or rack mounted Control Expansion Unit la IP500 Control Unit I1P500v2 Control Unit IP
313. is card is only supported in an 1P500v2 control unit running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode It is not supported in IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Standard Version modes It provides 6 ETR ports for connection of ETR phones 2 Analog extension ports are also provided for emergency use only with an analog trunk card e The card can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter card which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per IP500v2 control unit Not supported by IP500 control units e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone ports 7 and 8 are connected to analog trunk port 12 However during normal operation analog phone ports 7 and 8 are not useable IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 207 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 3 1 4 Port Expansion Card This card is used to add 4 additional expansion ports to the IP500 and IP500v2 control unit This card is only supported in Slot 4 Supports Provides 4 additional expansion ports 379 for connection of external expansion modules Supported Expansion Modules The following external expansion modules are Supported e 1P500 Analogue Trunk Module e
314. it otherwise a Hook one of the cable covers into the leading hole of one of the metal brackets b Hook another bracket onto the other end of the cable cover and then attach that bracket to the unit c Repeat the process to attach the other cable cover to the unit 5 Fit the Wall Bracket See Figure 4 Using 2 of the screws provided with the kit attach the wall bracket to the plywood surface 6 Place the Unit onto the Wall Bracket See Figure 5 Lift the unit onto the wall bracket The two metal brackets at the top of the unit hook over the top of the wall bracket 7 Attach the Unit to the Wall Panel See Figure 6 a Using the remaining 4 screws provided with the kit fix the cover brackets to the plywood surface b Reinsert the base cards and blank slot covers Page 192 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Wall Mounting 8 13 2 Wall Mounting Kit V1 These notes relate to the older design of wall mounting kit SAP 70043015 used for 1P500 and IP500v2 control units This kit cannot be used for external expansion modules The kit includes two brackets one top and one bottom and screws for attachment to the control unit Additional 4 x 4 5mm fixtures and fittings are required suitable for the wall type In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit e The wall surface must be ve
315. ithin the IP Office configuration The T1 PRI card includes an integral CSU DSU that can be activated through the IP Office Monitor application 1P400 PRI 24 T1 North America 700185200 1P400 PRI 48 T1 North America 700185218 uf af e These cards include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of 1P400 control units e For dual port cards the P406 V2 only supports a single dual card in Slot A e For the IP500 and IP500v2 control units an 1P500 Carrier Card is required up to a maximum of 2 1P500 Carrier Cards 9 7 5 E1 PRI Trunk Cards These cards support primary rate trunks providing 30B D channels 1P400 PRI 30 El All except China and 700272461 1 4 CALA 1P400 PRI 60 El All except China and 700185184 nf n CALA e These cards include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of 1P400 control units e For dual port cards the P406 V2 only supports a single dual card in Slot A e For the IP500 and IP500v2 control units an 1P500 Carrier Card is required up to a maximum of 2 1P500 Carrier Cards IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 242 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Trunk Cards 9 7 6 E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards These cards support E1 trunks with R2 signalling Each trunk provides up to 30B D channels E1R2 PRI trunk cards are available with either RJ 45 or coaxia
316. l Ports 9 16 11 EXPANSION Port This type of port is found on the rear of IP Office control units and external expansion modules It is used for connecting the external expansion modules to there parent IP Office control unit The connection between these ports should only be done using an Avaya Expansion Interconnect Cable No other cable type should be used e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnect cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card Expansion Interconnect Cable The Expansion Interconnect cable is used to link expansion ports between the IP Office control unit and external expansion modules Rd45 RJ45 e Supply One cable is normally supplied with each external expansion module e SAP Code 1m 3 3 Blue cable 700213457 2m 6 6 Yellow cable 700472871 9 16 12 EXT O P Port These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units They are used for connection to external switching relays The port uses a standard 3 5mm stereo jack plug for connection The IP Office is able to open high resistance close low resistance or pulse close for 5 seconds and then o
317. l and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system IPO 500 Phone 16 Ports 700449507 30 Ports AII 700426224 JSS Ue C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 700500923 I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 235 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 6 Feature Keys The serial number of the feature key fitted to the IP Office control unit is used as the basis for all licenses issued for that IP Office system and is used to regularly re validate the licenses If the feature key is removed over the next few hours licensed features will stop operating 9 6 1 IP500v2 System SD Cards This type of feature key is used with 1P500v2 control units and is a mandatory item The control unit must be fitted with one of these feature keys even if no licenses are being used The serial number for licenses issued for use with this type of feature key is printed on the card label and prefixed by FK This type of feature key is also a memory card used for other system functions and to provide embedded voicemail if required e By default the card can be used for 2
318. l cable connectors E1R2PRI trunk Cards TP P400 PRI 30 E1R2 RJ PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 45 CALA Korea China 700241631 1P400 PRI 60 ElR2 RJ45 700241649 J 1P400 PRI 30 E1R2 COAX CALA 700241656 1P400 PRI 60 E1R2 COAX 700241664 e These cards include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of 1P400 control units e For E1R2 coaxial card a ground jumper cable and coaxial connector locking rings are included e For dual port cards the P406 V2 only supports a single dual card in Slot A e For the IP500 and IP500v2 control units an 1P500 Carrier Card is required up to a maximum of 2 1P500 Carrier Cards E1R2 coax trunk cards must be grounded correctly and require the IP Office control unit to be connected to a protective ground 38 Normally the ends of one connection is grounded For example if the exchange Tx1 is grounded the IP Office Rx1 should also be grounded However this must be confirmed with the line provider to establish which ends they want grounded 1 Connect the ground strap spade end B supplied with the card to the spade connection on the card and the other end C to the chassis with the long securing screw also supplied with the card 2 Use the two jumpers supplied with the card match the ground selection of the line provider For example if the line provider has grounded t
319. l units must not be connected to out of building extensions Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ45 to RJ11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ 45 port to a DS phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions This cable is not suitable for connection from an Avaya 1151D1 B2 power supply unit to a DS phone with a 4450 EU24 or XM24 add on module In those cases the cables supplied with the power supply unit and the add on module should be used 1 FJ11 Al E cn e 4 Meters 3 2 Feet Devcon Fn Ras 1 Not used 2 Not used 1 3 Not used 2 i 4 Signal 1 3 5 Signal 2 4 6 Not used 5 7 Not used 6 8 Not used e SAP Code T700047871 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 376 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Physical Ports 9 16 8 EF Port These ports are found on the ETR6 base card They are analog trunk ports that are only useable when the card is fitted with an IP500 ATM4 trunk daughter card When in power fail the EF ports are connected to trunk port 12 9 16 9 RS232 DTE Port These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units and external expansion modules The DTE ports on external expansion modules are not used The RS232 DTE ports on the control units can be used for system maintenance and connection of serial terminal adaptors On 1P400 control units the po
320. lding _ Control Unit Secondary Building CO Analog Lines Analog Module Phone Module Primary Protection Boxes H Earthed Ducted _ PL bling e Cables of different types for example trunk lines phone extensions ground and power connections should be kept separate Analog Phone Digital Station DS Module External Contact Closure Device Approved Ground Point Approved Ground Foint e All cabling between buildings should be enclosed in grounded ducting Ideally this ducting should be buried e A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building This should be three point protection tip ring and ground Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time Analog Phone Extensions IP Office Barrier Box 133 e Connection from the expansion module to the Phones External expansion Supports a single connection phone must be via a surge protector at each end module POT 382 or PHONE 382 Maximum of 16 on any expansion and via the primary protection point in each ports only module building e The IP Office expansion module and control unit DS Phone Extensions ITWLinx towerMAX DS 2 132 a pali Me se the External expans
321. lect System 3 At the bottom of the screen select Backup System Files e The contents of the primary folder on the System SD card will be copied to the backup folder This process takes approximately 6 minutes Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select System Backup e The contents of the primary folder on the System SD card will be copied to the backup folder This process takes approximately 6 minutes IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 159 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7 4 2 Restore from the Backup Folder The contents of the backup folder on the System SD card can be copied to the primary folder Any files with matching file names will be replaced The IP Office is then restarted using the files now in the primary folder e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu
322. ll Logging Application 48 Call Status Application 48 Cards Analog Trunk 240 241 ATM4 241 ATM4U 240 BRI Trunk 241 E1 PRI 242 E1R2 PRI 243 Embedded Voicemail Memory 25 244 IP400 Voice Compression Modules 25 IP500 Analog Phone Base 209 IP500 Digital Station Base 212 IP500 Legacy Card Carrier 214 IP500 VCM 216 Modem 25 Small Office Edition Wireless 25 T1 PRI 242 VCM 245 Voice Compression 245 Castle Rock 139 Channels Compression 46 Clock 110 Compact Business Center Application 48 354 Compact Contact Center Application 48 354 Compression Channels 46 Conference Center Application 48 Configuration Create New 76 Erase 145 Connections Grounding 38 Out of Building 39 131 ContactStore Application 48 Components 353 License Requirements 353 PC Requirements 353 Control Unit IP406 V2 14 IP412 14 IP500 202 IP500 System Unit 14 Rack Mounting 40 SOE 14 Wall Mounting 40 Copy SD Card 161 Country Languages 47 Supported Locales 47 Create Configuration 76 D Daughter Cards Analog Trunk 22 220 BRI Trunk 22 221 PRI Trunk 222 PRI U Trunk 22 Trunk 22 DC I P Page 411 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 DC I P Port 370 DCI I P Port 376 DECT Handset 283 284 Phone 483 262 Region Availability 43 262 DevLink Application 48 DS IROB 132 Phone 48 132 262 Port 370 376 Region Availablility 43 262 DTE Port 144 Cable requirement 144 377 RS232 144 377 Settings 144 377 Dual PRI Trunk Card 24 239 E
323. ll expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system IP500 Digital Station A 16 Ports 700500699 30 Ports 700500698 TECGO2 ZO C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 IP500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 700500923 IP500 Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 232 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 RJ 21 Cable Pin Out The following pin out is used for the RJ 21 ports Ist RJ 21 Connector Port 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Not Used Pin Wire Ring 4 Brown White Ring 6 Blue Red Ring 8 Green Red Ring 9 Brown Red Slate Red Brown Black 40 Black Slate Slate Black Tip 41 Yellow Blue i Blue Yellow 42 _ Yellow Orange 17 Orange Yellow 43 Violet Slate 08 Slate Violet D Q m D IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 System Components IP500 Expansion Modules 2nd RJ 21 Connector Port Pin Wire er n e a so pepee o Ring 6 Blue Red eo Teo _ Ring 8 Green Red i Ring 9 Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 40
324. m maintenance The shut down can be either indefinite or for a set period of time after which the IP Office will automatically reboot During the shut down process the current configuration in the control unit s RAM memory is copied to the control units non volatile memory For 1P500v2 systems that location is the System SD card For control units with memory cards the memory cards can be shutdown and restarted 167 separately from the system WARNINGS e A shutdown must always be used to switch off the system Simply removing the power cord or switching off the power input may cause errors e This is not a polite shutdown any users calls and services in operation will be stopped Once shutdown the system cannot be used to make or receive any calls until restarted e The shutdown process takes up to a minute to complete When shutdown the CPU LED and the IP500 base card LEDs 1 and 9 if trunk daughter card fitted will flash red rapidly The memory card LEDs are extinguished Do not remove power from the system or remove any of the memory cards until the system is in the this state e To restart a system when shutdown indefinitely or to restart a system before the timed restart switch power to the system off and on again System Shutdown Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced System Shutdown 2 Using the Select IP Office menu the System Shutdown Mode menu is displayed System Shutdown Mode a
325. mage to the power supply cord including proper routing of the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a socket outlet 2 Switch on power to the control unit 3 New IP Office 500 control units are supplied with a base software level of 4 0 0 The CPU LED on these units will flash red until the unit is upgraded to the required level of released IP Office core software 4 The CPU LED on units that have already been upgraded from 4 0 0 will go through a green red cycle several times and then stay green on During this time other LEDs may flash as the unit goes through its power on self test cycle IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 180 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Applying Power The following are the basic default configuration settings for an IP Office system Network Settings LAN1 LAN2 WAN IP address 192 168 42 1 192 168 43 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 DHCP Mode Server Server No of DHCP IP Addresses 200 200 Extensions and Users A user is automatically created for each physical extension port detected in the system Users are assigned extension numbers starting from 201 User names take the form Extn201 Extn202 Hunt Group A single hunt group 200 called Main is created and the first 10 users are placed into that hunt group as members Incoming Call Routes Two default incoming call route
326. may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company For products approved after J uly 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXxX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following table USOC Jack IPO500 PRI 1U 04DU9 BN IPO500 PRI2U 04DU9 DN 1P400 PRI T1 04DU9 IKN 04DU9 ISN IPO500 ATM4U OL13A OL13B 1P400 ATM4U OL13C 02AC2 02LA2 02LB2 02LC2 02LR2 O2LS2 IPO500 ATM16 OL13A OL13B OL13C 02AC2 02GS2 02LA2 02LB2 02LC2 02LR2 02LF2 02GS2 02LS2 If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted servic
327. mber plan Enter a value and select if either Add or Subtract Value 100 Add Subtract 3 Click on the tal save icon and save the updated configuration back to the IP Office system Changing an Individual User s Extension Number 1 Select User Locate and select the relevant user IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 105 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 a On the User tab change the Extension number to the required new number User Mame Sones Password Confirm Password Full Hame Steve Jones 204 _ Ex Directory b Click on another field If an error warning appears it will most likely be due to a conflict with an existing use of that extension number e If this an error click Cancel to return the user to their original extension number e If this is intended as the other entry will be corrected click OK and then edit the other entry e When OK is clicked Manager will automatically propagate the number change to any hunt groups incoming call routes user buttons bridged appearance buttons and call coverage appearance buttons associated with the user s original extension number 2 If the user has an extension with which they are associated by being the extension s Base Extension setting that setting is not automatically updated If the user should still be associated with that extension by default the extension must be updated manually to match the user s new extension number
328. mbered 1 to 4 from left to right They can be used in any order However if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled The unit must not be used with uncovered slots Fe min ______m_mml_m_l Maximum Extensions Conference Parties Trunks Cards Voice Compression Channels Voicemail Channels Locales Software Level Power Supply Mounting Dimensions Memory Up to 384 extensions in IP Office Standard Version mode Up to 100 extensions in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Versionmodes 128 as standard but maximum 64 in any individual conference Silence suppression is applied to conferences with more than 10 parties 4 Any combination of IP500 trunk daughter cards and up to 2 1P400 trunk cards Up to 148 channels using up to 1P500 VCM 1P400 VCM and IP500 Combination cards Maximum 40 usable for Voicemail Pro TAPI WAV connection sessions subject to available licenses For Embedded Voicemail up to 6 2 by default additional channels require licenses Supported in all IP Office locales IP Office Standard Version Mode 6 0 minimum IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Mode 6 0 minimum IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version Mode 6 1 minimum IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version Mode 7 0 minimum Bin file ip500v2 bin Internal pow
329. ment of the bracket to the unit e Nuts and bolts for rack attachment e Brackets and cable ties for cable tidying As indicated in the diagram following the rack mounting bracket can be used in several positions on the unit P400 external expansion units used in an 1P500 system can also be rack mounted but use a separate 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit Environmental Requirements In addition to the existing environmental requirements 54 for an IP Office system the following additional factors must be considered when rack mounting a unit 1 Rack Positioning Ensure compliance with the rack manufacturers safety instructions For example check that the rack legs have been lowered and fixing brackets have been used to stop toppling 2 Elevated Operating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Therefore consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature Tma specified by the manufacturer e O Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F e O Operating Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing 3 Reduced Air Flow Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised Proper ventilation must be maintained The side ventilation slots on the IP500 control unit
330. mental requirements 54 This is especially important on 1P500 and IP500v2 control units which have ventilation slots at the side e Cable Access Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls ceilings floors and similar openings Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord including proper routing of the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a socket outlet IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 55 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 2 2 1 IP500 and IP500v2 Control Units The ventilation slots on the rear and sides should not be covered or blocked 445mm 17 5 Clearance S0mm 3 5 Unit 365mm 14 4 Total with clearance S4Smm 21 5 220mm 8 7 Clearance 90mm 3 5 2 2 2 External Expansion Modules The dimensions below are applicable to all IP Office external expansion modules Fimm 2 8 1 6U Clearance 5mm 3 d45mmi 17 5 Unit 245mm 9 7 Total with clearance 395rmm 15 7 Clearance 7 5mmy a IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 56 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Installation Requirements Space Requirements 2 2 3 Wall Mounting I1P500 1P500v2 control units and 1P500 external expansion modules can be wall mounted To do this a wall mounting kit is required in addition to suit
331. merica 700449473 700213390 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 All 700500923 I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 226 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Expansion Modules 9 5 2 BRI SO8 The So8 module can be used to add ETS BRI SO interface ports to the IP Office system These ports can then be used for the connection of ISDN devices Supported on 1P500 and IP500v2 The control unit must be running in IP Office Standard Version mode This module is not supported in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file nas0 16 bin I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The unit is supplied with an earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the unit s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can
332. module is used to add ETSI BRI S0 interface ports to the IP Office system These ports can then be used for the connection of ISDN devices Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file nas0 16 bin I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The unit is supplied with an earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the unit s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit e Older units were supplied with a 2 Pin 40W external power supply unit which used a locale specific locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 2 8Kg 6 3Ibs Boxed 4 1Kg 9 2Ibs IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 258 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules So8 Module Connections Per eee BRI 374 DC 1 P 376 DTE 144 EXPANSION 37 rh EXPAN
333. move the existing component using the Permanent Removal process above and adjust the configuration and reboot Then install the new component using the Adding a New Component process above IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 123 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 5 Swapping Extension Users Whilst the example below shows 2 users swapping extensions the method can be used to swap multiple users within the configuration and effecting the swaps after a single merge of the configuration changes For this example User A 202 and User B 203 want to swap extensions 1 Load the IP Office configuration and select amp Extension 2 Locate the extension with the Base Extension set to 202 ie matching User A s extension number e If the group pane is visible View Group Pane in IP Office Manager it shows the extension details ID Module Port and Base Extension Lal Avaya IP Office Manager 6 2 101104 IP500 Site A 4 2 101104 Administrator Administrator File Edit View jad E KR BOOTP 5 i Operator 3 6 IPSOO Site A sep System 1 4 Line 11 oe Control Unit 4 fi Extension 22 i User 26 ae HuntGroup 2 BA Short Code 69 cA Service 2 al RAS 2 Incoming Call Route 2 EE WianPork 0 atta Directory 1 rr Time Profile 0 ap Firewall Profile 1 GB IP Route 4 dg Account Code i0 Tools Help IPSOO Site 4 Extension Extension Module E
334. n may still require additional protection equipment see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections 39 e DTMF and LD dialing e Adjustable echo cancellation default 16ms Selectable to Off 8 16 32 64 and 128 milliseconds e Power Failure Port Regardless of the 1P500 card hosting it during power failure pins 4 and 5 of port 12 are connected to pins 7 and 8 In addition when fitted to an 1P500 Analog Phone 8 base card during power failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12 e License No license required e Maximum per Control Unit 4 e IP Office Software Level 4 0 410 1112 Daughter Card Ports 9 12 The LEDs for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status LIE LIE e Red On Error e RedFlash every 5 seconds Card e Red Slow Flash Initializing Okay e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IPO 500 Trnk Anlg 4 Uni IP Office 500 Trunk Card Analog 4 Universal 700417405 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 220 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards 9 4 2 BRI Trunk Cards This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for BRI To 375 trunks The card is available in 8 channel 4 physical trunks or 4 channel 2 physical trunks variants This card can be fitted to
335. n Installation Page 21 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 5 2 IP500 Trunk Cards Most 1P500 base cards 19 can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter cards to support the connection of trunks to the base card Each daughter card is supplied with the stand off pillars required for installation and a label to identify the daughter cards presence on the front of the base card after installation e IP500 Combination cards are pre fitted with a trunk daughter card which cannot be removed or changed for another type of trunk daughter card IP500 Analog Trunk Daughter Card 220 ts This card allows the base card to support 4 analog loop start trunks e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an IP500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 e Maximum 4 per control unit 1P500 PRI U Trunk Daughter Card 222 i This card allows the base card to support up to 2 PRI trunk connections The card is available in single and dual port variants The card can be configured for E1 PRI T1 robbed bit T1 PRI or E1R2 PRI trunks e Maximum 4 per control unit e The IP Office system supports 8 unlicensed B channels on each 1P500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected r
336. n Licenses These license are used to set what range of features the IP Office system supports e Essential Edition Any IP Office running IP Office Release 5 or higher software is licensed by default for Essential Edition mode no license for this is shown in the configuration The following additional licenses can be added to enable additional services and features e Essential Edition Additional Voicemail Ports IPO LIC R6 ESSNTL EDDITION ADD 2 229423 For 1P500v2 only Unlicensed the embedded voicemail provided by the system supports 2 simultaneous connections and 15 hours of storage This can be expanded up to 6 channels by the addition of licenses each of which enables an additional two channels For IP Office Release7 0 each license also enables an additional 5 hours of storage e Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro 1P400 LIC PREFRD VMPRO 171991 This license enables support for Voicemail Pro as the IP Office s voicemail server with 4 voicemail ports The Preferred Edition license allows the voicemail server to provide the services listed below Additional license can be added for additional voicemail features these are detailed separately This license was previously called Voicemail Pro 4 ports e Mailboxes for all users and hunt groups e Campaigns e Announcements for users and hunt groups e TTS email reading for users licensed to Mobile Worker or Power User profiles e Customizable call flows e Use of Co
337. n as DS module is used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system The DS module is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as DS16 and DS30 modules respectively The 1P400 Digital Station Module has been superseded by the P400 Digital Station Module V2 250 Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file nadcp 16 bin I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional P400 Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 3 5Kg 7 8lbos Boxed 4 8Kg 10 8lbs Based on DS30 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 252 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules Digital Station Module Connections D WT 16 ah IP200 Digital Station 130 20 2 22 23 Sd DS 25 26 sf 20 25 30
338. n grounded ducting Ideally this ducting should be buried e A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building This should be three point protection tip ring and ground Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time Analog Phone Extensions IP Office Barrier Box 133 e Connection from the expansion module to the Phones External expansion Supports a single connection phone must be via a surge protector at each end module POT 382 or PHONE 382 Maximum of 16 on any expansion and via the primary protection point in each ports only module building e The IP Office expansion module and control unit DS Phone Extensions ITWLinx towerMAX DS 2 132 aa die dr i the External expansion module DS Supports up to 4 connections POLSO JEA pa j 9 376 ports only This device was previously e The between building connection must be via referred to as the Avaya 146E earthed ducting preferable underground The cable must not be exposed externally at any point TCM Phone Extensions None Currently not supported Analog Trunks ITWLinx towerMAX CO 4x4 132 For installations in the Republic of South Africa the fitting of surge protection on analog trunks is a Supports up to 4 two wire lines requirement This device was previously l l l l l referred to as the Avaya 146C For
339. n the conditions that applied when the IP Office control unit was first started a PC can be connected as follows If the IP Office is not connected to a network Connect the PC directly to the IP Office It must be set to an address valid on the same network as the IP Office defaults above If the IP Office is connected to a network with no DHCP server Connect the PC directly to the IP Office It must be set to an address valid on the same network as the IP Office defaults above If the IP Office is connected to a network with a DHCP server Connect the PC to the network It must be set to be a DHCP client or to an address that is valid for the network IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 91 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 11 Starting the System 1 With the IP500v2 control unit shut down or unpowered insert the Avaya System SD card into the System SD slot on the rear of the control unit e Ensure that you have the correct card e Ensure that the card has the level of software required If necessary the card can be upgraded to match a version of IP Office Manager 745 2 Apply power to the external expansion modules if any The power outlet used must include a switch and in cases where the power cord includes an earth lead that outlet must have a protective earth connection 3 Apply power to the 1P500v2 control unit The power outlet used must include a switch and the power outlet must have a prot
340. nd has no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Please note that if you acquired the product from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE HTTP SUPPORT AVAYA COM LICENSEINFO ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS USES AND OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER AS APPLICABLE UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER AND AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE BY INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO YOU ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING DOW
341. nd the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Copyright Preventing toll fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there can be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya fraud intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com Trademarks Avaya and Aura are trademarks of Avaya Inc The trademarks logos and service marks Marks displayed in this site the documentation s and product s provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya its affiliates or other third parties Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark Nothing contained in this si
342. ndard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 367 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Ports IP Office Monitor can be used to display IP packet details including the source and destination Port numbers As well as displaying the port numbers in decimal IP Office Monitor also displays the names of more commonly used ports including IP Office specific ports For example src 23 is interpreted as src 23 Telnet The list below details the ports currently decoded by IP Office Monitor For a full list of assigned non IP Office ports see http www iana org assignments port numbers 20 File Transfer Default Data 21 File Transfer Control 23 Telnet 25 Simple Mail Transfer 37 Time 43 Who Is 53 Domain Name Server 67 Bootstrap Protocol Server 68 Bootstrap Protocol Client 69 Trivial File Transfer 70 Gopher 79 Finger 80 World Wide Web HTTP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol 123 Network Time Protocol 137 NETBIOS Name Service 138 NETBIOS Datagram Service 139 NETBIOS Session Service Protocols IP Office Monitor as well as displaying the Protocol number in decimal of packets also displays the names of the more common Protocols For example pcol 1 is decoded as pcol 1 ICMP 156 SQL Service 161 SNMP 162 SNMPTRAP 179 Border Gateway Protocol 1719 H 323Ras 1720 H 323 H 245 50791 IPO Voicemail 50792 IPO Network DTE 50793 IPO Solo Voicemail i e Wave driver for TAPI 50794 IPO Monitor 50795 IPO
343. ndard Version Installation Page 328 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 64 T7000 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module The T7000 telephone is an entry level digital set for basic low use office environments The T7000 is used primarily in the EMEA not available in North America 9 11 65 T7100 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 329 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 66 T7208 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 330 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 67 T7316 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module
344. ndard Version systems do not support both BRI and PRI trunks in the same system IP Office Standard Version systems support both BRI and PRI trunks in the same system Non I1P Office Standard Version systems are restricted to 12 BRI channels regardless of the BRI hardware installed Non IP Office Standard Version systems are to 1 single port PRI card Capacity is dependent on licenses voice compression resources and available bandwidth IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 11 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 1 1 Hardware Support Summary Note that even where indicated as supported the availability and support of equipment may still be subject to local restrictions IP Office IP Office IP Office IP Office Essential Essential Essential Standard Edition Edition Edition Version PARTNER Norstar Quick Version Version Version 4 A N gt NN BR BR Ww IP500v2 Control Unit 1P500 Control Unit 1P500 Digital Station Card 1P500 Analog Phone 2 8 Cards IP500 TCM8 Card IP500 VCM 32 64 Base Cards olvuvlrlol o miovibr U r 2 mi_ziwWwininid 29 5 2 J a fis O YIN 2 9 O an 916 oO lwl BS 4 4 5 slaul yvIN iola o lo 2 53 28 713 12 2 lo 2 S m m 2 ala elele 35 x 3 3 O n Oo ea cJ DI le O Dv Si oi UW O lt lt 2 2 0 2 M lo ni ND a Se Fee lice ee O 2 v la Y O OI fo zia g g E Za Ors is O SE e Si D al IP500 Base
345. ndpoints 38 license IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 285 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 20 3725 This DECT handset is supported with Avaya DECT R4 on IP Office Release 5 and higher e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license i IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 286 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 21 3740 The 3740 is supported with Avaya DECT R4 systems and IP Office Release 7 0 and higher e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 287 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 22 3749 The 3746 is a ruggedized DECT handset It is supported with Avaya DECT R4 systems and IP Office Release 7 0 and higher e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 288 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 23 3810 The phone uses a wireless 900MHz digital protocol to connect to its ba
346. ne Short Codes Channels Line Number Line SubType ETSI w Card Telephone Number TEI Incoming Group ID Outgoing Group ID do Number of Channels bo E Gukgoing Channels Roi 3 Prefix National Prefix Voice Channels Bo Data Channels po 19 DL ii 0 0 0 0 International Prefix IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 108 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Initial Configuration Disable Unused Trunks e T1 T1 PRI and E1R2 Trunks To disable the whole trunk on the main form set the Admin option to Out of Service Otherwise select the Channels tab and set those channels that are not used to Out of Service PRI 24 Line Channels Channel Groups Line Appearance Direction Bearer Type Edit D5 J Oo on fe oo Ko A co oOo OOO E 0 O 0 O O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 Lum D i AA Daaa aAa Aaa AAA AGA G A G A r05 r G ro US U9 10 Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Bothway Ary Ari Ary Ar Ary Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Ground Start Out Of Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out Of Service Out OF Service Out Of Service Out OF Service Out Of Service Out OF Service Out Of Service Out OF Service Out Of Service Out OF S
347. ne system operators or receptionists Its displays details of calls directed to the user and allows them to quickly see the status of the callers required destination and transfer the call The SoftConsole user is able to access a range of details about the status of users and groups on the IP Office system e The IP Office SoftConsole works in conjunction with a physical IP Office extension phone to provide the speech path for calls It is not supported for use with an IP softphone e Up to 4 simultaneous SoftConsole users can be licensed DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 Languages Brazilian Chinese Simplified Danish Dutch English French Finnish German Italian Korean Latin Spanish Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish License w Licensed application See below PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements Hard Disk Free Space 2003 Server Windows 7 e Vista Support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office Ports SoftConsole SoftConsole SoftConsole exe UDP 50799 UDP 50796 Licenses Receptionist Adds one additional SoftConsole user A maximum of four IPO LIC RECEPTIONIST 171987 SoftConsole user can be licensed RFA IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 360 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 201
348. nection NET TNV Operating within the limits of SELV BRI ports BRI ISDN connection NET TNV Operating within the limits of SELV Analog ports Two wire analog trunk TNV3 Power fail ports Two wire analog trunk TNV3 DTE port Async Data connection SELV Analog Telephone Ports Telephone Extension ports TNV2 Digital Telephone Ports Telephone Extension ports SELV LAN ports 10 100 BaseT attachment to LAN SELV Expansion ports Expansion Module connector SELV Audio port Connector for Music on Hold SELV External Control port Connector for Controlling Ancillary SELV circuits DC Input port Connector for DC input power SELV Interconnection circuits shall be selected to provide continued conformance with the requirements of EN 609050 1992 A3 1995 clause 2 3 for SELV circuits and with the requirements of clause 6 for TNV circuits after connections between equipment IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 402 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Safety Statements Port Safety Classification 10 6 EMC Directive 889 336 EEC EMC Directive CISPR 22 1993 including A1 A2 AS NZ 3548 1995 ROW e Di WARNI NG This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the
349. nection of terminal equipment is controlled by qualified installation personnel 3 To conform with the Receive Objective Loudness Rating at distances greater than 2 7km from the central office on analog trunks a receive gain of 1 5dB must be set IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 409 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Index A Add Ons 201B Recorder 338 4450 Features 339 EU24 Features 342 EU24BL Features 343 Programmable Buttons 339 342 343 346 348 T3 DSS Features 346 XM24 Features 348 Analog Phone Barrier Boxes 133 Phone Region Availability 43 262 Port 370 373 Trunk Card 24 239 Application Call Center 48 354 Call Logging 48 CD DVD 48 ContactStore 353 CTI 48 Maintenance 48 Manager 355 Monitor 356 Phone Manager 358 SoftConsole 360 System Status Application 361 TAPI 362 User 48 Voicemail 48 VoiceMail Pro 363 Assessments Network 45 VolP 45 Audio Codec Conversion 46 Port 370 Audio Port 373 Availability of Equipment 9 B Backup SD Card 159 Barrier Boxes Analog Phone 133 Rack Mounting 134 Base Card Analog Phone 19 205 Digital Station 19 205 Legacy Card Carrier 19 205 VCM 19 205 Batteries Lithium 400 BRI So Port 374 Trunk Port 375 Port 370 C Cable Access Requirements 55 Clearance Requirements 55 Cables Maximum Cable Distances 36 371 Standard IP Office 36 371 Cabling IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Index Lightening Protection 39 131 Ca
350. nference Meet Me functions on 1P500 e Call recording to mailboxes and IP500v2 systems e Advanced Edition This license enables the additional features listed below A Preferred Edition license is a pre requisite for this license e IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION RFA LIC DS 229424 e IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION TRIAL RFA LIC DS 229425 e Support for Customer Call Reporter including 1 e Voicemail Pro Visual Basic Scripting supervisor l l l e Voicemail Pro call recording to ContactStore 2 e Voicemail Pro database interaction IVR e Voicemail Pro call flow generic TTS 8 ports 1 1 Provides up to 8 ports of TTS for use with Speak Text actions within Voicemail Pro call flows Not used for user TTS email reading 2 Note In a Small Community Network using centralized voicemail this license only enables ContactStore support for the central IP Office Remote IP Offices in the network require their own Advanced Edition license or a VMPro Recordings Administrator license Upgrade Licenses Existing IP Office systems being upgraded to IP Office Release 6 0 or higher may require a software upgrade license e New I P500v2 Systems For the first 90 days a new IP500v2 control unit will run any supported IP Office Release without requiring an upgrade license The highest level run is written into the system s memory not the SD card and that becomes a permanent entitlement for the control unit However after 90 days the IP500v2 will require
351. ng of the same alerts to SMTP email or Syslog addresses e The alarms configurable for output via SNMP can also be output to SMTP email and or Syslog e The use of SNMP only supported with IP Office Standard Version mode systems it is not supported with IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems e Monitor SysMon 356 Monitor is a tool that can show a trace of all activity on the IP Office system in detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge Despite that however all IP Office installers and maintainers need to understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 48 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview IP Office Software Applications User Applications The IP Office supports a number of applications that operate in parallel with users telephones These applications are installed from the IP Office Applications DVD The one X Portal for IP Office server can also be installed as part of the IP Office Application DVD installation Some of them require licenses to be entered into the IP Office system s configuration to enable features or to set the number of simultaneous users These applications are supported in IP
352. ngle PRI T1 Trunk Cards 242 wf i Supports PRI 23B D trunks and T1 Robbed Bit 24B trunks through a single RJ45 port The mode of operation is selected in the IP Office configuration Single E1 PRI Trunk Cards 242 ff ff Supports PRI 30B D trunks through a single RJ 45 port The port can be configured for PRI or QSIG operation Single ELR2 Trunk Cards 243 uf Supports PRI 30B D trunks using E1R2 signaling Available in coaxial or RJ 45 connector variants Coaxial variants are not supported on an I1P500 carrier card Dual PRI Trunk Cards 242 Ni nf As the single PRI cards above but supporting the connection of two PRI trunks On the IP406 V2 supported in Slot A only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 239 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 7 1 Analog Trunk Card Uni ATM4U This card supersedes the previous Analog Trunk cards and is referred to as the ATM4U It can be identified by a label on the base of the card The card is supported on IP Office software 2 1 36 and higher Unlike the previous ATM4 card the same ATM4U card variant can be used in all locales For systems running IP Office software 3 1 or higher the echo cancellation used on each trunk can be switched off or on 16ms The card provides 4 RJ45 sockets for analog trunk connections 3875 The card only supports loop start trunks For ground start trunks an Analog Trunk expansion module 248 should be used e Power Failure
353. ning risk dB WARNI NG During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment e Additional protective equipment In addition to grounding additional protective equipment will be required in the following situations e On any Digital Station or Phones external expansion module connected to an extension located in another building Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations 39 e In the Republic of South Africa on all Analog Trunk external expansion modules ATM16 and on any control units containing an analog trunk cards ATM4 ATM4U Tools Required e O M4 Cross Head Screwdriver e O Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade Parts and Equipment Required e O 14AWG Solid copper wire for ground connection e O Cable sleeve matching local regulator requirements Typically green for a functional ground and green yellow for a protective ground The ground point on IP Office control units and expansion modules are marked with a rh or E symbol Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground I P500 1P500v2 Control Unit On IP500 control units the ground point is located above the RS232 DTE port External Expansion Modules On expansion modules the ground point is a 4mm screw located towards
354. nistration Manager Simplified View __ Manager Advanced View _ IP Office Customer Call Reporter ___ Monitor System Monitor Phone Manager _ _ System Status Application _ Voicemail Pro Locales Canada Mexico United States Voicemail Embedded Voicemail Arabic Chinese Mandarin Chinese Cantonese Danish Dutch Languages English UK English US Finnish French French Canadian German Italian Korean Norwegian Portuguese Portuguese Brazilian Russian Swedish Spanish Spanish Latin Spanish Argentinean As above plus Hungarian Greek Polish Minus Arabic TEAST SLI TETAS TH II Argentina Australia Bahrain Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Colombia Denmark Bahrain Egypt Kuwait Morocco Egypt Finland France Pakistan Germany Greece Hong Kong Qatar Saudi Hungary Iceland India Italy Arabia South Korea Kuwait Mexico Morocco Africa Turkey Netherlands New Zealand United Arab Norway Oman Pakistan Peru Emirates Poland Portugal Qatar Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States Venezuela Oman of Default UserName Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 13 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 2 Control Units The base of any IP Office
355. nk ports The 1P400 ATM4 analog trunk cards and 1P500 analog trunk cards only support loop start trunks The ATM16 Analog Trunk module supports both loop start and ground start trunks switchable within the IP Office configuration a pese RJ45 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Ring 5 Tip 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 Not used e Off Hook Current 25mA E I MPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth 38 gt e fh WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 and to surge protection equipment 39 9 16 3 AUDIO Port This port is found on the rear of all IP Office control units It is used for the input of an external music on hold sound source Note that if the IP Office has loaded an internal music on hold sound file any input from this socket is ignored The port is a 3 5mm stereo jack socket suitable for use with the most standard audio leads and connection to the headphone output socket of most audio systems The use of a headphone socket allows simple volume adjustment Connection via a Line Out socket may require additional equipment in order to adjust the volume level pinne Pesctntoo Common Common Left Audio In Left Channel Right Audio In Right Channel e Input impedance
356. nks Ports can be configured as either loop start or ground start trunks through the IP Office configuration In the event of power failure Analog ports 1 and 2 are directly connected to analog extension ports PF1 and PF2 respectively If used the connected phones must be clearly labeled as power failure devices This is only supported for loop start analog trunks DC 1 P 376 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DTE 144 25 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION 379 RJ45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module PF 38 RJ45 socket Power failure analog extension ports See Analog section above Ground point Used for connection of a functional earth 3 if required On older modules where this screw is not present the top center cover screw should be used instead e IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth 38 iT WARNING Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground 38 and to surge protection equipme
357. nrggogk aomas TC Weeose 7440 Handset ________ n78gogore Digital Mobility 1 9 GHz solution North America Digital Mobility 1 8 GHz solution Europe Hong Kong Australia New Zealand Digital mobility Base station is OOS O ireesines Digital Mobilty Repeaters O s Digital Mobilty Repeaters oo os Digital Mobility 1 8 GHz solution South America 7434 South America nreeoace6 _ Taaa South America meeoape _ Digital mobility Base station ia O OoOo o ooo Digital Mobilty Repeater2 oS o IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 349 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 13 2 DECT R4 Avaya 3720 3725 3740 and 3749 phones connect to the DECT base stations in a DECT R4 system They then connect to the IP Office via the IP network Avaya 3701 and 3711 phones are also supported but only as GAP compatible devices IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 350 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Ancilliary Systems 9 14 Applications This section outlines the requirements for various IP Office applications These are just outlines for full details refer to the specific installation manuals for those applications and to the IP Office Technical Bulletins 9 14 1 IP Office Application Server The IP Office Application Server is a single server installation package for the IP Office applications listed below The DVD installs the Cent
358. nsertion Having prepared each IP500 base card by adding any trunk daughter card 79 or 1P400 legacy card 80 the base card can be inserted into the control unit e fT Warnings e Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards e Cards must never be added or removed from the control unit while it has power connected e Tools Required e O 5mm Flat blade screwdriver e O Anti static wrist strap and ground point Installing an IP500 Card 1 Check that there is no power to the control unit 2 Using a flat bladed screwdriver remove the cover from the slot on the front of the control unit that will be used for each card being installed This cover is no longer required but should be retained until installation has been completed 3 Allowing the card to rest against the bottom of the slot begin sliding it into the control unit When half inserted check that the card rails have engaged with the slot edges by trying to gently rotate it If the card rotates remove it and begin inserting it again 4 The card should slide in freely until almost fully inserted At this point apply pressure at the base of the front of the card to complete insertion 5 Using a flat bladed screwdriver secure the card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 81 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 6 Wall Mounting 1P500 1P500v2 control units and 1P500 external expansion modules can be wall mounted
359. nstallation _ Page 191 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Wall Mounting Process Figure 1 Figure 4 Figure 6 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 1 Shutdown the System Ensure that the system has been shutdown and power has been removed from all the units e f mounting a control unit you must wait at least 15 minutes after removing the power cord before fitting the flame screen e Shutdown the system using a shutdown command and then remove power Do not simply remove the power 2 Fit the Flame Screen Mandatory Control Units Only See Figure 1 E WARNING The flame screen mesh must be fitted a Remove the cards or blank slot covers from the left hand and right hand slots b Insert the flame screen into the bottom of the control unit with the two black plastic pegs at the front c Press the two pegs through the air flow holes in the control unit casing d Check that the pegs have come through and have secured the flame screen in place and that the screen is flush with the chassis 3 Attach Brackets on One Side See Figure 2 On one side of the unit attach one pair of the metal brackets e Only use the screws provided with the wall mounting kit for attaching the metal brackets 4 Attach the Cable Cover and Bracket See Figure 3 Use of the cable covers is optional If not being used simply attach the other pair of brackets to the other side of the un
360. nstallation Page 142 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes SNMP 6 11 Reset Button The IP500 and IP500v2 control units have a Reset button Pressing the button while the control unit is starting up will pause the start up until the button is released The effect of pressing the button during normal operation will depend on how long the button is pressed and is indicated by the CPU LED Press Duration CPU LED Summary seconds Off O to 5 None None 5 to 10 Orange Reboot When Free Reboot when free with new incoming outgoing call barring A reboot using the reset button is recorded in the Audit Trail 10 to 30 Flashing orange Erase Configuration Erase the configuration alarm log and audit trail Immediate Reboot Immediate reboot without waiting for active calls to end See Erasing the configuration 145 for full details 30 to 40 Red Erase All Erase configuration alarm log and core software See Erasing the Operational Software 148 for full details Over 40 Flashing green None None 6 12 AUX Button IP500v2 control units have an AUX button This button can be used as follows If pressed during a restart of the control unit the control unit skip booting 155 from the primary folder on the System SD card If pressed for more than 5 seconds when a system is running the control unit will shutdown 117 for 10 minutes IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 143 IP Office 7 0 15 601042
361. nstallation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician e Trunk Connections The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ 45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ 45 to RJ 45 cable However connection at the line provider s end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers equipment e RJ 11 Phone Connectors Many phones use RJ 11 sockets and are supplied with RJ 11 to RJ11 cables RJ 11 plugs can be inserted into RJ 45 sockets and in many case the connection will work However this is not recommended or supported as the connection lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected An RJ 45 to R 11 cable 376 is available for these connections IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 371 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Standard IP Office Cables The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems The maximum length is applicable if the standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternate cable Cable Description SAP Code Standard Maximum Length Length 9 Way DTE Cable 144 Connects to control unit RS232 DTE port 9 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling DS Line Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11 socketed TT700047871 4m 13 2 See table Cable 376 DS and analog phones below BRI PRI Trunk Cable 375 Connects BRI PRI trunk ports to the line 700213440 3m 9 10 provider s network termination point R
362. nt 39 All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system 1P400 Analog Trunk 16 America America 700211360 Europe Europe 700241680 New Zealand New Zealand 700241698 1EC60320 C7 Power Cord CEE7 16 Europe 700213382 BS1363 United Kingdom 700213374 NEMA1 15 America 700213390 Korea Korea 700254519 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit All 700210800 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 249 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 9 2 Digital Station V2 The IP400 Digital Station V2 also known as DS V2 is used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system The DS V2 is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as DS16 V2 and DS30 V2 respectively The DS V2 supersedes the original 1P400 Digital Station now referred to as a DS V1 The module version is indicated by labels both the base and the rear of the module Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 2 1 31 minimum Bin file nadcpV2 bin I ncluded Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is sup
363. ny problems in writing to the telephone company 2 Equipment that is designed to be connected using internal wiring is typically not lightning protected Hence Avaya IP Office extension cabling must not leave the building For installations where telephones and or other standard tip ring devices are installed in another building then lightning protection is required see Out of Building Telephone Installations 39 gt A Hazard Symbol The shock hazard symbol is intended to alert personnel to electrical hazard or equipment damage The following precautions must also be observed when installing telephone equipment 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 4 Always use caution when working with telephone lines IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 400 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Safety Statements Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols 10 3 Trunk Interface Modules IP Office control units To ensure the validation of the approvals only the following types of trunk interface cards must be fitted in the following Notes USA Canada IP500v2 A M ll vl IP500 nil nil nil Rest of World Quad BRI Fi IP500v2
364. o system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select System for the System SD card or Option for the Optional SD card 5 Select Shutdown e At the back of the control unit confirm that the appropriate memory card LED is off e The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 120 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Memory Card Removal Card Reinsertion Reinserting a memory card into a system that is already switched on will automatically restart card operation However if the card has been shutdown but not removed it can be restarted using Manager without requiring a reboot Card Startup Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Startup 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK Card Startup Using the System Status Application 3 Start System Status 67 and access the IP Office s status output 4 lIn the navigation panel select System 3 Select Memory Cards 4 Select either System Card or Optional Card 5 At the bottom of the screen select Start Up Card Startup Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1
365. o Style variants of the phones are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone s AUX socket A maximum of 4 ETR 34D phones are supported on a system with a maximum of 2 on any individual ETR6 base card IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 324 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 56 M7100 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module 9 11 57 M7100N Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module 2 1 L Patt ase ii 2 peri ia yp 5 pie ete ajara da IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 325 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 58 M7208 Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports provided by an 1P500 TCM8 base card or on a DS16A DS30A external expansion module 9 11 59 M7208N Avaya M and T Series phones are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 and higher on an 1P500v2 They can be connected to digital station ports
366. o Vista Windows 7 2003 2008 R2 32 64 32 32 uf af _ aaa p ee af f af ef af e A e A a E plus campaigns ContactStore _ i J ee e o ee e SoftConsole IP Office Manager System Monitor System Status Application TAPI 1st Party TAPI 3rd Party Phone Manager Lite Pro Phone Manager PC SoftPhone O O lt lt ji e e 0 A A O Xx oO oO 3 y 3 3 O o Vv Dv OS n n O T e piz S o s 410 0 F oa D e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Virtual Server Support For IP Office Release 7 0 all applications supported on Windows server operating systems are supported while running on the following virtual servers e VMWare e Microsoft Virtual Server e Microsoft Server Hyper V Browser Application Support The following applications are accessed using web browsers The table below details the browsers tested by Avaya Application Windows MET Internet Firefox Opera Safari Chrome Safari Explorer IP Office Application Server 7 43 421 432 432 Voicemail Pro uMs 47 43 42 432 432 System Status Application Microsoft Outlook Support Where IP Office applications interact with Microsoft Outlook for IP Office Release 6 1 the versions of Outlook su
367. o cover order processing and delivery Separate installation packages for IP Office applications can also be downloaded from the Avaya support website at http support avaya com IP Office Release 7 0 Admin and 2 These DVDs contain installation packages for all the main IP 700500928 User DVD Set Office administration and user applications They also contain documentation for IP Office e DVD 1 Contains the IP Office Administrator Applications suite IP Office Documentation IP Office User Applications IP Office Voicemail Pro e DVD 2 Contains the Customer Call Reporter ContactStore for IP Office and one X Portal for IP Office applications Voicemail Pro ScanSoft TTS DVD 2 Contains text to speech engines for use with Voicemail Pro s Set TTS functions Supports the same languages as Voicemail Pro pre recorded prompts except Hungarian IP Office Application Server DVD 2 Install DVD for Voicemail Pro and one X Portal for IP Office 700501420 Set applications as a Linux based server The second DVD contains open source material used for the first DVD e It is acceptable to make copies of the Avaya IP Office DVDs listed above However the content must remain intact unaltered and without change or addition Avaya does not accept any liability and responsibility for damage or problems arising from the use of such copies Programming Applications The following applications are used to program and maintain an IP Office system Typically they
368. o independent switches controlled by the IP Office AC power input port RJ45 socket With the WAN port forms a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover ports This switch is used to restart the IP Office optionally erasing the configuration and or the core software in the process See Reset Button 143 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance Not used RJ45 socket With the LAN port forms a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover ports Used for connection of a functional or protective ground 194 Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 204 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Control Unit 9 3 IP500 Base Cards The IP500 and IP500v2 control units have 4 slots for the insertion of 1P500 base cards The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right Normally they can be used in any order however if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled Each base card includes an integral front panel with ports for cable connections Typically the first 8 ports on the left are for connection of extension devices The 4 ports on the left are used for connection of trunks if a trunk daughter card 22 gt is added to
369. o not require voice compression channels with the following exceptions e Short code confirmation ARS camp on and account code entry tones require a voice compression channel e Devices using G723 require a voice compression channel for all tones except call waiting When a call is connected e If the IP devices use the same audio codec no voice compression channel is used e If the devices use differing audio codecs a voice compression channel is required for each Non IP Device to Non No voice compression channels are required IP Device This is provided from the IP Office s TDM bus and therefore requires a voice compression channel when played to an IP device Conferencing resources are managed by the conference chip which is on the IP Office s TDM bus Therefore a voice compression channel is required for each IP device involved ina conference This includes services that use conference resources such as call listen intrusion call recording and silent monitoring Page Calls to IP Device P Office 4 0 and higher only uses G729a for page calls therefore only requiring one channel but also only supporting pages to G729a capable devices Voicemail Services and Calls to the IP Office voicemail servers are treated as data calls from the TDM bus Therefore I P Devices calls from an IP device to voicemail require a voice compression channel Fax Calls These are voice calls but with a slightly wider frequency range than spoken vo
370. ocales outside North America e IP Office Partner Version A system fitted with this type of card will default to U Law telephony and IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version mode Key System operation Supported only in North American locales e IP Office Norstar Version A system fitted with this type of card will default to A Law telephony and IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version mode Key System operation Supported only in Middle East and North African locales e Avaya Branch Gateway This type of SD card intended to be used with lt GATEWAY gt systems The Avaya Branch Gateway System SD card can only be used for Avaya Branch Gateway operation and cannot be used to change modes to IP Office You also cannot use or change an IP Office SD card for use with an Avaya Branch Gateway system Avaya Branch Gateway systems are not covered by this documentation PCM Encoding e A Law or Mu Law PCM Pulse Code Modulation is a method for encoding voice as data In telephony two methods PCM encoding are widely used A law and Mu law also called U law Typically Mu law is used in North America and a few other locations while A law by the rest of the world As well as setting the correct PCM encoding for the region the A Law or Mu Law setting of an IP Office system when it is first started affects a wide range of regional defaults relating to line settings and other values e For IP400 IP Office systems each control units was manufac
371. ogeneous materials in the parts is above the relevant threshold of the SJ T 11363 2006 standard REET ARMISIOFAERENO MEFENE Teese SR Hr Reet SEPARA SIA This table shows where these substances may be found in Avava s electronic information products as of the date of manufacture of the enclosed product Note that some of the component types listed above may or may not be a part of the enclosed product Bae ho DI E EER EAT AI m eS AFRE P f he FE mE BIER SHRIMP IRS HEA P RPS RE A E RE 2A ATOMI FA GUND BAR AL HAE a bw A RE E 305 ao At PA Te Sse PEA The Environmentally Friendly Use Penod EFUP for all enclosed products and their parts are per the symbol shown here unless otherwise marked Certain products have a different EFUP for example telephones and so are marked to reflect such The Environmentally Friendly Use Period is valid only when the product is operated under the conditions defined in the product manual IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 405 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 10 7 4 European Union 1 999 and 112 calls must not be barred Doing so will invalidate the approval 2 All connections at the MDF shall be identifiable by suitable labeling 3 The CE mark displayed on IP Office equipment indicates the systems compliance with the EMC LVD and R amp TTE Directives and common technical regulations for Primary Rate and Basic Rate ISDN 4 All ports for the connection of oth
372. ogram and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time c Switch off power to the IP Office control unit d Power on the control unit and press the escape key every second until you get a Loader message Below is an example P12 Loader 2 4 CPU Revision 0x0900 e Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK f If an OK response is not received check the settings of your terminal program and repeat the process above 3 Proceed with the erasure process e To erase the alarm log enter AT X1 e To erase the current configuration enter AT X2 A typical response if Sector 2 Erase NV Config followed by OK Enter AT X3 A typical response is Sector Erases Config followed by a series of OK responses 4 Switch power to the control unit off and then back on Within the terminal program you should see various messages as the control unit performs various start up tasks 5 Close the terminal program session 6 Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit s now defaulted configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 146 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes DTE Port Maintenance 6 13 3 Defaulting Security Settings Procedure Defaulting Security Settings This process defaults the IP Office s security settings but does not alter its configuration settings 1 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DT
373. older e An alarm will be shown in the System Status Application It will also generate an alarm if the card in any slot is not compatible These alarms are also output as SNMP Syslog or email alarms e The IP Office Manager Select IP Office menu will display an Ri icon indicating that the IP Office system is running using software other than from the System SD card s primary folder e The configuration can be read but will be read only Attempting to send a configuration to the system will cause the error message Failed to save configuration data Internal error Bypassing the System SD Card Primary Folder The control unit can be forced to bypass the System SD card s primary folder and non volatile memory when starting This is done by pressing the Aux button while applying power to the control unit This action may be necessary if following an upgrade of the IP Office system it is determined that a roll back to the previously backed up firmware and configuration is required Using the Aux button should restore system operation using the backup folder files while the installer then restores the contents of the primary folder to a previous release IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 156 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Booting from the SD Cards 7 2 Creating an IP Office SD Card The processes below can be applied to Avaya IP Office SD cards They can also be applied to non Avaya SD cards
374. older on the System SD card and then restart the IP Office system Upload System Upload a set of IP Office software and embedded Files 164 voicemail prompts to the System SD card View Files 158 View the folders and files on the control unit memory cards The actions below can be performed on cards in a SD card reader on a PC running IP Office Manager wf wf Format 157 Reformat a card for IP Office usage without removing the Feature Key serial number e dB This process will erase all existing files on the card m U1 Recreate 157 Create the folder structure on a memory card and copy a set of IP Office software files into those folders E EE IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 153 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Card Specification Non Avaya cards can be used in the Optional SD slot as long as they match or exceed the standard below e SDHC 4GB minimum Class 2 Single partition FAT32 format SD Card Folders The System SD card contains the following folders system e primary e imar Contains the firmware files for the IP Office control unit external expansion modules and LP y supported phones The folder can also contain music on hold files and license key files This is the 2 backup main set of files used by the IP Office system when booting up Also contains the stored copy of Pima the IP Office configuration _lidoc idynamic 2 packup y Contains a copy of th
375. ome disconnected Cable lengths up to 305 m 1000 ft using 0 5mm 24AWG wires do not require a power booster Lengths up to 790 m 2600 ft are supported if an auxiliary power supply booster is used Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ 45 to RJ 11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ 45 port to a TCM phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions l T A fain E cn Al ci 1L m 4 Meters 3 2 Feet Rds SIC ML Not used Not used Not used Signal 1 Signal 2 Not used au fh WN Not used ON OU PWN HP Not used e SAP Code T700047871 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 385 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 17 Licences Various IP Office features and applications require entry of license keys into the system s configuration The license keys are unique 32 character codes based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the feature key dongle 236 installed with the IP Office system The serial number is printed on the feature key dongle and prefixed with SN 1P500 or FK IP500v2 It can also be viewed in the system configuration using IP Office Manager e For IP500 and IP500v2 systems the feature key dongle takes the form of a card smart media or SD card respectively inserted into the control unit The card is a mandatory item for these systems even if they use no licensed featur
376. omponents 363 License Requirements 363 PC Requirements 363 VolP Assessments 45 W Wall Mounting Control Units 40 Wall Mounting Requirements 54 WAN Port 24 239 370 Waterproof Phone 279 Web Sites 51 WiFi Phone 278 279 280 281 282 Wireless Phone 289 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Index Page 415 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 417 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements 2011 Avaya Inc All rights reserved IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 418 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011
377. on Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license 1010 Main module with camera mircrophone and remote control IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 264 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 2 1120 1140 1220 1230 These Avaya SIP telephones are supported by IP Office Release 6 1 and higher e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license 1120 Telephone 1140 Telephone 1120 Telephone 1140 Telephone IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 265 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 3 1403 This phone is supported with IP Office Release 6 0 and higher Connects via DS port I P Office Release 6 0 Programmable Buttons w 3 Headset Socket x Handsfree Speaker f f Microphone Message Waiting Lamp wf Display 2 x 16 backlit Supported Add Ons None Upgradeable Firmware ul Fixed Telephony Function Keys 4 A SPEAKER x DP HEADSET MUTE sd alla VOLUME UP xA CONTACTS X EA MESSAGE f amp F HOLD A C C TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN x CALL LOG prop ERJ REDIAL CCC CONFERENCE MENU 1403 Telephone Black 700469927 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 266 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011
378. on in the upgrade wizard display 8 Repeat the process as required IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 127 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 6 2 Using an SD Card In addition to using the traditional P Office Upgrade Wizard 126 1P500v2 control units can be upgraded by loading the required set of firmware files onto the System SD card and rebooting the system e fT IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com e l Upgrade Licenses Some upgrades may require entry of upgrade licenses e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot There are a number of ways in which this can be done Method Description Location Software Embedded Files Voicemail Prompts Using Manager 165 Using IP Office Manager the contents of the card are Local or compared to the files that Manager has available and Remote are upgraded if necessary upgraded using IP Office Manager Upgrade from This method uses an SD card loaded with the required Local Optional SD Card 166 version of IP Of
379. one 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 400m 1310 4412D Phone 1000m 3280 700m 2295 400m 1310 400m 1310 4424D 500m 1640 500m 1640 400m 1310 400m 1310 9500 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 TCM without power 305m 1000 booster with power 790m 2600 booster Analog Phones 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1640 800m 2620 ETR Phones 305m 1000 305m 1000 122m 400 122m 400 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 37 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 7 5 Grounding All IP Office control units and external expansion modules must be connected to a functional ground Where the unit is connected to a power outlet using a power cord with an earth lead the power outlet must be connected to a protective earth Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks In some cases such as ground start trunks in addition to being a protective measure this is a functional requirement for the equipment to operate In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high lightning risk e iT WARNING During installation do not assume that ground points are
380. onfiguration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt in the primary folder on the Optional SD card are copied to the primary folder on the System SD card This process takes approximately 5 minutes e When the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted Copying Software Files from the Optional SD Card Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select Upgrade Binaries e The software files all files in the folder except the configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt in the primary folder on the Optional SD card are copied to the primary folder on the System SD card This process takes approximately 5 minutes e When the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 166 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Upgrading Card Software 7 6 Removing SD Cards fh Card Memory cards should always be shutdown 167 before being removed when the system is running Though the card slot LEDs indicate when data is bein
381. ons e Power Cords 34 Depending on the locale different power cords need to be ordered for each control unit external expansion module and any phones or devices using external power supply units e Cables 36 The IP Office is designed primarily for connection to a structured cabling system using CAT3 UTP cabling This approach allows telephone and data traffic to share the same wiring infrastructure and simplifies equipment moves e Mounting Kits 40 The control unit can be used free standing with external expansion modules stacked above it With optional rack mounting kits the control unit and external expansion modules can also be rack mounted Alternatively with an optional wall mounting kit the 1P500 control unit can be wall mounted 1P500 external expansion modules can also be wall mounted e Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes 39 Where the installation includes extensions in other buildings additional protective equipment is required This equipment may also be required in areas where the lightning risk is high e Phones 43 IP Office systems support a variety of Avaya digital and IP phones plus analog phones e Application DVDs The IP Office applications can be ordered on a number of DVDs In addition they can be downloaded from the IP Office section of the Avaya support web site http support avaya com IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 16 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System
382. ons are e A call is unanswered e A busy tone is received e A reorder tone is received Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 Automatic Dialers When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evenings Toll Restriction and Least Cost Routing Equipment The software contained in this equipment to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes FCC Part 68 Supplier s Declarations of Conformity Avaya Inc in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB 168 label identification number complies with the FCC s Rules and Regulations 47 CFR Part 68 and the Administrative Council on Terminal
383. ontrol unit Select the link for the System Status Application 2 Once System Status has started it will request the details of the IP Office system to which you want it to connect Online sine Logon Bie ido ere 197 168 427 1270 Services Base TCP Port Beene ie eer 197 168 427 200 User Name Password M Auto reconnect e Control Unit IP Address Enter the IP address of the IP Office control units LAN interface or use the drop down to select a previously used address e Services Base TCP Port This should match the Services Base TCP Port setting of the IP Office system set in that systems security settings The default is 50804 e Local IP Address If the PC has more than one IP address assigned to its network card or multiple network cards the address to use can be selected if necessary This allows System Status to be run on a PC that is already running an SSI connection to the IP Office for the IP Office Customer Call Reporter application e User Name Password Enter a user name and password that has been provided for System Status usage By default this is the same as the user name and password used with IP Office Manager This must be the name of an IP Office service user name that has been configured for system status access in the IP Office s security settings e Auto Reconnect If selected System Status will attempt to reconnect using the same settings if connection to the IP Office is lost 3 Enter the required d
384. or daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Trunk Green on Card fitted Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Trunk Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor BRI Trunk Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use External Expansion Module LEDs e Green on Module okay e Red flashing Module starting up Loading firmware IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 93 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e Green flashing Module starting up Loading firmware 1P500 DS16A 30A module e Red on Error IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 94 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Starting the System 4 12 Changing the System to Standard Mode If this is not the mode required for the IP Office system IP Office Manager can be used to change the system to IP Office Standard Version The process below will change the mode of the system and default its configuration e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to comple
385. ore is not supported on 32 bit operating systems Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office Ports Contact Store Witness tomcat5024 bin tomcat5 exe TCP 8888 UDP 50791 UDP 50795 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 353 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 3 Customer Call Reporter CCR e Customer Call Reporter 354 This application is installed on a server PC connected to the IP Office Users access the application from their PC using a web browser The application obtains data about the calls handled by CCR agents and groups from the IP Office system and stores that data in an MS SQL database It can support up to 150 agents and 75 supervisors DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 2 License w See Customer Call Reporter Licenses 394 Languages Dutch English UK English US French Italian Brazilian Portuguese Russian and Spanish PC Requirements Minimum Server PC Requirements Operating System Support Server OS Hard Disk Free Space 30GB 2003 Server Processor 2008 Server Pentium Intel Pentium D945 Dual Core Client OS Celeron Not tested XP Professional Vista AMD Athlon 64 4000 User PC Requirements Windows 7 Web Browser Google Chrome e Vista support is only on Business Internet Explorer 7 Enterprise and Ultimate versions Internet Explorer 8 e Windows 7 support is only on Mozilla Firefox 3 0 Professional Enter
386. ort materials for Avaya products including IP Office Copies of the IP Office CD images are available from this site and updated core software bin files e Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Access to an on line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 173 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 3 IP500 Unpacking Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya reseller or distributor Information Required e O Equipment Checklist An installation checklist of the parts and equipment ordered for the installation Procedure 1 0 Check for Packaging Damage Before unpacking any equipment check for any signs of damage that may have occurred during transit If any damage exists bring it to the attention of the carrier 2 0 Check the Correct Parts Have Been Delivered Check all cartons against the packing slip and ensure that you have the correct items Report any errors or omissions to the equipment supplier 3 0 Retain All Packaging and Documentation While unpacking the equipment retain all the packaging material Fault returns are accepted only if repackaged in the original packaging If performing a staged installation the original packaging will also assist when repacking equipment to be moved to the final install site 4 0 Ensure that Anti Static Protection Measures are Obs
387. orts 8 unlicensed B channels on each IP500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected require licenses These additional channels consume the licenses based on which additional channels are configured as in service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards D channels are not affected by licensing e 1P500 T1 CHANNELS ADD 2CH 215180 e amp IP500 T1 CHANNELS ADD 8CH 215181 e P500 T1 CHANNELS ADD 32CH 215182 e IP500 El CHANNELS ADD 2CH 215183 e P500 El CHANNELS ADD 8CH 215184 e IP500 El CHANNELS ADD 22CH 215185 e P500 ELR2 CHANNELS ADD 2CH 215186 e IP500 E1R2 CHANNELS ADD 8CH 215187 e P500 ELR2 CHANNELS ADD 22CH 215188 e SIP Trunk Channels These licenses are used to configure the maximum number of simultaneous SIP trunk calls supported IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems support 3 channels without licenses e IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 1 202967 e IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 5 202968 e IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 10 202969 e IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 20 202970 e IP500 Voice Networking These licenses are used with the 1P500 and 1P500v2 systems to enable support for SCN QSIG and H323 IP trunks For IP Office Release 5 the additional ports license can be used without requiring a base license first e IP500 VOICE NTWK
388. ot Small Office Edition w 10 uf Handsfree Speaker Microphone f Message Waiting Lamp Upgradeable Firmware Using optional T3 Headset Link unit T3 UPN Compact Black White T3 IP Compact Black White T3 DSS Unit Black White T3 DSS Expansion Unit Black White T3 IP Power Supply Unit AEI Headset Link for T3 IP Power Supply for T3 IP DSS Headset Link for T3 UPN IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700380264 700380298 700414717 700414709 700380322 700380330 700380348 700380355 700414766 700414774 700414790 700380363 af x Page 336 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 12 Phone Add Ons For IP Office Release 5 0 and higher the maximum combined number of buttons on buttons modules per system is 1024 T3 DSS modules are not included in the combined limits stated above but are limited to 30 T3 DSS modules 1080 buttons e 1100 KEM 18 Max 3 per phone 56 per system Add on for 1120E and 1140E phones Each module provides 18 additional programmable buttons e 1200 KEM 12 Max 7 per phone 85 per system Add on for 1220 and 1230 phones Each module provides 12 additional programmable buttons e 4450 339 60 Max 2 per phone 2 per external expansion module or control unit 8 per system Add on for 4412D and 4424D phones Provides an additional 60 programmable buttons with a single lamp red except for the bottom two rows which are green Due to t
389. other locations where the risk of lightning strikes is felt to be high additional protection of incoming analog trunks is recommended External Output Switch ITWLinx towerMAX SCL 8 Connections from an IP Office Ext O P port to an This device was previously external relay device must be via a surge protector referred to as the Avaya 146G The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx http www itwlinx com IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 131 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 7 1 DS Phones When digital phone extensions are required in another building additional In Range Out Of Building IROB protective equipment must be used For phones connected to IP Office DS 376 ports the supported device supplied by ITWLinx is a towerMAX DS 2 module This IROB device was previous badged by Avaya as the 146E IROB e WARNING This device is not supported for TCM port connections ie 4100 Series T Series 7400 Series and M Series phones e Only DS connections on an external expansion module are supported DS ports on cards in the control unit should not be used The protection device should be installed as per the instructions supplied with the device The ground points on the IP Office control unit and the DS modules must be connected to a protective ground using 18AWG wire with a green and yellow sleeve Typically the IROBs 2 RJ45 EQUIPMENT ports are straight through connected to the 2 RJ45 LINE por
390. ough This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket For example making one user socket a phone port and another user socket a computer LAN port without requiring any rewiring of the cables between the patch panel and the user location Fut EIRE RE Line Providers Building Structured Metwork Termination Cabling e Traditional I DC Punchdown Wiring Installations Where necessary the far end RJ 45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems using punch block connectors This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician e Trunk Connections The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ 45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ 45 to RJ 45 cable However connection at the line provider s end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers equipment e RJ 11 Phone Connectors Many phones use RJ 11 sockets and are supplied with RJ 11 to RJ11 cables RJ 11 plugs can be inserted into RJ 45 sockets and in many case the connection will work However this is not recommended or supported as the connection lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected An RJ45 to R 11 cable 376 is available for these connections IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 36 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Power S
391. ovides a fixed number of trunk ports with digital trunk ports supporting a fixed number of digital channels By default the IP Office configuration will have settings for all the possible trunks and channels In cases where the number of trunks or trunk channels in use or licensed is lower than the number supported by the trunk card the unused trunks and channels must be disabled e dB Failure to do this will cause problems with outgoing calls For example on a system with an ATM4 trunk card fitted but only two analog trunks actually connected failure to disable the other two trunks within the IP Office configuration will cause 50 of outgoing call attempts to fail e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot Disabling Trunks 1 Start Manager 66 and receive the configuration from the IP Office system 2 Within the IP Office configuration select i i Line 3 For each line set those lines or channels that are not connected or being used as out of service The location of the relevant setting varies for each trunk type e Analog Trunks To disable the whole trunk on the main form set the Admin option to Out of Service e BRI El PRI SO and QSIG Trunks To disable the whole trunk on the main form set the Admin option to Out of Service Otherwise set the number of channels to match the actual subscribed channels PRI Li
392. ower Supply UPS with any telephone system is strongly recommended Even at sites that rarely lose electrical power that power may occasionally have to be switched off for maintenance of other equipment In addition most UPSs also provide an element of power conditioning reducing spikes and surges The capacity of UPS systems and the total equipment load the UPS is expected to support are usually quoted in VA Where equipment load is quoted in Watts multiply by 1 4 to get the VA load The calculation of how much UPS capacity is required depends on several choices e What equipment to place on the UPS Remember to include server PCs such as the voicemail It is recommended that the total load on a new UPS is never greater than 75 capacity thus allowing for future equipment e How many minutes of UPS support is required Actual UPS runtime is variable it depends on what percentage of the UPSs capacity the total equipment load represents For example a 1000VA capacity UPS may only support a 1000VA 100 load for 5 minutes This relationship is not linear the same UPS would support a 500VA 50 load for 16 minutes Therefore the lower the percentage of capacity used the increasingly longer the UPS runtime typically up to 8 hours maximum Remember also that for most UPS s the ratio of discharge to full recharge time is 1 10 e How many output sockets does the UPS provide Multiple UPS units may be required to ensure that every item of suppor
393. p and ground point Installing an IP500 Card 1 Check that there is no power to the control unit 2 Using a flat bladed screwdriver remove the cover from the slot on the front of the control unit that will be used for each card being installed This cover is no longer required but should be retained until installation has been completed 3 Allowing the card to rest against the bottom of the slot begin sliding it into the control unit When half inserted check that the card rails have engaged with the slot edges by trying to gently rotate it If the card rotates remove it and begin inserting it again 4 The card should slide in freely until almost fully inserted At this point apply pressure at the base of the front of the card to complete insertion 5 Using a flat bladed screwdriver secure the card 6 Reapply power to the control unit Initially each card should show a red LED two if a daughter card is fitted as the control unit restarts After approximately 30 seconds these should change to flashing red as the card is started These should then change to flashing every 5 seconds if the cards have started correctly 7 Run the IP Office System Status Application and verify that the cards have all been recognized 8 IP Office Manager can now be used to configure the extensions and trunk lines For any IP500 VCM base cards VCM Channel licenses must be added to the configuration to enable channels above the base 4 IP Office Standar
394. pen two switches within the port Either switch can be operated separately These switches are intended for activation of external relays in systems such as door opening systems e CAUTION In installations where this port is connected to a device external to the building connection must be via a towerMAX SCL 8 Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit DEL re pete Switch 2 1 Switch 1 EXT E O P DO 3 i co_ 3 5mm Stereo 2 Switch 2 13 Jack Plug _ 3 O Volts Ground Chassis Switch 1 e Switching Capacity 0 7A e Maximum Voltage 55V d c e On state resistance 0 7 ohms e Short circuit current 1A e Reverse circuit current capacity 1 4A e Ensure that pins 1 and 2 are always at a positive voltage with respect to pin 3 3 5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre wired sealed modules It may be necessary to use a multi meter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug Typically 3 common to both relays is the cable screen IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 379 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 13 LAN Port These ports are found on IP Office control units They are used for connection to IP LANs and IP devices All IP Office LAN ports are 10 100Mbps auto sensing Operation varies as follows e IP Office 500 IP500v2 The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover ports They form a man
395. perTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen b Enter AT note upper case The control unit should respond OK c Enter AT DEBUG The control unit should response with the time and date and then Hello gt to show it is ready to accept commands 3 To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter upgrade 4 The IP Office will erase its current software and then send out a BootP request on the network for new software Manager will respond and start transferring the software using TFTP IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 148 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes DTE Port Maintenance Erasing the Core Software via the Boot Loader 2 Run Manager In the BOOTP entries check that there is an entry that matches the MAC Address IP Address and bin file used by the system An entry is normally automatically created when a configuration has been loaded from that IP Office e f an entry is not present create a new entry manually The first two details can be found in the Control Unit settings in the configuration file Then close and restart Manager Under File Preferences ensure that Manager is set to 255 255 255 255 Also check that Enable BootP Server is checked Select View TFTPLog Check that the required bin file is present in Manager s working directory 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control
396. ple 2 Video Conference 137 6 10 SNMP relais 139 6 10 1 Installing the IP Office MIB Files 140 6 10 2 Enabling SNMP and Polling Support 142 6 10 3 Enabling SNMP Trap Sending 142 6 1 MeserBuHon elica alii 143 B 12 AUABUONONsiicghi ne ella 143 6 13 DTE Port MaintenancCe 144 6 13 1 DIE Port Settings snra 144 6 13 2 Erasing the Configuration 145 Page 3 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 13 3 Defaulting Security Settings 147 6 13 4 Erasing the Operational Firmware 148 7 SD Card Management 7 1 Booting from the SD Cards ccccccccsssseseseeeeeeeeees 155 7 2 Creating an IP Office SD Card 157 7 3 Viewing the Card Content cccccccccsssssseseeeeeeeeees 158 7 4 Backing Up the System SD Card 159 7 4 1 Backing Up the Primary Folder 159 7 4 2 Restore from the Backup Folder 160 7 4 3 Backing Up to the Optional Card 161 7 4 4 Restoring from the Optional Card 162 7 5 Upgrading Card Software rnr rereeeeee 164 7 5 1 Upgrading Remotely Using Manager 165 7 5 2 Upgrading the SD Card Locally 165 7 5 3 Upgrading Using an Optional SD Card
397. plied with a Earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply module The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional P400 Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 3 5Kg 7 8lbs Boxed 4 8Kg 10 8lbs Based on DS30 V2 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 250 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules Avy IP200 Digital Station i 19 20 21 22 235 24 DS 25 26 ST 28 23 50 1 2 25 30 EEHEEHE PEE OPE PE OP HUUHUUUAM BRR S etapa h h hee BBR h a Eh h h h o a a 3 1 EEEE eE E EXPANSION 16 244 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE ve o CE DC 1 P376 DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DS 376 RJ45 socket Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones 43 gt If connected to an out of building extension 39
398. ports of embedded voicemail Additional ports up to a maximum of 6 can be enabled by the addition of licenses 387 The voicemail mailbox message and prompt capacity supports 2 Simultaneous connections and 15 hours of storage This can be expanded up to 6 channels by the addition of licenses each of which enables an additional two channels and an additional 5 hours of storage e Di WARNING These cards should only be formatted using IP Office Manager or IP Office System Status Application The cards should only be removed from a system after either a card shut down 167 or a system shut down 169 Feature Key Dongle SAP Code IPO IP500 V2 SYS SD CARD A LAW 700500924 IPO IP500 V2 SYS SD CARD MU LAW 700500925 IPO IP500 V2 SYS SD CARD PARTNER 700500926 IPO IP500 V2 SYS SD CARD NORSTAR 700500927 e IP Office U Law A system fitted with this type of card will default to U Law telephony For pre IP Office Release 7 0 software the system will default to IP Office standard mode For IP Office Release 7 0 the system will default to IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode Key System operation Intended for North American locales e IP Office A Law A system fitted with this type of card will default to A Law telephony For pre IP Office Release 7 0 software the system will default to IP Office standard mode For IP Office Release 7 0 the system will default to IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode PBX System operation Intended for l
399. pplied with the EU24 EU24BL should for connection to the EU24 EU24BL This cable should only be connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24 EU24BL and the equipment to which it is attached Connects via EU24 port on phone aS p Supported by 2420 4620 4621 4625 5420 5620 5621 em p di a Maximum per phone I Fr Maximum per IP Office 8 gt Additional Requirements A 1151 Type power supply unit must be used to power the phone 16 IP Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons ui 24 EU24 1XU A Expansion Module Multi Grey 700381817 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 342 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phone Add Ons 9 12 6 EU24BL The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons The EU24BL is physically similar to the EU24 but includes a backlight function that matches 4621 phone For additional limitations see Phone Add Ons 337 e l Only the cable supplied with the EU24 EU24BL should for connection to the EU24 EU24BL This cable should only b
400. pported are Outlook 2003 Outlook 2007 and Outlook 2010 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 369 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 Physical Ports The following port types are found on IP Office systems e ANALOG 37 Used for the connection of external analog trunks e AUDIO 373 Used for input of an external music on hold source e BRI 375 Used for connection of BRI trunks Quad BRI trunk card In IP Office Standard Version mode the can also be used for ISDN terminals devices So8 module e DCI P 376 Power input from external power supply unit e DS 376 Connection of Avaya digital station phones supported by IP Office e RS232 DTE 144 Used for control unit maintenance under Avaya guidance On expansion modules not used e EF 377 Emergency power failure ports found on the ETR6 base card e ETR 378 Only supported on IP500v2 control unit running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes e EXPANSION 379 Used for interconnection of external expansions modules and control units e EXT O P135 Used to control external relay systems The port provides two switchable on off and pulse controls rh Used for connection of functional or protective ground if required e LAN 380 10 100Mbps Ethernet LAN ports e PF38t Analog power fails ports e PHONE 382 POT 382 Analog phone extension ports On older units these ports a
401. prise and Ultimate Safari 3 2 versions IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 354 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications 9 14 4 Manager This tool is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration Different levels of access can be defined to control which parts of the configuration the Manager user can view and alter Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system When running is also acts as a TFTP server from which some Avaya phones can request new software Note that IP Office Manager s software level is always two higher than the IP Office core software with which it is release For example IP Office 6 0 core software is release with IP Office Manager 8 0 IP Office Manager is backwards compatible and can be used to manage IP Office systems running software from IP Office 2 1 upwards DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 1 Languages English Brazilian Dutch French German Italian Spanish Mexican License No license required PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements Operating System Support Server OS Hard Disk Free Space 2003 Server 2008 Server Celeron XP Professional Windows 7 diga SII net e Vista Support is only on Business yP i Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Vindows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Includes disk space required
402. r a Mu Law variant e For IP500 and IP500v2 systems the encoding default is set by the type of Feature Key installed when the system is first started IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 238 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Feature Keys 9 7 IP400 Trunk Cards IP400 trunk cards can be used in 1P500 and IP500 v2 controls units by being fitted onto an 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier 214 base card Up to 2 cards can be added to the control unit in this way The following IP400 trunk card types are supported in this way by IP Office Release 7 0 1P400 Trunk Cards 1P500 IPs poW Analog Trunk Card ATM4 24 uf i Provides 4 RJ 45 loop start analog trunk ports The card is available in several locale specific variants This card has been superseded by the ATM4U card below Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can also be added using Analog Trunk 248 external expansion modules Analog Trunk Card ATM4U 240 Ti Ti Provides 4 RJ45 loop start analog trunk ports as per the ATM4 above but available in a single worldwide variant Also supports adjustable echo cancellation on IP Office 3 1 Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can also be added using Analog Trunk 248 external expansion modules Quad BRI Trunk Card 24 wf af Provides support for 4 RJ 45 BRI 2B D trunk ports These can be configured to ETSI or AusTS013 operation The ports include 1000hm termination Si
403. r box ground wire using M4 washers and nuts to the earthing pillar on that side of the rack mounting strip 4 Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve connect one of the earthing pillars to the buildings protective earth 5 Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve connect the other earthing pillar to the Phone module 6 Ensure that the following wires are not routed together in the same bundle e Earth lead from the barrier box to the Phone module e Internal wires e g wires going directly to the Phone module e Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 134 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Out of Building Telephone Installations 6 8 Using the External Output Port All the IP Office control units are equipped with a EXT O P port The port is marked as EXT O P and is located on the back of the control unit adjacent to the power supply input socket The port can be used to control up to two external devices such as door entry relay switches The usual application for these switches is to activate relays on door entry systems However as long as the criteria for maximum current voltage and if necessary protection are met the switches can be used for other applications The switches can be switched closed open or pulsed closed for 5 seconds and then open This can be done in a number of ways e Using IP Offic
404. r problems 1 Start IP Office Manager with no configuration loaded into Manager 2 Click on Create an Offline Configuration in the simplified view Uw Avaya IP Office R7 Manager Seles File Edit View Tools Help EEE Offline Configuration Creation Please specify System Parameters Which type of IF Office Units would you like to deploy Configuration IP Office Quick Mode System Units System Mode Key 2 PBX Expansion Modules Locale United States US English None Extension Number Length 2 w T None Select Extension and Daughter Cards None Slot Extension Ch Trunk ECombo DSE P2VCMI 0 w ATM 4 UNI E Hone 2 ETRE GN 1 None 3 None Mi l 4 None w No None None None 3 Select the type of configuration that you want to create The equipment and settings will be restricted to those supported in the selected mode 4 When completed click OK 5 Manager will create an load the configuration 6 Edit the configuration to match the customer requirements This can include importing information from preprepared CSV files 7 When completed select File Save Configuration As IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 76 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation SD Card Preparation 4 4 4 Adding a License File For 1P500v2 control units if a licence file called keys txt is found in the SD card folder which the IP Office uses when it boots the I
405. radable Firmware K 3616 Wireless Phone 700413040 Additional battery pack for 3616 700277387 Desktop charger for 3616 700412901 Clip for 3616 700413057 3616 3626 Configuration Cradle 700375934 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 278 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 13 3620 This is an 802 11b WiFi phone It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP The 3620 is similar to the 3616 but has been designed for use in healthcare environments It is waterproof and has a back lit display e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 3 2 Programmable Buttons w 6 Headset Socket w Message Waiting Lamp X Upgradable Firmware x 3620 Wireless Phone 700413065 Additional battery pack 700277387 Desktop charger 700412901 Clip 700413057 Configuration Cradle 700375934 IP Office Standard Version Installation O Page 279 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 14 3626 This phones is similar to the 3616 in functionality However the 3626 has a ruggedized construction This is an 802 11b WiFi phone It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP e The availability of VCM
406. rations of Conformity DoC for the 1P400 and IP500 products are available on the IP Office Application DVD h This warning symbol is found on the base of 1P500 modules e Refer to Trunk Interface Modules 40 for information concerning which Trunk Interface module variants are fitted in which country In Finland Norway and Sweden a protective earthing conductor must be attached to the protective earth point on the rear of the IPO500 and IPO500v2 Servers See Grounding 90 for more information In addition the Server must be located in a restricted access location where equipotential bonding has been applied for example in a telecommunication centre 10 1 Lithium Batteries A lithium battery is fitted to the real time clock on IP Office 1P400 control unit motherboards and the IP500 control unit motherboard Ty WARNING The Lithium battery must only be replaced by Avaya personnel or authorized representatives There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions 10 2 Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols Lightning protectors The buildings lightning protectors must be verified as follow 1 Check the lightning protectors at the trunk cable entry point to the building housing the Avaya IP Office paying Special attention to the lightning protection grounding Report a
407. re labeled as POT ports e PRI 383 PRI trunk ports e TCM 384 Connection for M Series and T Series phones supported by IP Office Also for Digital Mobility Solution system Supporting 4100 Series and 7400 Series phones e USB Not used IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 370 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Physical Ports 9 16 1 Cables The IP Office systems are designed primarily for use within an RJ 45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling and RJ 45 sockets A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ 45 patch panel in the communications data room to individual RJ 45 sockets at user locations All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are connected straight through This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket For example making one user socket a phone port and another user socket a computer LAN port without requiring any rewiring of the cables between the patch panel and the user location Fut EIRE RE Line Providers Building Structured Metwork Termination Cabling e Traditional I DC Punchdown Wiring Installations Where necessary the far end RJ 45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems using punch block connectors This type of i
408. ready switched on will automatically restart card operation However if the card has been shutdown but not removed it can be restarted using Manager without requiring a reboot Card Startup Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Startup 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK Card Startup Using the System Status Application 1 Start System Status 67 gt and access the IP Office s status output 2 In the navigation panel select System 3 Select Memory Cards 4 Select either System Card or Optional Card 5 At the bottom of the screen select Start Up Card Startup Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select System for the System SD card or Option for the Optional SD card 5 Select Startup IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 168 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 SD Card Management Removing SD Cards 7 6 3 System Shutdown IP Office systems running IP Office Release 6 can be shut down in order to perfor
409. rity Fixed Function Keys SPEAKER 3 HEADSET Z MUTE nd dm VOLUME UP ff CONTACTS wf EA MESSAGE amp F HOLD A C TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN zE CALL LOG Z prop HJ REDIAL ECC CONFERENCE f MENU Material Description 700450190 700458540 700415573 00415722 Accessories CAT5 Ethernet Cable 14 ft 700383326 CAT5 Ethernet Cable 1 ft 700436710 1616 Wall Mount Kit Includes 1 ft Ethernet cable and screws 700415631 Power Adapters 700451230 700451248 00451255 00451263 700451271 700451289 700451297 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 273 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Material Description Code 1616 BM32 Paper DESI Labels Pack of 50 Labels 8 5 x 11 700415656 Headsets SupraElite Monaural Two Ear Voice Tube HIS cable required IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 274 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 9 2402 In addition to the two physical programmable buttons the ne FEATURE key plus 0 9 and can be used to access an addition 12 programmable slots On IP Office the 2402D display is not used Connects via DS port I P Office Release 3 0 Programmable Buttons uf 2 CE Headset Socket X Handsfree Speaker Microphone af Message Waiting Lamp w Display Not used Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware ul Standard DCP Phone Keys x A SPEAKER x a HEADSET MUTE f dm VOLUME UP J E
410. rk Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 30 4602 These phones are similar in physical appearance and functions However the 4602SW includes a PC data pass through port which gives priority to phone traffic The 46021IP is no longer available from Avaya The 4602SW is the RoHS compliant replacement for the 4602SW which is no longer available This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 38 license Connects via IP network I P Office Release 1 3 Programmable Buttons nf 2 Ct Headset Socket X Handsfree Speaker Microphone af Message Waiting Lamp if PoE Class Typical Idle Power 3 5W Class 2 Consumption Display 24 characters x 2 lines Supported Add Ons None Upgradable Firmware ul PC Pass Through Port with Voice Priority X X af Standard DCP Phone Keys x A SPEAKER x i HEADSET MUTE sd ila VOLUME UP sil E MESSAGES sal HOLD Z CH TRANSFER wf WF VOLUME DOWN G prop HLJ REDIAL ECC CONFERENCE 46021 P Multi Grey 700221260 4602SW
411. rop suJ REDIAL wf CC CONFERENCE 4610SW Multi Grey 700381957 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia and New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 Replacement Handset Dark Grey 700203797 Amplified Handset Dark Grey 700229735 Noisy Location Handset Dark Grey 700229743 Push to Talk Handset Dark Grey 700229727 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 296 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 32 4620 These phones are similar in physical appearance and functions However the 4620SW s PC data pass through port gives priority to phone traffic This phone requires a separate power supply using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord or a 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE source e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints 389 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 2 0 Programmable Buttons w 24 12 buttons x 2 pages Headset Socket ff Handsfree Speaker Microphone f f Message Waiting Lamp wf PoE Class Typical Idle Power 4W Class 3 5 9W Class 3 Consumption Display 29 characters x 7 lines 168 x 132 pixels Supported
412. rotection equipment 3 an Avaya 146G Surge Protector Supported on IP500 and IP500v2 Locales This module is currently only supported in North American locales Software Level IP Office core software level 1 0 minimum Bin file naatm16 bin Included Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a 2 pin 40W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C7 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional P500 Rack Mounting Kit It can be wall mounted using the 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 2 9Kg 6 6lbs Boxed 4 2Kg 9 4lbs IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 225 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IPO 500 Analog Trunk Module Connections the IF Office 500 i Analog Trunk Per ec eee ANALOG 375 DC I P 376 DTE 144 EXPANSI ON 1379 PF 38t rh FFI FFS EXPANSION RJ45 socket Used for connection to analog trunks Ports can be configured as either loop start or ground start trunks through the IP Office configuration In the event
413. rs The site requires registration for a user name and password Once accessed the site portal can be individually customized for what products and information types you wish to see and to be notified about by email e Avaya Support http support avaya com Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office Copies of the IP Office CD images are available from this site and updated core software bin files e Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Access to an on line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base e Avaya University http www avaya learning com This site provides access to the full range of Avaya training courses That includes both on line courses course assessments and access to details of classroom based courses The site requires users to register in order to provide the user with access to details of their training record e Avaya Community http www aucommunity com This is the official discussion forum for Avaya product users However it does not include any separate area for discussion of IP Office issues e Other Non Avaya Web Sites A number of third party web forums exist that discuss IP Office These can act as useful source of information about how the IP Office is used Some of these forums require you to be a member and to register These are not official Avaya forums and their content is not monitored or sanctioned by
414. rs and similar openings Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord including proper routing of the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a socket outlet For locales not detailed below an appropriate power cord must be obtained locally Power Cord Type Power Outlet Plug Type SAP Codes Earthed Power Cords 1EC60320 C13 CEE7 7 Schuko Europe and 700289762 got Bers South Africa Czech Republic 700289747 Ireland United Kingdom Control Units e IP500v2 e P500 I P400 External Expansion Modules e Digital Station V2 e Phone V2 North Central 700289770 e S08 No 42 and South America IP500 External Expansion Modules e BRI S08 e Digital Station 16 30 e Phone 16 30 Unearthed Power Cord 1EC60320 C7 Europe and 700213382 South Africa I P400 External Expansion Modules Czech Republic 700213374 e Analog Ireland United e Digital Station V1 Kingdom e Phone VI IP500 External Expansion Modules e Analog Trunk 16 North Central 700213390 and South America Korea 700254519 Older units were supplied with a 40W unearthed PSU and required an 1EC60320 C7 power cord IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 34 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview Power Supplies and Cables 1 7 3 Power Supply Backup The use of an Uninterrupted P
415. rstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode support up to 8 external expansion modules so long as the system extensions limit is not exceeded e Systems running in IP Office Standard Version mode support 8 external expansion modules or 12 if the control unit is fitted with an IP500 4 Port Expansion Base Card e Each external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit e When connecting to expansion ports on an IP500 4 Port Expansion card a yellow 2 meter 6 6 expansion interconnect cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card IP500 External Expansion Modules Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and a 1m blue interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables Digital Station IPO 500 Digital Station 16 AII 700449499 IPO 500 Digital Station 30 AII 700426216 IPO 500 Digital Station 16A AII 700500699 IPO 500 Digital Station 30A All 700500698 Analog Phone IPO 500 Phone 16 All 700449507 IPO 500 Phone 30 All 700426224 IPO 500 Analog Trunk 16 US 700449473 IPO 500 BRI So8 All 700449515 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 26 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview External Expans
416. rt can also be used for connection of the IP Office serial port licence key dongle An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required Configure this for operation via a PC serial port as follows Bits per second 38 400 Parity None Flow Control None Data bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Settings Emulation TTY DTE Cables These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance They can also be used for connection of RS232 serial terminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit This cable is a Straight through DB9 female to DB9 male serial cable Cn Gian IVA i i g D Type Flug D Type Socket IF Office DITE Port 2 Weters 6 57 Feet IP Office 9 Way RS232 PC Terminal DTE Port Adaptor 3 Receive data 3 2 Transmit Data 2 7 RTS Request To Send 7 8 CTS Clear To Send 8 6 DSR Data Set Ready 6 5 Ground 5 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 4 9 RI Ring Indicator 9 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 377 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 10 ETR Port ETR Enhanced Tip and Ring ports are provided by the ETR6 base card They can be used for the connection of DTMF analog phone devices and Avaya ETR phones IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 378 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Physica
417. rted for use with 2420 and 5420 phones It provides the phone with a 3 5mm mini RCA jack socket for connection of recording devices It also provides two headset sockets which can be used in place of the phones existing headset socket the phone and the RIM sockets can not be used at the same time e The 201B is the RoHS compliant replacement for the 201A The 20B stand is the RoHS complaint replacement for the 20A stand To install the 201B the phones existing stand must be removed and be replace by a 20B stand also called the 20B Module Adapter Base This is an expanded stand that includes two slots into one of which the 201B can be inserted However only one 201B is supported per phone Use of the 20B and therefore the 201B requires the phone to be powered by a 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit Full installation instructions are included with the 20B Stand 201B Recorder Interface Module 700381635 20B Stand 700381650 EU24 Multi Grey 700381817 1151D1 Power Supply With CAT5 cable 700434897 1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup With CAT5 cable 700434905 1151D1 1151D2 Power Cord USA 405362641 Europe 407786623 Australia New Zealand 407786631 India 407790991 United Kingdom 407786599 Argentina 408161453 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 338 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phone Add Ons 9 12 2 4450 The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single
418. rtical flat and vibration free Attachment to temporary walls is not supported e Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit e The brackets must be used as shown with the deeper tray like bracket used at the bottom of the wall mounted control unit TOP as 04 imm Ni 500mm 19 7 t 645mm I i BOTTOM BOTTOM Fix to solid vertical surface using wall fixings suitable for the wall type AN Orientation must be as shown A minimum clearance of 500mm 19 7 is required on all sides IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 193 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 14 Grounding Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks All IP Office control units and external expansion modules must be connected to a functional ground Where the unit is connected to a power outlet using a power cord with an earth lead the power outlet must be connected to a protective earth In some cases such as ground start trunks in addition to being a protective measure this is a functional requirement for the equipment to operate In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high light
419. runk ports or 4 BRI channels 2 ports The trunk daughter card cannot be removed or replaced with another type IP400 Cards 24 The I1P500 Legacy Carrier base card can be used to allow 1P400 trunk cards and 1P400 VCM cards to be added to the IP500 control unit e License Keys 39 Various IP Office features and applications require a license key to be entered into the system s configuration Each key is a 32 character text string unique to the feature being activated and the serial number of the Feature Key dongle installed in the system Page 15 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 e IP500 External Expansion Modules 26 Additional ports can be added using a number of 1P500 external expansion modules Support also includes 1P400 external expansion modules 31 e Systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode support up to 8 external expansion modules so long as the system extensions limit is not exceeded e Systems running in IP Office Standard Version mode support 8 external expansion modules or 12 if the control unit is fitted with an IP500 4 Port Expansion Base Card e Power Supplies 33 The IP500 control unit has an internal power supply unit Each external expansion module is supplied with an external power supply unit Additional power supply units may also be required for IP phones and some phone add
420. s IP Office Standard Version IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version I P Office Essential Edition Norstar Version IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Avaya Branch Gateway This is a special mode used for B5800 control units and is not covered by this documentation Refer to the separate Avaya Branch Gateway documentation IP500 control units only run in IP Office Standard Version mode The default mode used for 1P500v2 systems is determined by the System SD card present when the system is first installed e IP Office U Law A system fitted with this type of card will default to U Law telephony For pre IP Office Release 7 0 software the system will default to IP Office standard mode For IP Office Release 7 0 the system will default to IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode Key System operation Intended for North American locales e IP Office A Law A system fitted with this type of card will default to A Law telephony For pre IP Office Release 7 0 software the system will default to IP Office standard mode For IP Office Release 7 0 the system will default to IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode PBX System operation Intended for locales outside North America e IP Office Partner Version A system fitted with this type of card will default to U Law telephony and IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version mode Key System operation Supported only in North American locales e IP Office Nor
421. s VCM cards are used to provide voice compression channels for calls between IP and non IP devices devices being both trunks and extensions VCM cards with differing numbers of Mg voice compression channels are available e For IP500 and IP500v2 control units voice compression channels can be added using combinations of 1P400 VCM modules mounted on an IP500 Carrier Card 1P500 VCM cards and IP500 Combination cards VCM Cards SAP Code Ga 25ms echo I P400 VCM5 700185119 cancellation IP400 VCM10 700185127 IP400 VCM20 700185135 1P400 VCM30 700293939 64ms echo I P400 VCM4 700359854 cancellation I P400 VCM8 700359862 I1P400 VCM16 700359870 nal I P400 VCM24 700359888 Number of I P400 VCM cards 2 2 Maximum number of channels 128 148 e These modules are still supported but are no longer available from Avaya IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 25 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 6 External Expansion Modules These modules can be used to add additional ports to an IP Office systems The number of external expansion modules supported depends on the control unit type Each module uses an external power supply unit 33 supplied with the module A locale specific power cord 34 for the PSU must be ordered separately a 1P500 System with External Expansion Module e Systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition No
422. s ie providing up to 32 or 64 channels depending on the card type and the codecs being used e 3rd Party IP Endpoints License These licenses are used for support of non Avaya IP phones including SIP extensions The available license are used in order of phone registration If no licenses are available the phone will not be able to register Available licenses can reserved for a particular phone using the Reserve 3rd Party IP Endpoint License setting in the each IP extension This license was previously called the IP End points license e IP400 IP ENDPOINTS RFA 1 LIC 174956 e P400 IP ENDPOINTS RFA 5 LIC 174957 e P400 IP ENDPOINTS RFA 20 LIC 174959 Legacy Endpoint Licenses e Channel Migration These licenses were previously called IP500 VCM Channels In pre IP Office Release 6 systems these license were used to enable additional VCM channels on 1P500 VCM32 and IP500 VCM 64 cards For IP Office Release 6 these license are no longer required Any present in the configuration of systems upgraded to IP Office Release 6 are renamed Channel Migration Each Channel Migration license instance enables support for 3 Avaya IP phones e IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 4 CH LIC 202961 e IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 8 CH LIC 202962 e IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 16 CH LIC 202963 e IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 28 CH LIC 202964 e IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 60 CH LIC 202965 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 389 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k
423. s an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 404 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Safety Statements Regulatory Instructions for Use 10 7 3 China V 700433220 f A A February 2007 Copyright 2007 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved PAEPRARAARRAT ORS ENS Sr mea CRM Include this document with all Electronic Information Products imported or sold in the People s Republic of China Ai A amp I oc Hazardous Substance ans FR Ere REI lt i a Part Name PBDE TRE Metal Parts de Be SR Circuit Modules BB ee La CBR EE fF Cables amp Cable Assemblies THRA walt Plastic and Polymerie parts be A ARE Bs Circuit Switch Breakers n a j A _ Power Assemblies dee de foe gt a LCD Monitor i i a 2 a HE o a a Glass TEA BAS MAE EAA SAAS HS RIE SIT 11363 2006 PRM EMRE R Ta Indicates that the concentration of the hazardous substance in all homogeneous materials in the parts is below the relevant threshold of the SJ T 11363 2006 standard TENER EA DIE RNA SARE BE SIT 11363 2006 GM ERRE Indicates that the concentration of the hazardous substance of at least one of all hom
424. s are created Voice calls are routed to the hunt group Main Data calls are routed to the RAS user Diall n Default Short Codes 1P400 control units are manufactured as either A Law or U Law variants For 1P500 and IP500v2 control units A Law or U Law variant operation is determined by the Feature Key installed in the control unit Depending on the variant different short codes and trunk settings are added to the default configuration A Law or Mu Law PCM Pulse Code Modulation is a method for encoding voice as data In telephony two methods PCM encoding are widely used A law and Mu law also called U law Typically Mu law is used in North America and a few other locations while A law by the rest of the world As well as setting the correct PCM encoding for the region the A Law or Mu Law setting of an IP Office system when it is first started affects a wide range of regional defaults relating to line settings and other values e For IP400 IP Office systems each control units was manufactured as either an A Law variant or a Mu Law variant e For IP500 and IP500v2 systems the encoding default is set by the type of Feature Key installed when the system is first started Default DHCP IP Address Settings When a defaulted or new IP Office control unit is switched on it requests IP address information from a DHCP Server on the network This operation will occur whether the LAN cable is plugged in or not The process below is done separately
425. s can be set back to default 147 if necessary using IP Office Manager Do not change any other settings than those described below until you have read and understood the IP Office Security Mode section of the IP Office Manager manual Changing the Security Settings 1 Start Manager 66 and receive the configuration from the IP Office system 2 Select File Advanced Security Settings 3 Enter a user name and password of an account that has security configuration access to the IP Office system The defaults which should be changed as part of this process are security and securitypwd 4 Clickon System and select the Unsecured Interfaces tab System Details Unsecured Interfaces Application Controls TFTP Configuration Read ECont TAPI TFTF Configuration Write Frogram Code HTTP Directory Read Volcemall Real Time Interface HTTP Director write e The System Password is used by Manager for remote software upgraded of the IP Office system The default password is password Click on the Change button and enter a new password Click OK e Click OK 5 Click on i Service Users The list will show the service user accounts that exist to access the IP Office configuration Service User Details Account Status S yt Account Expiry lt None gt Rights Group Membership Administrator Group Manager Group Operator Group System Status Group 6 The default service users Administrator Manager and Opera
426. s is not the case LOOohm 5 resistors must be connected across the receive wire pair and the transmit wire pair in the junction box immediately before the last ISDN terminal on the S bus IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 374 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 16 5 BRI Port To System Components Physical Ports These ports are BRI To interface ports for connection to external BRI trunk services Note that BRI ports found on the IP400 So8 module are BRI S interface ports for connect to ISDN terminal devices see BRI Port So 374 PRI BRI Trunk Cable This cable is used to connect from IP Office BRI PRI trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment If that equipment does not use RJ 45 sockets the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternate cable used The appropriate signal pin outs and wire colours are detailed below IF Office Network Termination PRIUBRI Port Point E il A t Rds Rud a Meterz 9 84 Feet RJ45 1 Rx A White Orange 2 Rx B Orange White 3 T x A White Green 4 Rx A TX A Blue White 5 Rx B Tx B White Blue 6 Tx B Green White 7 White Brown 8 Brown White e Supply BRI PRI trunks cards are not supplied with these cables e Cable Color Red e SAP Code 700213440 e Standard Length 3m 9 10 e Maximum Length 5m 16 5 e Though not used pins 7 and 8 are through connected for ease of construction IP
427. s not supported in IP Office Standard Version mode It is recommended that cards are fitted from left to right There are restrictions to the number of supported cards of some types When such a limit is exceed the right most card of that type will not function Ensure that you use the labels supplied to identify the card fitted into the control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 175 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 4 1 IP500 Daughter Card Preparation 1P500 trunk daughter cards can be fitted to any 1P500 base card except the 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier For P500 Combination cards the trunk daughter card is pre installed and cannot be changed Ri Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards Parts and Equipment Required 1 0 1P500 Base Card except the 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier 2 0 1P500 Trunk Daughter Card 3 0 3 Stand Off Pillars These are supplied with the trunk daughter card Tools Required 1 0 5mm Flat blade screwdriver 2 0 Anti static wrist strap and ground point Procedure nstalling a Trunk Daughter Card 1 Check that correct cards have been supplied 2 Ensure that you are wearing an anti static wrist strap connected to a suitable ground point 3 On the base card identify the position of 3 holes for the plastic pillars for the 1P500 card These are along the same edge as the card connector 4 Fit the stand off p
428. s to be redirected into a database on the ContactStore PC This allows recordings to be archived and searched separately from user messages User access to Contact Store is via web browser This application requires entry of a license into the IP Office configuration e For IP Office Release 6 and higher the supported version of ContactStore for IP Office is 7 8 DVD IP Office Release 7 0 User Admin DVD Set 2 700500928 Disk 2 License VMPro Recordings Administrators 1P400 ContactStore for IPO RFA 187166 See Voicemail Pro Licenses 392 PC Requirements Minimum Server PC Requirements Operating System Support Celeron XP Professional Windows 7 a SHEE ADIOS 4 e Vista support is only on Business e Internet Explorer 8 Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions La e If run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro apart from meeting the requirements of Voicemail Pro e ContactStore must use a separate disk partition from Voicemail Pro e Minimum hard disk free space increases to 20GB and Pentium processor to P4 2 8GHz minimum e 1 For all voicemail servers also allow 1MB per minute for messages and greeting storage e 2 Also allow 7 2MB per hour for recordings in the Contact Store disk partition e Recordings and data are stored in PostgresSQL database This is created during installation of the Contact Store software e ContactSt
429. s will be ended by the reboot Copying Software Files from the Optional SD Card Using IP Office Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Embedded File Management 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Upgrade Binaries e The software files all files in the folder except the configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt in the primary folder on the Optional SD card are copied to the primary folder on the System SD card This process takes approximately 5 minutes e When the process has been completed the IP Office system will be restarted Copying Software Files from the Optional SD Card Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select Upgrade Binaries e The software files all files in the folder except the configuration file config cfg and licenses file keys txt in the primary folder on the Optional SD card are copied to the primary folder on the System SD card This process takes approximately 5 minutes e When the process
430. sca 335 SHETA ENA E E A E E A E E E AT 396 STI 2 V3 COMPAL iea iaia 336 9 17 8 OtnerLIcenses arl la 397 9 t2 Phone Add ONS rin 337 Ra 338 10 Safety Statements OOD AAG o ics aio 999 TO TLINUM BAlGNeS arerioa 400 F12 S BM2 ennaa dea acs ietsaseanee 340 10 2 Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols 400 OA 2A DBMS Gastaldi 341 10 3 Trunk Interface Modules 401 Oi rile 342 10 4 Further Information and Product Updates 402 9 12 6 EU24BL isdn 343 10 5 Port Safety Classification iii 402 912 7 KLM Madle 44 I0 6EMG Direcivess strali EEE E 403 2 06 ME2 ria 345 10 7 Regulatory Instructions for Use 404 ASTE DSS a pai et 346 10 7 FAUSIA lA srren unirea ilari 404 9 12 10 T7316e KEM iii 347 10 7 2 Ganada sera a a aioe 404 ADITO AE AA 348 1073 CANA Aee A ia 405 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 5 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 10 7 4 European UNION 10 7 5 New Zealand 10 76 FCC NOUNCAlON sek tenia ea 10 7 7 Compliance with FCC Rules HAGE Sashes pee haat Ste te aaa at see aaa IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 6 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 1 System Overview IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 7 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview 1 Sys
431. se can be used for call appearance functions and other IP Office features This phone can be used with up to 3 x BM12 button module Each module provides an additional 24 programmable buttons Attaching button modules may change the phones PoE class and may require a separate power supply If not being powered by PoE these telephones do not support the former 1151 and 1152 series of single phone power supply units Instead an Avaya Single Port PoE injector SPPOE 1A should be used 9608 Telephone Charcoal Grey 700480585 Single Port PoE Injector SPPOE 1A 700500725 BM12 Button Module Charcoal Grey 700480643 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 310 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 46 9620L 9620C System Components Phones These phones are supported on IP500 and IP500v2 systems running IP Office Release 6 0 and higher The phones are supplied with a two position stand e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya I P Endpoints 389 license e The voice activated dialing and USB features are not supported e For IP Office Release 6 1 these phones are supported running SIP software When that is the case the IP Office or IP Office Manager should not be used as the file server for the phone Avaya SIP phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints license e The Class requirement of PoE powered phon
432. se station The base station connects to an IP Office DS port The base station also requires a power outlet socket Additional power outlet sockets are required for the phone charger This phone is supported in North America U Law only Not supported on the 1P500 Digital Station and 1P500 Combination cards Depending on coverage overlap between three and five 3810s can be connected to the same IP Office Connects via DS port I P Office Release 2 1 Programmable Buttons wt 4 Headset Socket ff Handsfree Speaker af d Microphone Message Waiting Lamp ff Upgradable Firmware M 3810 Set Includes phone base station charger belt clip and power supply units for charger and base 700305105 station IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 289 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 11 24 3910 This single station DECT phone is supported on an IP500v2 control unit running in Partner Version mode The base station uses an ETR port for connection to the IP Office This phone is no longer available from Avaya and has been superseded by the 3920 290 9 11 25 3920 The base station This single station DECT phone is supported on an IP500v2 control unit running in Partner Version mode uses an ETR port for connection to the IP Office IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 290 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 26 4406 This phone is supported in Nort
433. sed Trunks 10 Disabling the use of trunks and trunk channels that are not available e Select the Clock Source for Digital Lines 110 Altering which digital trunk is used to provide the IP Office with its clock signal for call synchronization e Enter Trunk Prefixes 112 On systems where a prefix is being used for external dialing ensure that the same prefix is added to incoming numbers in order to allow return calls IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 100 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 1 Setting the System Locale Setting the correct system locale 47 affects a wide range of settings including trunk settings The correct locale must be set for a system to operate correctly It will also set the default language used for phone displays and for voicemail prompts However language settings can be changed separately from the system locale if different language operation is required e WARNING This process will require the IP Office system to reboot in order to complete the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot Initial Configuration e This process can be performed through phone based administration 68 from either of the first two systems in the system For details refer to the Phone Based Administration manual Setting the System Locale 1 Start Manager 66 and receive 2 Click on System 3 Click on the System tab 4 Use the Locale drop down list for some lo
434. sed for 4100 and 7400 Series phone support by connection to a Digital Mobility Solution 349 system The module is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the 1P500 Digital Station 16A and IP500 Digital Station 30A respectively Connection is via 1 16 port version or 2 30 port version J21 connectors Supported on Locales Software Level I ncluded Power Supply Mounting Dimensions Weight IP500v2 only Supported in all IP Office locales IP Office core software level 7 0 minimum Bin file nadcpaV1 bin Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply module The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit It can be wall mounted using the 1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Unboxed 3 5Kg 7 8Ibs Boxed 4 8Kg 10 8lbs Based on DS30A IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 231 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IPO 500 Digital Station A Connections ARYA IP Office 500 n Digital Station a 16 25
435. ser Setup Yes e ISDN Switch Protocol Standard ETSI Euro ISDN e Maximum Time on Call 480 e Auto Answer Yes e Numbers blank e PIP Auto e SPID blank e Far Control of Near Camera Yes e Audio Quality 168KB s e MP Mode Auto e Advanced Dialing Dial Channels in Parallel System Information 1 Admin Software and Hardware Hardware e Release 7 0 1 e Camera NTSC e Model VS 512 e Video Comm Interface ISDN _Quad_ BRI e Network Interface Type S T Interface Admin Video Network Admin Video Network Call Preference e MultiPoint Setup Auto e ISDN Video Calls H 320 Yes IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 138 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes So8 BRI Module 6 10 SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a standard network protocol that allows the monitoring and management of data devices across a network An SNMP agent can be built into network devices such as routers and hubs An SNMP manager application for example CastleRock or HP OpenView can then communicate with those devices IP Office 2 0 and above supports SNMP communication This communication can be e Polling Some SNMP applications called managers send out polling messages to the network They then record the responds of any SNMP enabled devices called agents This allows the application to create a network map and to raise an alarm when devices previously present do not respond e
436. ses Some upgrades may require entry of upgrade licenses e Partner Version Installation e Compact DECT Installation e one X Portal for IP Office Installation e IP DECT R4 Installation e 4600 5600 Series IP Phone Installation e 3600 Series Wireless IP Installation e Embedded Voicemail nstallation e Phone Manager Installation Manual e Voicemail Pro Installation e SoftConsole Installation Manual e Contact Store Installation e SIP Extension Configuration Information Web Sites IP Office documentation is available from the following web sites e Avaya Support http support avaya com Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office Copies of the IP Office CD images are available from this site and updated core software bin files e Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Access to an on line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 72 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Documentation 4 3 Unpacking Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya reseller or distributor Information Required e O Equipment Checklist An installation checklist of the parts and equipment ordered for the installation Procedure 1 0 Check for Packaging Damage Before unpacking any equipment check for any signs of damage
437. set System Monitor uses the IP Office s System Password The System Monitor Password and System Password are both set within the IP Office system security settings e For an IP Office system ensure that the Control Unit Type is set to IP Office 5 Click OK 3 6 Phone Based Administration For systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes many features can be administered using phone based administration This option is not used for IP Office Standard Version mode Some settings cannot be changed through phone based administration for example IP address and SIP trunk settings Those settings are only used in conjunction with network systems for which it is assumed that IP Office Manager will be used for system configuration Phone based administration is only possible using either of the first two extension in the system The phone connected at those positions also needs to be capable of being used for phone based admin e Supported phones are ETR 18D ETR 34D M7310 M7310N M7324 M7324N T7316E T7316 1408 and 1416 phones e The card fitted into Slot 1 of the control unit must be the correct type to support the phones e For details refer to the Phone Based Administration manual IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 68 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 4 IP500v2 Installation
438. sful Press any key to continue 9 Within Manager select File Advanced Reboot and reboot the IP Office system 10 Following the system restart the 2400 and 5400 Series phones will display Upgrading firmware please wait and then FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS 11 Once all the phones have completed their upgrade double click on turn_ off bat IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 130 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Upgrading the IP Office Software 6 7 Out of Building Telephone Installations The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be connected to the IP Office system In these scenarios additional protection in the form of protective grounding and surge protectors must be fitted dB WARNING The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage It merely reduces the chances of damage Main Building Secondary Building CO Analog l Lines Analog Module Phone Module OS Module mie Analog Phone Digital Station Earthed Ducted External Contact Approved Ground Point Closure Device I Cabling I e Cables of different types for example trunk lines phone extensions ground and power connections should be kept separate e All cabling between buildings should be enclosed i
439. should not be covered or blocked 4 Mechanical Loading Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading 5 Circuit Overloading Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern 6 Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips 7 l Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 188 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Rack Mounting FATA AAA a IPO 500 Rack Mounting Kit 00429202 P P lt m M 450mm 18 1 e l Only the screws provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 189 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 8 13 Wall Mounting 1P500 1P500v2 control units and 1P500 external expansion modules can be wall mounted To do
440. sion ports for external expansion modules The card is supplied with four 2m yellow interconnect cables i le This card does not accept any IP500 trunk daughter card e Maximum 1 per control unit Right hand slot 4 only e Supported Expansion Modules The following external expansion modules are supported e 1P500 Analogue Trunk Module e 1P500 Phone Module e P500 BRI So Module e 1P400 Digital Station V2 Modules e IP500 Digital Station Modules e 1P400 Phone V2 Modules e 1P500 Digital Station Modules A This card provides 6 digital station ports 1 6 2 analog extension ports 7 8 and 2 BRI trunk ports 9 10 4 channels The card also includes 10 voice compression channels e This card has a pre installed 1P500 BRI trunk daughter card 22 gt e Maximum 2 combination cards per 1P500v2 control unit regardless of type Not supported by IP500 control units e P Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode systems are limited to a maximum of 12 BRI channels using BRI Combination and or BRI trunk daughter cards This card provides 6 digital station ports 1 6 2 analog extension ports 7 8 and 4 analog trunk ports 9 12 The card also includes 10 voice compression channels e This card has a pre installed 1P500 analog trunk daughter card 22 gt e Maximum 2 combination cards per 1P500v2 control unit regardless of type Not supported by IP500 control units e The
441. ss defaults the IP Office security settings and its configurations settings 2 Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office s configuration before performing this action If a copy of the configuration cannot be downloaded using Manager check the Manager application directory for previously downloaded configurations f Use Manager to download an up to date copy of the configuration If that is not possible check in the Manager application folder for a previous copy of the configuration g Using IP Office Manager select File Open Configuration h Using the Select IP Office Menu locate and select the IP Office system Click OK i Enter the name and password for a service user account on that IP Office Click OK Manager will receive and display the configuration from the IP Office e If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system e This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office prior to any following process j Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC 2 Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit a Start the terminal program on your PC Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings 144 Within a HyperTerminal session the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen b Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal pr
442. stallation Page 83 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Wall Mounting Process Figure 1 Figure 4 Figure 6 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 1 Shutdown the System Ensure that the system has been shutdown and power has been removed from all the units e f mounting a control unit you must wait at least 15 minutes after removing the power cord before fitting the flame screen e Shutdown the system using a shutdown command and then remove power Do not simply remove the power 2 Fit the Flame Screen Mandatory Control Units Only See Figure 1 E WARNING The flame screen mesh must be fitted a Remove the cards or blank slot covers from the left hand and right hand slots b Insert the flame screen into the bottom of the control unit with the two black plastic pegs at the front c Press the two pegs through the air flow holes in the control unit casing d Check that the pegs have come through and have secured the flame screen in place and that the screen is flush with the chassis 3 Attach Brackets on One Side See Figure 2 On one side of the unit attach one pair of the metal brackets e Only use the screws provided with the wall mounting kit for attaching the metal brackets 4 Attach the Cable Cover and Bracket See Figure 3 Use of the cable covers is optional If not being used simply attach the other pair of brackets to the other side of the
443. star Version A system fitted with this type of card will default to A Law telephony and IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version mode Key System operation Supported only in Middle East and North African locales Overall Capacity Extensions Maximum Extensions 100 100 100 Trunks IP Office IP Office IP Office IP Office Essential Essential Essential Standard Edition Edition Edition Version PARTNER Norstar Quick Version Version Version 10 Maximum H323 IP Channels 32 12 30 20 100 Extension in 3 digit extension numbering mode only 48 extensions in 2 digit extension numbering mode e In non IP Office Standard Version mode the system assumes that the base control unit is always fully populated with up to 32 extensions either real or phantom or a mix to which it assigns extension numbers in sequence It does this before assigning extension numbers to any real extensions on attached external expansion modules up to the system extension limit If the system extension limit has not been exceeded any remaining extension numbers are assigned to additional phantom extensions Non IP Office Standard Version mode systems support 3 SIP channels without licenses Additional channels up to the limit require licenses IP Office Standard Version mode systems require licenses for all channels In all modes voice compression hardware resources are also required for SIP support Non IP Office Sta
444. stem Locale n 101 5 2 Changing the IP Address Settings 102 5 3 Changing the Default PasswordS 103 5 4 Extension NumberinQ 105 So Entenng EIGCHSCSe cetec sesso eda ia 107 5 6 Disable Unused TFUNKS 108 5 7 Setting the Digital Trunk Clock Source 110 5 8 Setting the Trunk PrefiXeS rreren 112 6 Additional Processes 6 1 Switching Off an IP Office System 117 6 2 Rebooting an IP Office SyStem 119 6 3 Memory Card REMOVAl 120 6 4 Changing ComponentSs 122 6 5 Swapping Extension USEersS e 124 6 6 Upgrading the IP Office Software 125 6 6 1 Using the Upgrade Wizard 126 6 6 2 Using an SD Card i 128 6 6 3 Upgrading 2400 5400 Phones 129 6 7 Out of Building Telephone Installations 131 Ol ADS RRoneszsaicanr ie alain 132 6 7 2 Analog Phone Barrier BoX 133 6 7 3 Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes 134 6 8 Using the External Output Port 135 6 8 1 Port Connection i 135 6 9 S08 BRIM dUlE e a ea a 136 6 9 1 Example 1 ISDN Terminal 136 6 9 2 Exam
445. stems upgraded to IP Office Release 7 0 e Mobility Features These legacy licenses were used to enable mobility features for example mobile twinning or mobile call control for users set to the Basic User profile e IPO LIC MOBILE WORKER RFA 1 195569 e IPO LIC MOBILE WORKER RFA 5 195570 e IPO LIC MOBILE WORKER RFA 20 195572 e one X Portal for I P Office These legacy licenses were used to enable one X Portal for IP Office support for users set to the Basic User profile The licenses were purchased as part of the IP Office Release 5 Power User license packages e UMS Web Services These licenses are used to enable UMS voicemail services support for users set to the Basic User profile Other users are enabled for UMS through their licensed user profile These licenses are also used to license hunt groups for UMS voicemail services e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 1 USER 217880 e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 5 USER 217881 e IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 20 USER 217883 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 391 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 17 5 Voicemail Pro Licenses Support for Voicemail Pro is enable by the addition of a Preferred Edition license e Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro 1P400 LIC PREFRD VMPRO 171991 This license enables support for Voicemail Pro as the IP Office s voicemail server with 4 voicemail ports The Preferred Edition license allows the voicemail server to provide the services lis
446. sting working card is not necessary before using recreate to update the card contents e The source for the files copied to the SD card are the sub folders of the Memory Cards folder under Manager s Working Directory normally C Program Files Avaya I P Office Manager However if the Working Directory is changed to a location without an appropriate set of Memory Cards sub folders the required set of files will not be copied onto the SD card 1 Once started do not interrupt this process for example by removing the SD card This process takes approximately 15 minutes 2 Insert the SD card into a card reader on the Manager PC 3 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Recreate IP Office SD Card 4 Select IP Office A Law IP Office U Law or IP Office Partner Version This selection will affect how the IP Office systems operates when defaulted with this card present in its System SD card slot 5 Browse to the card location and click OK 6 Manager will start creating folders on the SD card and copying the required files into those folders This process will take approximately 15 minutes 7 Do not remove the SD card during the process Wait until the Manager displays a message Avaya IP Office Manager LU System SD Card successfully recreated lo 4 4 2 Adding a Pre Built Configuration File IP Office Manager can be used to create an IP Office configuration file 76 For 1P500v2 control units such a pre created
447. supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card D I nstallation Requirements e O Installation space either on or under the existing IP Office control unit e O Switched power outlet socket e O Available EXPANSION port on the control unit e O Grounding Requirements e O Functional Grounding Connection of a functional earth 38 gt is e O Recommend for all modules e O Connection of a functional ground is mandatory for Analog Trunk module e O Protective Grounding Connections of a protective ground via surge protection equipment 3 is e O Mandatory for Analog trunk modules in the Republic of South Africa e O Mandatory for Digital Station and Phone modules connected to out of building extensions e O Mandatory for Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 modules ff Tools Required e O Manager PC e O Tools for rack mounting 188 optional IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 186 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Adding External Expansion Modules tS Parts and Equipment Required 1 0 e O External Expansion Module Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a 1m blue interconnect cable 2m Yellow interconnect cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card and should only be used with that card e O Power cord for the power supply unit 34 e O Rack mounting kit 40 optional e O Cable labeling tags Procedure 1 Switch off power to
448. t cable can be used in place of the standard blue cable 4 Yellow cables are supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card I gt e n i e P _ e P Jr I ds ile li E ju JP ll dl Ji O dd j _ i IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 28 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview External Expansion Modules 1 6 1 IP500 External Expansion Modules The following IP500 external expansion modules are supported by IP Office Release 7 0 Each module uses an external power supply unit 33 gt supplied with the module A locale specific power cord 34 for the PSU must be ordered separately If being rack mounted these units use the IP500 rack mounting kit They can be wall mounted using the new wall mounting kit V2 e Systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version mode support up to 8 external expansion modules so long as the system extensions limit is not exceeded e Systems running in IP Office Standard Version mode support 8 external expansion modules or 12 if the control unit is fitted with an IP500 4 Port Expansion Base Card e I P500 Digital Station Module 229 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or 30 DS 376 ports for supported Avaya DS digital phones 43 gt e IP500 Digital Station A Module 23 Provides depending on variant an additional 16 or
449. t port needs to be upgraded again except following a system reboot i e multiple phones cannot be upgraded by Swapping the connected phones on the same IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 96 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Connecting Phones e Avaya 2400 Series and 5400 Series phones need to have upgrading turned on or off Refer to Upgrading 2400 5400 Phones 129 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 97 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 5 Initial Configuration IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 99 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 5 Initial Configuration This section covers basic configuration changes required for all IP Office systems e Setting the System Locale 10 Setting the correct system locale affects a wide range of settings including trunk settings The correct locale must be set for a system to operate correctly e Extension Numbering 105 Renumber the user extensions if required e Change the Default Passwords 103 The default passwords used for configuration access to the IP Office system should be changed e Change the IP Address DHCP Settings 102 If necessary the IP address and DHCP mode of the IP Office system can be changed e Entering Licenses 107 If not already done enter licenses for features that require them e Trunk Configuration Some basic trunk configuration may be required e Remove Unu
450. t used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting 1P500 cards 78 Adding External Expansion Modules 88 gt 4 Restart the IP Office system Higher Capacity Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type but higher capacity when restarted the IP Office will automatically create configuration entries for the new trunks or extensions users 1 Switch off the IP Office system 117 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting 1P500 cards 78 Adding External Expansion Modules 88 gt 4 Restart the IP Office system 5 Use Manager to configure the new trunks or extensions users Lower Capacity Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type but lower capacity after restarting the IP Office the configuration will need to be edited to remove redundant entries 1 Switch off the IP Office system 117 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting 1P500 cards 78 Adding External Expansion Modules 88 gt 4
451. tandard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 700451248 700451255 700451263 Page 269 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Material Description Code Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V KOREA 700451271 Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V CHINA 700451289 Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V AUSTRALIA 700451297 Labels 1603 Paper DESI Labels Pack of 50 Labels 8 5 x 11 700415706 1603 Paper DESI Labels Pack of 50 Labels A4 700434210 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 270 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Phones 9 11 7 1608 This phone is supported with IP Office 4 2 and higher Support for the variant was added in IP Office Release 6 0 and in 5 0 maintenance releases e The availability of VCM Voice Compression Module 46 channels is necessary to support IP telephony For IP Office 6 0 these phones require an Avaya IP Endpoints 389 license Connects via IP network IP Office Release 4 2 Q4 2008 Programmable Buttons w 8 Headset Socket n Handsfree Speaker Microphone f f Message Waiting Lamp ni PoE Class Typical Idle Power Class 2 Consumption 4 7W Display 3 x 24 backlit Supported Add Ons None Upgradeable Firmware nl PC Pass Through Port with Voice lt lt Priority Fixed Function Keys A SPEAKER if 3 HEADSET Z MUTE nd dm VOLUME UP wf BH CONTACTS wf E MESSAGE f amp F HOLD A CHC TRANSFER WF VOLUME DOWN zE CALL LOG DROP
452. te the documentation s and product s should be construed as granting by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc All non Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Page 2 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Contents 1 System Overview Lal IP OMGE MORES cece ected tot ae eset death at 1 1 1 Hardware Support Summary 1 1 2 Feature Support SUMMA ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees LACON UNS ssie ats tscrean dees Meio ES 1 3 IP500v2 System Components 1 4 IP500 Office System Components 1 5 Control Unit Cards arri 1 5 1 IP 500 Base Gards cri n 1 5 2 IP 500 Trunk Cards naar 1 5 3 IP400FrunkCardssnscataie aa 125 4 OlherCardssLia labii 1 6 External Expansion ModulesS 1 6 1 IP500 External Expansion Modules 1 6 2 IP400 External
453. te the process Any current calls and services will be ended by the reboot Manual Changing to IP Office Standard Version Mode 1 Using IP Office Manager receive the configuration from the system 2 When requested enter the service user name and password The defaults are Administrator and password 3 The IP Office Manager application will automatically switch to its simplified view as the configuration from a system running in IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version 4 Select File Advanced Switch to Standard Mode Default 5 The configuration will be changed to a default one for a IP Office Standard Version system and IP Office Manager will switch to its advanced view mode 6 This is a suitable time to begin initial configuration 100 before sending the configuration back to the IP Office system to restart in IP Office Standard Version mode 7 Once the system has rebooted use IP Office Manager to again receive the configuration from the system The user name and password for configuration should be the IP Office Standard Version mode defaults Administrator and Administrator Automating the Change to IP Office Standard Version Mode If the only systems that you install are IP Office Standard Version mode the Manager application can be used to automate part of the process above l In IP Office Manager select File Preferences 2 On the Preferences sub tab enable Convert default Quick mode to Standard mode Preferences
454. ted below Additional license can be added for additional voicemail features these are detailed separately This license was previously called Voicemail Pro 4 ports e Mailboxes for all users and hunt groups e Campaigns e Announcements for users and hunt groups e TTS email reading for users licensed to Mobile Worker or Power User profiles e Customizable call flows l e Use of Conference Meet Me functions on IP500 e Call recording to mailboxes and IP500v2 systems e Advanced Edition This license enables the additional features listed below A Preferred Edition license is a pre requisite for this license e IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION RFA LIC DS 229424 e IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION TRIAL RFA LIC DS 229425 e Support for Customer Call Reporter including 1 e Voicemail Pro Visual Basic Scripting Supervisor e Voicemail Pro call recording to ContactStore 2 e Voicemail Pro database interaction IVR e Voicemail Pro call flow generic TTS 8 ports 1 1 Provides up to 8 ports of TTS for use with Speak Text actions within Voicemail Pro call flows Not used for user TTS email reading 2 Note In a Small Community Network using centralized voicemail this license only enables ContactStore support for the central IP Office Remote IP Offices in the network require their own Advanced Edition license or a VMPro Recordings Administrator license e Preferred Edition Additional Voicemail Ports The required license for Voicema
455. ted equipment has its own supply socket The web site http www avayaups com provides a calculator into which you can enter the equipment you want supported on a UPS It will then display various UPS options The site uses VA values for typical IP Office systems However if more specific values are required for a particular system the table below can be used to enter values Typical IP Office System Typical IP Office System 230 IP500v2 System 230 IP500 System Analog 16 Module 88 Phone 30 Module 42 Digital Station 16 Module 34 Typical Server PC 600 Digital Station 30 Module 42 Typical Desktop PC 400 Phone 8 Module 17 Mid Span PSU 6 ports 150 Phone 16 Module 23 Mid Span PSU 12 24 ports 300 So8 Module 34 e The 1151D2 power supply unit for Avaya H 323 IP phones includes a backup battery This typically provides 15 minutes backup at maximum load 20 Watts and up to 8 hours at light load 2 Watts IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 35 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 1 7 4 Cabling and Cables The IP Office systems are designed primarily for use within an RJ 45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling and RJ 45 sockets A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ 45 patch panel in the communications data room to individual RJ 45 sockets at user locations All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are connected straight thr
456. telephone calls and data traffic Each control unit includes 4 slots for optional base cards to support trunk and phone extension ports gt Avaya SD Card 42 This uniquely numbered dongle is used to validate license keys entered into the system s configuration to enable features A dongle is mandatory for correct system operation even if no licensed features are being used 1P500v2 control units use an Avaya SD card which is slotted into the rear of the control unit This card also provides embedded voicemail Support and storage for system software files I P500 Base Cards 19 The 1P500v2 control unit has slots for up to 4 IP500 base cards These can be used to add ports for analog extensions digital extensions voice compression channels and other resources e IP500 Digital Station Base Card 212 e 1P500 Analog Phone Base Card 209 e IP500 VCM Base Card 216 e IP500 Legacy Card Carrier 214 e IP500 4 Port Expansion Base Card 20 e IP500 TCM8 Base Card 215 e IP500 ETR6 Base Card 213 IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards 22 Many of the IP500 base cards can be fitted with an 1P500 daughter card in order to support various types of trunk connections e 1P500 Analog Trunk Card 220 e IP500 BRI Trunk Card 22t e IP500 PRI Trunk Card 222 IP500 Combination Cards 19 These card are pre paired base and daughter cards They provide 6 digital station ports 2 analog phone ports 10 voice compression channels and either 4 analog t
457. tem Item SAP Code DBM32 BUTTON MODULE 700469968 Accessories 1600 SERIES BM32 CABLE REPLACEMENT 700415581 1600 SERIES BM32 BOND BRIDGE REPLACEMENT 700415599 1616 BM32 PLASTIC LABEL COVERS 20 REPLACEMENT 700415672 1600 SERIES BM32 FLIP STAND REPLACEMENT 700432800 Paper Labels 1616 BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS 8 5 x 11 700415656 1616 BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS A4 700434236 e Ty Note for Australian installations only Installations of the 1416 terminal with an 1151 PSU and DBM32 must be restricted to the same building as the host Gateway That is the 1416 if installed with an 1151 PSU and DBM32 cannot be connected in a campus environment where the 1416 terminal is installed in a building separate from the building housing the Gateway This application cannot be used with exposed out of building wiring e For installations in which the 1416 is used without the 1151 PSU and DBM32 campus connections are acceptable the 1416 can be located in a separate building in these cases e This restriction applies to Australian installations only IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 341 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 12 5 EU24 The maximum number of button module buttons supported of any type on a single system is 1024 337 Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons For additional limitations see Phone Add Ons 337 e Ty Only the cable su
458. tem Overview This documentation is intended to assist with the installation of the core components of an Avaya IP Office Standard Version mode telephone system It describes those components and factors that should be considered for an installation e The IP Office is a converged voice and data communications system It should therefore only be installed by persons with telephony and IP data network experience e Installers must be trained on IP Office systems Through its Avaya University 51 AU Avaya provides a range of training courses including specific IP Office implementation and installation training It also provides certification schemes for installers to achieve various levels of IP Office accreditation e It is the installer s responsibility to ensure that all installation work is done in accordance with local and national regulations and requirements It is also their responsibility to accurately establish the customer s requirements before installation and to ensure that the installation meets those requirements e You should read and understand this documentation before installation You should also obtain and read the Avaya Technical Bulletins relevant to recent IP Office software and hardware releases to ensure that you are familiar with any changes to the IP Office equipment and software IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 9 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Documentation The follow
459. th a timed reboot allowing the card upgrade to be done during normal operation hours followed by a reboot outside of normal operation hours If the card is being used for embedded voicemail that service is not available while the card is shutdown Licensed features however will continue running for up to 2 hours while the card is shutdown 1 Shutdown the System SD memory card 167 and remove it from the control unit 2 Follow the process for recreating the SD card 157 This process will overwrite the software files on the card with the files available to IP Office Manager It will not affect any other files for example the configuration file and embedded voicemail mesages This process takes approximately 15 minutes 3 When the recreate process has completed reinsert the card into the control unit s System SD card slot 4 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Reboot 5 In the Select IP Office menu select the 1P500v2 system and click OK 6 Select the type of reboot that you want performed and click OK a the system is rebooted as it restarts it will load the software files in the primary folder of the System SD card IP Office Standard Version Installation Bage 165 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7 5 3 Upgrading Using an Optional SD Card This method allows an Optional SD card to be used as the source from which the System SD card is upgraded It only upgrades the software files it does not update
460. that may have occurred during transit If any damage exists bring it to the attention of the carrier 2 0 Check the Correct Parts Have Been Delivered Check all cartons against the packing slip and ensure that you have the correct items Report any errors or omissions to the equipment supplier 3 0 Retain All Packaging and Documentation While unpacking the equipment retain all the packaging material Fault returns are accepted only if repackaged in the original packaging If performing a staged installation the original packaging will also assist when repacking equipment to be moved to the final install site 4 0 Ensure that Anti Static Protection Measures are Observed Ensure that anti static protection measures are observed at all times when handling equipment with exposed electrical circuit boards 5 0 Check All Parts Visually inspect each item and check that all the necessary documentation and accessory items have been included Report any errors or omissions to the dealer who supplied the equipment 6 0 Check All Documentation Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with the equipment IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 73 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 4 SD Card Preparation 1P500v2 control units are supplied with no installed firmware or configuration When first powered up the control unit will load and install the necessary firmware from the System SD card installed in it It will th
461. the International Prefix 2 If the Country Code has been set and an incoming number begins with that Country Code or with the International Prefix and Country Code they are replace with the National Prefix 3 1f the Country Code has been set and the incoming number does not start with the National Prefix or International Prefix the International Prefix is added 4 1f the incoming number does not begin with either the National Prefix or International Prefix then the Prefix is added For example if the SIP Line is configured with prefixes as follows e Line Prefix 9 e National Prefix 90 e International Prefix 900 e Country Code 44 Number Received Processing 441707362200 Resulting Number Following rule 1 above the is replace with the International Prefix 900 resulting in 900441707362200 Prefix 9 901707362200 The number now matches the International Prefix 900 and Country Code 44 Following rule 2 above they are replace with the National 0 00441707362200 Following rule 2 above the International Prefix 900 and the Country 90107362200 Code 44 are replaced with the National Prefix 90 441707362200 National Prefix 90 6494770557 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Following rule 2 above the Country Code 44 is replace with the Following rule 3 above the the International Prefix 900 is added 901707362200 9006494770557 Page 113 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 M
462. the System SD card The LED is used as follows 3 e Off Card shutdown 167 e Red flashing Card initializing or shutting down e Green on Card present e Red fast flashing card full e Green flashing Card in use e Red steady Card failure wrong type e Orange steady Reset imminent RJ45 socket The port is a full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover port With the WAN port forms a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch This port is not supported on systems running in IP Office WAN 380 Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version or IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes rh Used for connection of a functional or protective ground 9 Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 201 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 2 IP500 Control Unit The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right They can be used in any order However if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled The unit must not be used with uncovered slots Feste mi r__t Maximum Extensions Conference Parties Trunks Cards Voice Compression Channels Voicemail Channels Locales Software Level Power Supply Mounting Dimensions Memory Up to 384 extensions 128 as standard but maximum 64 in
463. the base card 1P500 Digital Station Base Card 212 This card provides 8 DS digital station ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per control unit e 4400 Series phones 4406D 4412D and 4424D are not Supported on this card They are supported on external expansion module DS ports e Connections for 4100 7400 M Series and T Series phones use the 1P500 TCM8 Digital Station card The card is available in two variants Supporting either 2 or 8 analog phone ports e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 4 per control unit e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 I1P500 TCM8 Digital Station Card 215 ee This card provides 8 TCM digital station ports for the connection of he Avaya 4100 7400 M Series and T Series phones e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 4 per control unit per 1P500v2 control unit Not supported by IP500 control units
464. the right on the rear of the module eE EEA EEO 2 EEEE DC hF i OTE EXPANSION isti 16 24d DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE ve e On some older modules the dedicated ground point screw is not present In those cases the top center cover fixing screw 3mm can be used as an alternative ground connection point A toothed washer should be added to ensure good contact IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 194 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500 Basic Installation Grounding IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 195 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Chapter 9 system Components IP Office Standard Version Installation ffice 7 0 Page 197 IPO 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 System Components This section covers the individual components that can comprise an IP Office installation e Control Units 199 e IP500 Base Cards 205 e IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards 218 e IP500 External Expansion Modules 223 e Feature Keys SD Cards 236 e 1P400 Trunks Cards 239 e 1P400 Internal Cards 244 e 1P400 External Expansion Modules 246 e Mounting Kits 260 e Phones 262 e Phone Add Ons 337 e Ancilliary Systems 349 e Applications 35t e Physical Ports 370 e Licenses 386 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 198 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components 9 1 IP500v2 Control Unit The slots are nu
465. tor each use the same value Administrator Manager and Operator as their password For each of these service users e Click on the service user name In the Service User Details tab click on Change and enter a new password Click OK e Click OK IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 103 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7 Click on the B General The general security settings are displayed in the main display area General Security Administrator Unique Security Administrator F Minimum Password Complexity Low tu Previous Password Lirit Entries e Click on Change and enter a new password for the security administrator 8 Click on File Configuration to exit security configuration mode and return to the IP Office configuration Changing the Remote User Password The IP Office configuration contains a user whose password is used as the default for remote dial in access to the IP Office network The password of this user should be changed 1 Start Manager 66 and connect to the IP Office system 2 Click on i Users and in the list of users click on Remote Manager 3 On the User tab enter a new password for the user and click OK 4 Click on the al icon and save the updated configuration back to the IP Office system IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Page 104 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Initial Configuration Changing the Default Passwords 5 4 Extension
466. trol unit while it has power connected e General Notes e Cards can be fitted in any order into any available slots The only exception is the 1P500 4 Port Expansion card which can only be installed in right hand slot 4 e For phone based administration the card in slot 1 must be able to support ETR 18D ETR 34D M7324 M7310 T7316E T7316 1408 or 1416 phones Phone based administration is not supported in IP Office Standard Version mode e lt is recommended that cards are fitted from left to right e There are restrictions to the number of supported cards of some types When such a limit is exceed the right most card of that type will not function e Ensure that you use the labels supplied to identify the card fitted into the control unit IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 78 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation IP500 Card Installation 4 5 1 IP500 Daughter Card Preparation IP500 trunk daughter cards can be fitted to any 1P500 base card except the 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier For P500 Combination cards the trunk daughter card is pre installed and cannot be changed fT Warnings 1 Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards Parts and Equipment Required 1 0 1P500 Base Card except the 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier 2 0 1P500 Trunk Daughter Card 3 0 3 Stand Off Pillars These are supplied with the trunk daughter card Tools Required 1
467. trol units and expansion modules are marked with a rh or E symbol Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground I P500 1P500v2 Control Unit On IP500 control units the ground point is located above the RS232 DTE port External Expansion Modules On expansion modules the ground point is a 4mm screw located towards the right on the rear of the module eE EEA EEO 2 EEEE DC hF i OTE EXPANSION isti 16 24d DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 244 DC 1 5 4 PHONE ve e On some older modules the dedicated ground point screw is not present In those cases the top center cover fixing screw 3mm can be used as an alternative ground connection point A toothed washer should be added to ensure good contact IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 90 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Grounding 4 10 Network Connection The section below details how a new IP Office system determines what IP address it should use Note that this only applies for a new system loading IP Office Release 7 0 and higher IP Address and DHCP Mode Resolution When a defaulted or new IP Office control unit is switched on it requests IP address information from a DHCP Server on the network This operation will occur whether the LAN cable is plugged in or not The process below is
468. ts Phone Manager Phone Manager PhoneManager exe UDP 50796 UDP 50799 Phone Manager VOIP Server Phone Manager iClaritySvr exe UDP 1719 UDP 1720 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 358 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Applications Licenses License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item Phone Manager Pro per seat Enables Phone Manager Pro for 1 5 1P400 Phone Manager 1 177468 10 20 50 100 or unlimited users Pro 5 177469 The user s Phone Manager mode is set through the IP Office 10 177470 configuration User Telephony 20 177471 Phone Manager Type 50 177472 Phone Manager Pro IP Audio Enables Phone Manager Pro IP IP400 IPPRO 1 171992 Enabled per user softphone operation for a user 5 174463 Note Also requires the user to have a Phone Manager Pro license 10 174464 20 174465 50 174466 e In addition to entering Phone Manager licenses each user is individually configured for the expected Phone Manager type e During operation the number of Phone Manager license keys available and the number unused can be checked Run Phone Manager and select Help About Holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys click on the software version number IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 359 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 14 8 SoftConsole This is a licensed application It is intended for telepho
469. ts This allows existing RJ 45 structured cabling using pins 4 and 5 to be used without rewiring for up to two DS connection However each of these ports can be used to connect a second extension using pins 3 and 6 Main Building Secondary Building DSi control Unt a Team Digital Earthed Ducted i i abling Approved Ground Point Approved Ground Point RJ45 RJ45 Not used Not used Ring Il Optional Ring L I H E Tip ll Optional Not used 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 Tipl 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Not used IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 132 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Additional Processes Out of Building Telephone Installations 6 7 2 Analog Phone Barrier Box Where analog phone extensions are required in another building additional protective equipment must be used in the form of IP Office Phone Barrier Boxes and protective earth connections e fT CAUTION PHONE POT ports on the front of control units must not be used for extensions that are external to the main building e The correct IP Office specific barrier boxes must be used These modules have been designed specifically for the Signalling voltages used by the IP Office system e Only the IP Office Phone Barrier Box should be used with Phone V1 modules e Only the IP Office Phone Barr
470. tured as either an A Law variant or a Mu Law variant e For IP500 and IP500v2 systems the encoding default is set by the type of Feature Key installed when the system is first started IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 236 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components Feature Keys IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 237 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 6 2 IP500 Smart Card This type of feature key is used with 1P500 control units and is a mandatory item The control unit must be fitted with one of these feature keys even if no licenses are being used The serial number for licenses issued for use with this type of feature key is printed on the card and prefixed by SN Feature Key Dongle SAP Code Smart Card Feature Key Mu Law 700417470 Smart Card Feature Key A Law 700417488 e A Law or Mu Law PCM Pulse Code Modulation is a method for encoding voice as data In telephony two methods PCM encoding are widely used A law and Mu law also called U law Typically Mu law is used in North America and a few other locations while A law by the rest of the world As well as setting the correct PCM encoding for the region the A Law or Mu Law setting of an IP Office system when it is first started affects a wide range of regional defaults relating to line settings and other values e For IP400 IP Office systems each control units was manufactured as either an A Law variant o
471. tus e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Optional Trunk The card can be fitted with one trunk daughter card of any type The trunk daughter card Card Ports then uses ports 9 to 12 on the base card for its trunk connections Port LEDs LED use depends daughter card type fitted e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Card Green on Card fitted Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor BRI Card Off No trunk present Green on Trunk present Green flashing Trunk in use IPO 500 Extn Card Dgtl Sta 8 IP Office 500 Extension Card Digital Station 8 700417330 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 212 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Base Cards 9 3 6 ETR6 Card This card is used to add 6 ETR phone extension ports to an 1P500v2 control unit This card is only supported by 1P500v2 systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER V
472. tware level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables IPO 500 BRI So8 700449515 eaten C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 e 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 I1P500 Wall Mounting Kit V2 All 700500923 I1P500 Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 228 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP500 Expansion Modules 9 5 3 Digital Station IP Office 500 Digital Station modules can be used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system The module is available in 16 and 30 port variants referred to as the I1P500 Digital Station 16 and IP500 Digital Station 30 respectively Supported on Locales Software Level Included Power Supply Mounting Dimensions IP500 and IP500v2 Supported in all IP Office locales IP Office core software level 2 1 31 minimum Bin file nadcpV2 bin Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply module The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 for the external PSU is required but is
473. uld be via a master socket with ringing capacitors No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions BRI Trunk Each trunk port supports 2B D channels ETSI or AusTS013 basic rate protocol set through the IP Office configuration LEDs e Off No trunk present e Green on Trunk present e Green flashing Trunk in use e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IPO IP500v2 COMBINATION IPO IP500v2 COMBINATION CARD BRI 700476021 CARD BRI IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 211 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 9 3 5 Digital Station This card is used to add digital station DS extension ports to an IP500 and IP500v2 control unit It provides 8 RJ 45 DS extension ports for use with Avaya digital phones A further 4 RJ45 ports are provided for trunk connections when an 1P500 trunk card is fitted to this card e Supports Provides 8 DS 376 ports for digital stations 43 gt except 3800 4100 4400 7400 M and T Series e 1P500 Control Unit e IP500v2 Control Unit e Maximum per Control Unit 3 per control unit e 1P500 Trunk Card Support 1 Port Type Ports Features Digit Station Provides DS 376 ports for digital stations 43 except 4100 4400 7400 M and T Series LEDS e Green On Phone detected e LED1 is also used for base card sta
474. umber of simultaneous Phone Manager Pro users The user s Phone Manager software then automatically changes from Lite mode to Professional Edition mode e Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone 358 This is a PC softphone mode of Phone Manager operation The user acts as a VoIP extension making calls through the speaker and microphone of their PC This mode requires further licenses in addition to the Phone Manager Pro licenses e SoftConsole 360 This is a licensed application It is intended for telephone system operators or receptionists It displays details of calls and allows them to quickly see the status of the callers required destination and transfer the call The SoftConsole user is able to access a range of details about the status of users and groups on the IP Office system Up to 4 simultaneous SoftConsole users can be licensed For systems running in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Version and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Version modes the following is supported e TAPILink Lite 362 The Microsoft Telephony Application Program Interface TAPI allows TAPI compliant applications to interact with IP Office phones by installing an IP Office TAPI driver TAPILink Lite does not require any licenses entered into the IP Office system s configuration It allows TAPI compliant applications such as Outlook to make and answer calls The speech part of the calls is still via the user s physical p
475. umbered 1 to 4 from left to right Normally they can be used in any order however if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled Each base card includes an integral front panel with ports for cable connections Typically the first 8 ports on the left are for connection of extension devices The 4 ports on the left are used for connection of trunks if a trunk daughter card 22 gt is added to the base card IP500 Digital Station Base Card 212 This card provides 8 DS digital station ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per control unit e 4400 Series phones 4406D 4412D and 4424D are not Supported on this card They are supported on external expansion module DS ports e Connections for 4100 7400 M Series and T Series phones use the 1P500 TCM8 Digital Station card The card is available in two variants supporting either 2 or 8 analog phone ports e The card can be fitted with an P500 trunk daughter card 22 gt which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 4 per control unit e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an 1P500 Analog Trunk daughter card dur
476. upplies and Cables Standard P Office Cables The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems The maximum length is applicable if the standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternate cable Cable Description SAP Code Standard Maximum Length Length 9 Way DTE Cable 144 Connects to control unit RS232 DTE port 9 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling DS Line Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11 socketed TT700047871 4m 13 2 See table Cable 376 DS and analog phones below BRI PRI Trunk Cable 375 Connects BRI PRI trunk ports to the line 700213440 3m 9 10 l provider s network termination point RJ 45 to RJ 45 Red Expansion Interconnect Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457 1m 3 3 1m 3 3 Cable 379 modules RJ 45 to RJ 45 Blue May be replaced by a yellow interconnect cable 2m 6 6 700472871 supplied with the 1P500 4 Port Expansion 208 card when using that card LAN Cable 380 Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 700213481 3m 9 10 100m 328 devices RJ 45 to RJ 45 Grey The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP 50nf Km Telephone AWG22 AWG24 AWG26 CW1308 0 65mm 0 5mm 0 4mm 1400 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 2400 5400 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 4406D Ph
477. ure that pins 1 and 2 are always at a positive voltage with respect to pin 3 3 5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre wired sealed modules It may be necessary to use a multi meter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug Typically 3 common to both relays is the cable screen IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 135 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 6 9 So8 BRI Module 6 9 1 Example 1 ISDN Terminal In this example calls on DID 123456 are routed to the first port of the So8 expansion module That port has been configured as Line Group ID 701 1 Configure an Incoming Call Routing The destination is a short code that directs the call to the line group ID that contains the So lines The Bearer Capability has been set to Any to allow data and voice via this route e Line Group ID 0 e Incoming Number 123456 e Destination 123456 e Bearer Capability Any 2 Create a System Short Code This is the destination used in the Incoming Call Route e Short Code 123456 e Telephone Number 123456 e Line Group ID 701 e Feature Dial 3 Send the configuration to the Control Unit Any call coming into the main system on DID 123456 will now be passed directly to the first port If you wish to assign DIDs from your main pool to individual ports and avoid network charges when dialing between them try variations on the following 1 You have DID ranges for example 7325551000 to
478. using CAT3 UTP cabling This approach allows telephone and data traffic to share the same wiring infrastructure and simplifies equipment moves e Mounting Kits 40 The control unit can be used free standing with external expansion modules stacked above it With optional rack mounting kits the control unit and external expansion modules can also be rack mounted Alternatively with an optional wall mounting kit the 1P500 control unit can be wall mounted 1P500 external expansion modules can also be wall mounted e Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes 39 Where the installation includes extensions in other buildings additional protective equipment is required This equipment may also be required in areas where the lightning risk is high e Phones 43 IP Office systems support a variety of Avaya digital and IP phones plus analog phones e Application DVDs The IP Office applications can be ordered on a number of DVDs In addition they can be downloaded from the IP Office section of the Avaya support web site http support avaya com e Embedded Voicemail Memory Card 25 This optional card can be used to support embedded voicemail IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 18 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Overview IP500 Office System Components 1 5 Control Unit Cards 1 5 1 IP500 Base Cards The 1P500 and IP500v2 control units have 4 slots for the insertion of P500 base cards The slots are n
479. utput For IP Office Release 5 0 and higher the IP Office control unit directly output SMDR records to a specified IP address Call Center Application e Customer Call Reporter 354 This application is installed on a server PC connected to the IP Office Users access the application from their PC using a web browser The application obtains data about the calls handled by CCR agents and groups from the IP Office system and stores that data in an MS SQL database It can support up to 150 agents and 75 supervisors CTI Applications e TAPI Link Pro Using the same software as TAPILink Lite TAPILink Pro provides all of the features and functionality of TAPI Link Lite but additionally provides third party CTI operation This means that a single server can control and monitor any number of telephone devices This requires entry of a CTI Link Pro license TAPILink Pro also provides the ability to monitor and control groups This allows an application to be notified when a call enters a queue and can also redirect it to another location e TAPI WAV driver Provides software based support for voice processing Purchasing the CTI Link Pro RFA license key also enables 4 ports of voice processing additional ports can be purchased in 4 port increments The TAPI WAV driver is for use with TAPI 2 1 only for TAPI 3 0 IP Office supports the Media Service Provider MSP interface defined by Microsoft in TAPI 3 0 e DevLink Pro Provides a real time event stre
480. viding either 2 or 8 analog extension ports e Supports Provides either 8 or 2 analog 373 phone ports depending on card variant e IP500 Control Unit e IP500v2 Control Unit f e Maximum per Control Unit 4 e IP500 Trunk Card Support 1 Port Type Ports Features Analog Supports ICLID modes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 Extension REN 2 1 for external bell device Off Hook current 25mA Ring Voltage 40V Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing Capacitor For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors If fitted with an analog trunk card for the Phone 8 during power failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12 Port LEDs e No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions e LED is also used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Optional Trunk The card can be fitted with one trunk daughter card of any type The trunk daughter card Card Ports then uses ports 9 to 12 on the base card for its trunk connections Port LEDs LED use depends daughter card type fitted e LED 9 is also used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Card Green on Card fitted
481. w Zealand connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e The DTE serial port on the rear of the module has been changed to a 9 pin D type socket Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition Locales Supported in all IP Office locales Software Level IP Office core software level 2 1 36 minimum Bin file dvpots bin Included Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific 1EC60320 C13 power cord 33 gt for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional 1P400 Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 2U Weight Unboxed 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Boxed 4 4Kg 9 7lbs Based on Phone 30 V2 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 254 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 System Components IP400 Expansion Modules Phone Module V2 Connections SMe 1P400 Phone a 13 20 21 22 FOT 25 26 27 28 23 20 e E EnA EEEE ee nE EA DC NF OTE EXPANSION
482. wer cord for the power supply unit 34 gt e O Rack mounting kit 40 optional e O Wall mounting kit 1P500 external expansion modules only optional e O Cable labeling tags IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 88 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 IP500v2 Installation Connecting External Expansion Modules Procedure 1 External expansion modules should not be attached to a control unit that has power 2 If the IP Office system is being installed in a rack attach the rack mounting kit 86 to the expansion module 3 Attach the external expansion module s power supply but do not switch power on 4 Connect the expansion interconnect cable from the module s EXPANSION port to the EXPANSION port on the control unit Make careful note of the port used and include this detail on the cable label and any other system records a 0 eee 09050 Preise o 990090608 i rie raletaletalate oh aktika 1005 aletta otagae ooo eobokok ae elerale tele et a ela lelaltta letale siate gogogo 36 IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 89 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 4 9 Grounding Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks All IP Office control units and external expansion modules must
483. xisting IP Office Admin suite via Add Remove Programs e If the existing suite is IP Office 3 2 or higher it is possible to upgrade without removing the previous installation However if the system already has a USB Feature Key the key should be removed prior to upgrading and then reinserted and the PC restarted 2 Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications DVD Select the option for the IP Office Administration Suit A folder window will display the installation files for the administration suite 3 Double click on setup exe 4 Select the language you want to use for the installation process This does not affect the language used by Manager when running Click Next gt 5 Select who should be able to run the Admin Suite applications Click Next gt 6 If required select the destination to which the applications should be installed We recommend that you accept the default destination Click Next gt 7 The next screen is used to select which applications in the suite should be installed Clicking on each will display a description of the application Click on the next to each application to change the installation selection When you have selected the installations required click Next gt i IP Office Admin Suite InstallShield Wizard Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a feature is installed Feature Description System Monitor 3
484. y 110 Components 355 License Requirements 355 PC Requirements 355 Prefix Dialing 112 Trunks 108 Upgrade Software 125 Memory card Removal 120 152 167 Modem Card 25 Module Polycom Video 137 Modules Trunk Interface 401 Monitor Application 48 Components 356 IP Office Standard Version Installation IP Office 7 0 Index License Requirements 356 PC Requirements 356 Protocols 366 MS CRM Application 48 N Network Assessments 45 New Configuration 76 O Operating Systems 369 Out of Building Connections 39 131 P Parallel Feature Key 42 PC Minimum Specifications 369 PC Base Licensing 42 PC Less Licensing 42 PF Port 370 PF Port 381 Phone POT Port 370 Phone POT Port 382 Phone 2000 Series 2402D 275 2410D 276 2420 2 Phone 3000 Series 3616 278 3620 279 3626 280 3641 281 3645 282 3701 283 3711 284 3810 289 DECT Handset 283 284 WiFi 278 279 280 281 282 Wireless 289 Phone 4000 Series 4406D 291 4412D 292 4424D 293 4601 294 4602IP 295 4602SW 295 4610SW 296 4620 297 4620SW 297 4621SW 298 4625SW 299 Phone 5000 Series 5402D 300 5410 301 5420D 302 5601 303 5602IP 304 5602SW 304 5610SW 305 5620 306 5621 307 Phone Manager Application 48 Components 358 Page 413 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 Phone Manager License Requirements 358 PC Requirements 358 Phone T3 Series Classic 334 Comfort 335 Compact 336 Polycom Video Module 137 Port Analog 3 70 373 Assigned 366 Audio 370
485. y System Card e The contents of the System SD card will be copied to the Optional SD card This process at least 90 minutes and can take much longer Using a System Phone This process can be used by a user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 1600 2400 4600 5400 5600 or 9600 Series phone excluding XX01 XX02 and XX03 models The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select Memory Card 4 Select Copy e The contents of the System SD card will be copied to the Optional SD card This process at least 90 minutes and can take much longer IP Office Standard Version Installation Page 161 IP Office 7 0 15 601042 Issue 23k 22 May 2011 7 4 4 Restoring from the Optional Card The files in the primary folder on the Optional SD card can be copied to the primary folder on the System SD card Any files with matching file names will be replaced The IP Office is then restarted using the files now in the System SD card s primary folder The restore process is separated into two parts either copying configuration files from the Optional SD card or copying software files from the Optional SD card This allows software files to be copied from an Optional SD card without affecting the existing configuration of that system e WARNING This process will require the I

IP Office 7.0 - Beatrice Companies, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents